Final Elec Specs

BUSINES PARK - P0015-821
KNOWLEDGE ECONOMIC CITY - KEC
MADINAH KSA
ELECTRICAL WORKS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MAY 2024
Page 1 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTRICAL WORKS
Division 26:
Section No. Description
260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

260513 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES.
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELETRICAL SYSTEMS.
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
261200 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS.
261300 GAS INSULATED METAL ENCLOSED MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262413 SWITCHBOARDS.
262416 PANELBOARDS.
262419 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES.
262713 ELECTRICTY METERING.
262726 WIRING DEVICES.
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
263213 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS.
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY.
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS.
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES.
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES.
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING.
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.
269999 List of Recommended Manufacturers
Page 2 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260500
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1
(General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B. It’s the Contractor responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the requirements of the
above.
C. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems, Section 260548.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
SASO 14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic (uPVC)
SASO 15 Method of Testing of Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic (uPVC)
SASO 33 Tungsten filament tamps for domestic and similar general lighting purposes"
Performance requirements"
SASO 34 Tungsten filament tamps for domestic and similar general lighting
SASO 51 Switches for domestic purposes
SASO 52 Methods of test for switches for domestic purposes
SASO 55 PVC insulated cables with circular copper conductors
SASO 56 Methods of test for PVC-insulated cables and cords with circular copper conductors
SASO 138 Methods of test for tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting purposes
SASO 139 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting purposes
SASO 147 Starters for fluorescent lamps
SASO 182 Standard voltages and frequency for A.C. transmission and distribution systems
Page 3 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SASO 203 Safety Measure for Electrical Installations in Residential Premises
SASO 254 Methods of testing plastic conduits and fittings for electrical installations
SASO 255 Plastic conduits and fittings for electrical installations
SASO 416 Methods of testing electric luminaries for road and street lighting
SASO 417 Electric luminaries for road and street lighting
SASO 443 Methods of testing plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar general use
SASO 444 Plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar general use
SASO 507 Methods of test for ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps
SASO 533 Fiberglass reinforced polyester lighting poles (FRP) and methods of testing
SSO 508 Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.
SASO 608 Methods of test for air-cooled electric motors
SASO 609 Air-cooled electric motors
SASO 691 Ballasts for high pressure mercury vapor lamps
SASO 692 Methods of testing ballasts for high pressure mercury vapor lamps. SASO 693
Dry-type power transformers
SASO 774 Methods of testing fiberglass reinforced polyester meter boxes
SASO 775 Fiberglass reinforced polyester meter boxes
SASO 979 Fire-resisting characteristics of electric cables
SASO 981 Electrical installation of buildings - Part 1: Scope, object and fundamental principles
SASO 982 Electrical installation of buildings - Part 4: Protection for safety - Chapter (42):
protection against thermal effects
protection against over-current
Protection against under-voltage
isolation and switching
SASO 986 Electrical installation of buildings - Part 4: Protection for safety - Section (482):
protection against fire
SASO 1131 High pressure mercury vapor lamps
SASO 1132 Methods of testing high pressure mercury vapor lamps.
Page 4 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SASO 1267 Electrical installations of buildings: Part 4: Protection for safety - Chapter 47:
Application of protective measures for safety – Section 470: General - Section
SASO 1268 Electrical installations of buildings: Part 4: Protection for safety - Chapter 47:
Application of protective measures for safety – Section 473: Measures of protection
SASO 1271 Electrical installations of buildings: Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical
equipment - Chapter 56: Safety services
SASO 1349 Circuit breakers for over current protection for house hold and similar installations
SASO 1350 High pressure sodium vapor lamps.
SASO 1351 Methods of test for high pressure sodium vapor lamps. SASO 1415 Zinc coating on
hot-dipped galvanized steel pipes
SASO 1416 Testing methods of zinc coating on hot-dipped galvanized steel pipes
SASO 1595 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables Part 4:
Methods specific to polyethylene and polypropylene compounds - Section one:
Resistance to environmental stress cracking - wrapping test after thermal ageing in
air-
SASO 1596 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables Part 4:
Methods specific to polyethylene and polypropylene compounds - Section two:
Elongation at break after pre-conditioning - wrapping test after pre-conditioning -
wrapping
SASO 1612 Circuit -Breakers for equipment
B. IEC - International Electro Technical Commission
IEC 56 High Voltage Alternating Circuit Breakers
IEC 228 Conductors of Insulated Cables
IEC 298 AC Metal-Enclosed Switch gear and Control Gear for Rated Voltages above 1 KV
and up to 72.5 KV
Page 5 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. ASTM - American Standards for Testing and Materials
ASTM B 3 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM D 256 Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
ASTM D 1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80 and 120
ASTM D 2564 Solvent Cement for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
D. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering
37.13a Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breaker Used in Enclosures
E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc
UL 1 Safety Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit
UL 20 Safety Standard for General Use Snap Switches
UL 50 Safety Standard for Cabinets and Boxes
UL 67 Safety Standard for Panel boards
UL 83 Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Wires
UL 93 Safety Standard for Enclosed Switches
UL 198 Safety Standard for Fuses
Page 6 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
UL 493 Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch
Circuit Cables
UL 498 Safety Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
UL 508 Safety Standard for Industrial Control Equipment
UL 514 Safety Standard for Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings
UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduits
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions and special Conditions
and General Requirements apply to the work of this division.
B. In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements of Division 1, refer the
issue to engineer for direction.
C. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to the best
available standards at the scale required.
D. Light and power and system riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally indicate equipment
connections to be used for various systems. Provide system raceway and wiring as required for actual
systems installed on this project. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on
the plans.
E. Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the contractor shall," "shall
be," "furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" have been omitted for brevity.
F. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication and/or description of any item,
in the Drawings of Specification or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the item
complete with all appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required system, regardless
of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description.
Page 7 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
G. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete
interpretation of the work.
H. Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work. Neither
of these have any dimensional significance nor do they delineate every item required for the intended
installation.
Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the electrical and mechanical
drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final architectural and structural working
drawings and on equipment shop drawings.
I. Certain details appear on the drawings which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and
positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general
feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated work.
J. Derive information as to the general construction from structural and architectural drawings and
specifications.
K. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and / or between drawings and other parts of the
Contractor Documents or where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the Contractor shall obtain
written clarification from the Owner's authorized representative on such matters before commencing
the Work.
1.4 PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS
A. The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such work and the Contractor shall
submit for consultant review and approval evidence of the suitability and number of his staff who will
undertake these tasks.
B. The construction Drawings indicate the approximate position of equipment, etc., and the Contractor
shall allow for any minor modifications to location that may be necessary.
Page 8 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.5 COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Should the Contractor propose that the commissioning and performance testing be carried out by a
specialist firm, full details of the capability and experience of such firm shall be submitted to the
consultant for review and approval
1.6 CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS
A. Submit a detailed list of manufacturers' names and addresses for materials and equipment proposed
for the Work.
B. Once accepted by the Consultant materials and equipment shall not be purchased from other sources
without the prior written agreement of the consultant.
1.7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
The Contractor shall submit a supplementary proposal for an annual system Maintenance. Contract under
which the Contractor would undertake, is addition to his obligations under this contract, to fully maintain the
system in efficient working order, including routing checks, adjustments, lubrication and replacement of
consumable spares, etc.
The proposal shall set out the terms of the offer, the work to be carried out, the guarantees of performance,
the inclusive price for the twelve months following practical Completion, and terms under which annual
maintenance may be carried out thereafter.
Page 9 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS
2.1 GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following initials, words and phrases shall have the following meanings:
SEC - Saudi Electricity Company.

STC - Saudi Telecom. Company.
IEC - International Electromechanical Commission.
DIN - German Standard Institute.
VDE - Association of German Electrical Engineers.
BS - British Standards.
EN - European Standards.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association.
INETA - International Electrical Testing Association.
NESC - National Electrical Safety Code.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
FM - Factory Mutual.
FIA - Factory Insurance Association.
EIA - Electronic Industries Association.
TIA - Telecommunication Industries Association.
ITU - International Telecommunication Union.
ETS - European Telecommunication Standardization.
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association “Standard of Installation”
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
"The work” - That part of the project dependent upon or subsequent to the statement.
"The works" - The works referred to in the Specification and which are fully shown and
described in the Contract Documents.
"Directed" - Directed by the Owner's authorized representative
"Inspected" - Inspected by consultant.
“Submitted” or submit - Submitted to or submit to the Owner's authorized representative
"Specification" - The description of performance requirements, materials and workmanship
contained in the Contract Documentation.
"IET Regulations" - The Wiring Regulations for Electrical Installations within Buildings as issued by
the IET 17th edition.
Page 10 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.2 DEFINITION OF "AGREEMENT", ACCEPTANCE" AND "APPROVAL"
"Agreement" Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings:
"Agreed" or - Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing

"Agreement"
"Accepted" or - Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing
"Acceptance"
"Approved" or - Approved by or approval of the consultant in writing
"Approval"
"Agreement", "Acceptance" or "Approval" by or of the consultant shall have the following limitation:
a. When given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of construction submitted

in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents shall not be construed as denoting any
degree of satisfaction with the materials used in, or the execution of the Works.
b. When given in respect of drawings, documents or schemes called for by the contract Documents or
proposed by the Contractor, is only for conformance with the design intent and information given in the
Contract Documents or contained in subsequent Instructions.
c. When given in respect to the methods of keeping records shall mean those methods are satisfactory.
2.3 DEFINITIONS OF TECHNICAL WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The definitions for words and phrased commonly associated with the design, manufacture and site work
for public health, mechanical and electrical installations shall be those of the IET Regulations, the IOP,
plumbing Services Design Guide, CIBSE Guides, BS, CP and associated Statutory Acts.
B. The terminology related to the voltages stated in the Contract Documents shall be that used in the IET
Regulations unless specifically identified by values or descriptions are not covered by such terminology.
C. L.V. shall be taken as meaning "Low voltage", and H.V. shall be taken as meaning "high voltage" under
the IET Regulations.
Page 11 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Any reference to H.V. shall be for voltages in excess of 1000V a.c. or 1500V d.c. between conductors, or
600V a.c. or 900V, d.c. between any conductor and earth.
E. "Systems" - Includes all necessary equipment, accessories, controls, racks, suspension members,
sheet metal supports, miscellaneous steel members, etc.
F. "Fixing only" or - Includes the unloading, getting in, unpacking, returning “fix only"empty cases,
wrappings, etc., carriage paid, stacking, safely storing, protecting, taking from
store, handling, hoisting lowering, fitting, placing in position, fixing and connecting.
G. "Allow" - Means that the cost of the item will be at the sole risk and expense of the
Contractor who is given the opportunity of inserting such prices in the Bill of
Quantities as he considers relevant including overheads, profit and establishment
charges, as no subsequent claim for such items will be accepted.
H. "As Necessary” - Means that the work referred to shall be carried out to the extent and by a method
consistent with good practice
I. Words in the documents importing the singular only, also include the plural, and vice versa where the
context requires.
J. Where any possible doubt exists as to the meaning of words or terms used in the Contract Documents
the matter shall be referred by the Contractor to the Owner's authorized representative for clarification.
Page 12 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.4 CURRENCY OF DOCUMENTS
A. All publications referred to shall be the latest edition thereof together with any amendments current
ten days before the date of issue of contract documents.
2.5 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. The Contract Documents shall be deemed to include, whether or not specifically mentioned or shown,
any materials, accessories or works as may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the contract
Works in accordance with accepted current practice or procedure.
B. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and/or between drawings and other parts of the
Contract Documents or where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written
clarification from the Owner's authorized representative on such matters before commencing the work.
2.6 SYMBOLS
A. The symbol notation for all drawings to be produced by the Contractor shall be in accordance with
applicable standards and regulations and shall be agreed by the consultant and shown on a separate
drawing.
PART 3 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS
3.1 TENDER DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings prepared in such detail as may be necessary to enable those tendering to
interpret the design for the Works and to submit competitive Tenders for the execution of the Works.
3.2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings contained in or forming part of the numbered documents which constitute
the Contract Documents.
3.3 TAKING DIMENSIONS FROM DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall verify the accuracy of all dimensions abstracted from the consultant's drawings,
including verifying the accuracy by taking dimensions on site, in the preparation of any drawings by
the Contractor and before the relevant work proceeds.
3.4 DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DRAWINGS
A. Should any differences exist between the drawings or should there be any discrepancy in the figures,
scale or the respects, the Contractor shall refer the same to the Owner's authorized representative for
clarification before proceeding with the work.
Page 13 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 4 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS
4.1 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings, based on the Contract Drawings showing details of the Contractor's
proposals for the execution of the Works. The drawings shall be to such scales, in such detail and with
all necessary dimensions as to enable the Work to be installed and shall indicate all pipe layouts, bends,
tees flanges, valves, connections etc., necessary for installation and also particular installation
methods to be applied in certain instances, e.g. where connecting to existing services. These drawings
shall also relate to builder's work drawings confirming relationships to valve pits, cable intakes.. etc.
B. In respect of drainage drawings, shall take account of the exact location and type of sanitary ware
scheduled by the consultant, and all manholes and access points shall be shown and dimensioned to
take account of walls, paving and other adjacent permanent work.
C. In respect of fire protection services shall include layouts of sprinkler installations and details and
location of sprinkler heads showing dimensional co-ordination with false ceiling systems.
D. In respect of gas installations there shall be in addition a "line diagram" indicating the positions of all
gas installation pipes, meters, meter controls, valves or cocks, pressure test points and electrical
bonding, all in accordance with the "Gas Safety regulations" and gas authority requirements.
E. In respect of electrical installations shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Site distribution and cable routes.
2. General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the Contract.
3. Schematics for main and sub-main distribution.
4. Cabling and wiring connections showing cable types, sizes and loads.
5. Trunking and cable tray routes with details of sizes, fixings, cables carried and terminations.
6. Conduit routes with conduit sizes, methods of installation and details of cables, loads and
terminations, and all junction and pull-in boxes
Page 14 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
7. Power distribution for lifts.
8. Lighting layouts for normal and emergency purposes, detailing positions and types of luminaries,
switch positions and wiring connections.
9. Fire detector and alarm positions and wiring routes with type details and functions.
10. Earthing system with precise details of routing, conductor sizes, capacity and connection.
11. Lightning protection system with precise details of position, routing, conductor sizes and
terminations.
12. Communication systems wiring, terminal equipment types and functions, wiring, terminal
equipment types and functions, wiring routes and details.
13. Standby generator distribution system, other power supply systems and changeover arrangements
including schematic and detailed wiring with identification of those sections of the normal system
operated from the standby source.
4.2 BUILDER'S WORK INFORMATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings and Schedules prepared to show requirements for architectural or structural
provisions necessary to facilitate the execution of the Works and allow their integration into the project.
B. Such drawings should include requirements for foundations, bases, lifting and supporting structures for
plant or equipment, all holes in walls, floors and ceiling elements, provision of services requirements
within voids above false ceilings or below false floors, the integration of the services installations into
the false ceiling system and trenches, depressions, ducts, etc., in or through building and site elements.
C. General arrangements and floor plan drawings giving builder's work requirements shall be to a scale of
1:50.
D. Builder's work drawings for plant rooms shall be to a scale of 1:20.
Page 15 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. In cases where preliminary builder's work and structural information has already been given by the
consultant such information shall be confirmed and amplified as required above by the contractor
(including confirmation of weights of items of equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.,) and incorporated
in his drawings.
4.3 SHOP/FABRICATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings produced for the purpose of explaining how the components of the designed
works are to be fabricated and assembled.
4.4 MANUFACTURERS' AND EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings of any item of plant or equipment produced by a manufacturer or equipment
supplier indicating principle dimensions, fixings, connections and all other relevant details.
B. Where manufactures' original drawings are used they shall be specific to the relevant Works and all
references to optional features, other machines of a range, etc., shall be deleted or the original drawings
redrawn to comply with this clause.
C. Each drawing shall be stamped certified by the Manufacturer which shall mean that:
1. The drawing represents accurately the item concerned with correct dimensions and all connections
precisely located;
2. The item conforms to the specific description given in the Documents, quoting the reference
numbers from the Contract Document;
3. The item is shown complete and entire as it will be supplied for the works and no extraneous or
alternative parts are indicated;
D. Individual and layout drawings from electrical component manufacturers shall include wiring internal
and external to panels and controls.
Page 16 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly that wiring which forms part of or is connected to the
equipment as delivered and shall include the following minimum information to enable the site
connections and wiring to be completed:
1. Maximum electrical loading for each power cable
2. Cable termination facilities
3. Cable identification and all terminal numbers
4. Inter-connections between different items.
4.5 CONTROLS DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings and schematics of plant and equipment showing the control layout with each
item uniquely identified, and including a brief description of the controls operation and any associated
interlocking.
B. In respect of electric controls shall mean logic sequence and wiring diagrams showing the connections
of all items of electric control equipment and interlocking on the plant control schematics.
4.6 SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION PANEL DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings showing the general arrangement, the construction, the external and internal
layout of panels, and wiring diagrams comprising internal wiring, schematics of interlocking and external
wiring diagrams, for the complete systems in the panels. The drawings shall also indicate all pipe work
and capillary connections from the panels to external equipment.
4.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing work, provide complete set of black and white prints of Contract Drawings.
B. Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on such prints, at time of
occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings.
C. Dimension underground utilities from permanent identifiable structural points.
D. Make drawings available for the Architect’s periodic inspection and submit for review with As-Built
Drawings.
Page 17 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
4.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing work, provide complete set of lithotracings of Contract Drawings on 4 mill mylar or
transparencies and upon completion of works contractor shall submit 2 sets on 3.5” diskettes or CD,
computer reproducible as built drawings of electrical works and prints.
B. Neatly revise to conform with Record Drawings.
C. Conspicuously indicate major deviations by specific reference to shop drawings and provide an accurate
and complete record of the work as installed.
D. Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified lithotracings as As-Built and referenced Shop
Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record Drawings, to the Architect of acceptance.
PART 5 - DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR
5.1 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Prepare and submit before the relevant work proceeds, all drawings necessary to install the Works.
Drawings shall be based on the Contract Drawings and must be fully coordinated with the architectural
works and other disciplines and shall take into account any modifications either to the building or the
installation which may have taken place, incorporating details of the actual items of plant and
equipment to be installed.
B. Prepare and submit all necessary Schedules of Equipment, cables and devices with the relevant
drawings.
C. Prepare and submit schedule of light fittings and luminaires.
D. The effect of any authorize variation or site instruction shall be carried through and shown on all
applicable drawings by the Contractor. The cost of so doing shall be reimbursed to the Contractor as
part of the cost of the variation of the instruction.
Page 18 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
5.2 SIGNATURE ON CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS
A. Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be signed by the Contractor to confirm that:
1. The work shown thereon has been coordinated both in sequence of installation and in physical
relationship to the work of others.
2. The drawing does not contain any variations other than those authorized by the Owner's authorized
representative instruction.
3. On re-submittal, all alterations made since initial submission have been clearly annotated on the
drawing and listed separately down the right hand side of the drawing.
Page 19 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 6 - INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
6.1 GENERAL
A. Submit to the Owner's authorized representative to a program agreed with the Owner's authorized
representative comprehensively detailed drawings showing all builders work required for the Works.
B. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with such information as the Owner's authorized
representative may require on any matter related to or affecting the Works.
6.2 INFORMATION LISTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit to the Owner's authorized representative all items of information required by the Contract
Documents at the proper time so as not to impede the progress of the works.
6.3 INFORMATION FOR MANUALS
A. Where the Contractor sublets the preparation of the Operation and Maintenance Manual to a specialist
firm, the Contractor shall provide or obtain all necessary information in respect thereof.
6.4 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL LITERATURE
A. Manufacturers' technical literature submitted for examination or for inclusion in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual shall be prepared and assembled specifically for the project and shall exclude any
irrelevant matter. Each item shall be clearly identified on the record Drawings and cross-referenced to
the contract Documents.
6.5 MANUFACTURERS' GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. All manufacturers' guarantees and warranties on plant, equipment, etc., shall be valid at least up to the
end of the Defects Liability Period, or for at least twelve months after Practical Completion of the total
project, whichever is the longer period.
B. All equipment normally guaranteed by the manufacturers for a period of time which goes beyond the
period defined above shall be held to remain under guarantee for the maximum period.
C. Provide two copies of all such guarantees, one of which shall be included in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
Page 20 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
6.6 PLANT ROOM SCHEDULES AND SCHEMATICS
A. In addition to the provision of Record Drawings, provide the following at a size to be easily readable and
frame under glass and hang in each plant room and other appropriate location as directed by the
Owner's authorized representative:
1. Circuit diagrams consisting of schematic drawings of circuit layouts showing identification and
duties of equipment, numbers and locations, control and circuits.
2. Valve schedules in the form of typewritten sheets showing the number, type, location, application,
service and symbol, and normal operating position of each valve installed.
3. Control schematics.
4. Mechanical and electrical plant items:
5. First aid instructions for treatment of persons after electric shock.
6. All other items required under Statutory or other regulations.
7. Location of main incoming gas valve serving gas meter.
8. Location of sprinkler fire main control valve.
9. Emergency operating procedures and telephone numbers for emergency call-out service applicable
to any system or item of plant.
6.7 RELAY COORDINATION
A. Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study.
The Current-time characteristics must be plotted on a log-log papers showing that the choice of the C.B.
settings are correct for coordination.
If selectivity coordination study is failed, contractor is responsible to change any number of breakers,
relays, such that the selectivity coordination is fully achieved with no extra cost to the owner.
Page 21 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
6.8 CALCULATIONS
A. The contractor is fully responsible to check all electrical calculations and to make sure that all equipment
/ systems ratings are adequate for the project, and in case of any deficiencies, the contractor shall submit
his new proposal complete with (SLD's, Layouts, calculations, details……etc.) to the client/consultant
review/approval before starting in the construction stage.
B. The contractor shall submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculation based
on the actual impedance values of the electrical components such as supply short circuit level at the
13.8KV, transformer per unit impedance, bus bars and cables impedance’s ...etc.
C. The contractor shall submit a complete harmonic calculations / analysis indicating the size of harmonic
filters to meet acceptable harmonic limits as described in item (11.10).
D. The contractor shall submit complete earthing system calculations for both power and light current
systems to meet the resistant requirement as indicated on the drawings.
E. The contractor shall submit step loading calculation of generators.
F. The contractor shall submit power factor correction capacitors sizing based on the final approved loads.
G. The contractor shall submit Rating / derating calculations for all the specified equipment.
H. The contractor shall submit photovoltaic energy yield calculations.
I. The contractor shall submit indoor and outdoor lighting distribution and calculations, with necessary
supporting documents and photometric data of the lighting fixtures in case if luminaire with different
photometric characteristics is proposed by the contractor and approved by the consultant.
PART 7 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals (which shall incorporate Instruction Manuals on detailed
requirements) covering and including the information detailed below:
7.1 SCOPE OF SYSTEMS
1. A full technical description of each of the systems installed, written to ensure that the Owner's staff fully
understand the scope and facilities provided.
2. A technical description of the mode of operation of all systems.
Page 22 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
7.2 INSTALLATION RECORD
1. A photo reduction of all Record Drawings to A1 size together with an index.
2. Diagrammatic drawings of each system indicating principal items of plant, equipment, valves, etc.
3. Legend for all color-coded services.
4. Schedules of plant, equipment, valves, etc., by system, stating their locations within the building, duties
and performance figures, together with anticipated life expectancies.
5. A unique code for each item of plant, equipment, valves, etc., installed number cross-referenced to the
record and diagrammatic drawings and Schedules. The name, address and telephone number of the
manufacturer of every item of equipment and plant shall be listed together with catalogue list numbers.
6. Manufacturers' literature including detailed drawings, electrical circuit details, and printed operating
and maintenance instructions for all items of plant and equipment supplied under this contract.
7. A copy of all test certificates including those for all plant, equipment, valves, etc., used in the
installations, including (but not limited to) electrical circuit tests, corrosion testes, type testes, works
tests, start-up and commissioning tests, including those for air and water balancing.
8. A copy of all manufacturers' guarantees.
7.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
1. Starting up, operating and shutting down instructions for all equipment and systems installed.
2. Control sequences for all systems installed.
3. Scheduled details of all equipment settings, and actual values maintained in controlled variables during
commissioning.
4. Procedures for seasonal changeovers
Page 23 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
7.4 MAINTENANCE
1. Detailed recommendations as to the preventive maintenance frequency and procedures, including

related health and safety procedures, which should be adopted by the Owner to ensure the most
efficient operation of the systems. Specific details of maintenance procedures to prevent any hazard
arising to health and safety e.g. Legionnaires Disease, shall be included.
2. Lubrication Schedules for all lubricated items of plant and equipment.
3. A list of normal consumable items.
4. A list of recommended "running spares" required, being those items subject to wear or deterioration
and which may involve the Owner in extended deliveries when replacements are required at some
future date.
5. Procedures for full diagnosis.
6. Emergency procedures.
7.5 NUMBER OF COPIES REQUIRED
A. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with one original and three copies of the final Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
7.6 PREPARATION OF MANUALS
A. The manuals shall be contained in A4 size, plastic-covered, lose leaf, four ring binders with stiff covers,
each indexed, divided and appropriately cover-titled.
Drawings larger than A4 shall be folded and accommodated in the binder so that they may be unfolded
without being in any detached from the rings.
B. Prepare the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in draft as soon as the Installation Drawings are in
hand.
Page 24 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Make two sets of temporary manuals (with provisional Record Drawings and preliminary performance
data) available at commencement of commissioning to enable Owner's staff to familiarize themselves
with the installation.
These should be of the same format as the final manuals with temporary insertions for items which
cannot be finalized until the works are commissioned and performance tested.
7.7 OBLIGATIONS OF MANUFACTURERS TO PROVIDE LITERATURE
A. The requirements and obligations of manufacturers to provide literature as part of the installation
record shall form part of plant and equipment orders and such orders shall be considered unfulfilled
until literature requirements have been met.
PART 8 - INSPECTION, TEST AND APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
8.1 GENERAL
A. Submit Inspection, Test and Approval Certificates as required by the contract Documents.
PART 9 - PROVISION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
9.1 DRAWING PRODUCTION
A. Prepare and submit a master plan for drawing production covering the following:
1. List of drawings to be produced
2. drawing/Schedule titles and numbers
3. symbols/notation/scales to be used
4. Cross-references to other drawings
5. Identification of drawings required for record purposes.
Page 25 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
9.2 CHECKING PRIOR TO SUBMISSION
A. All drawings, Schedules and other information provided by manufacturers, suppliers, or approved sub-
contractors shall be checked by the contractor who shall ensure that all requirements of the Contractor
who shall ensure that all requirements of the Contract documents have been incorporated prior to
submission.
9.3 PREPARATION OF RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation of the Works as each
section is completed. The Owner's authorized representative and the consultant shall be allowed to
inspect these drawings on request during their preparation and each drawing shall be submitted to the
Owner's authorized representative prior to Practical Completion.
9.4 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The final draft of the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be submitted in due time, and in any
case not less than four weeks prior to Practical Completion, so that at least one copy of the complete
final version is in the possession of the Owner at Practical Completion.
Page 26 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. The Operation and Maintenance Manual is an essential part of the works. The works will not be accepted
as complete and payment will be withheld until the required number of copies of the complete final
document have been received by the Owner's Authorized representative.
C. If partial possession is required by the Owner then the documentation shall also be phased accordingly
and so arranged to finally form one comprehensive document.
D. It shall be the contractor's responsibility, whenever a successive phase of the works is handed over, to
amend and update the previously issued version of the Operation and Maintenance Manual, bring it to
the appropriate stage of completion and submit same to the Owner's Authorized representative in due
time.
9.5 FAILURE TO PRODUCE RECORD DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
A. If the contractor fails to produce and submit the record drawings as required during the progress of the
works, or other information for the operation and Maintenance Manual by the due dates. then the
Owner's Authorized representative may instruct a third party to provide any or all of these documents
and the total cost of preparing such documents shall be borne by the contractor.
PART 10 - STATUTORY UNDERTAKINGS AND OTHER AUTHORITIES
10.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor will be responsible for programming, coordinating and progressing the involvement of
the Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities in the works.
B. Provide all necessary information so required by the Owner's Authorized representative in respect of
the Statuary Undertakings and other Authorities related to the works.
C. In addition, the contractor shall execute the following in connection with the applicable statutory
Undertaken and other Authorities.
10.2 COMPLETION OF NEGOTIATIONS
A. Take responsibility for and complete negotiations commenced by the Owner's Authorized
Representative or the Owner in respect of the provision or diversion of utility services.
Page 27 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
10.3 APPLICATIONS BY OWNER
A. Take responsibility for and complete any application made by the Owner in respect of any matter related
to the works.
10.4 SAMPLES
A. Provide and submit prior to placing orders samples of workmanship for testing by the applicable
statutory undertaking or other authority.
Page 28 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
10.5 CONNECTIONS OF NEW WORKS
A. Make arrangements to allow connection of the new works to the supply networks including providing
details of the proposed works and obtaining approval as necessary.
10.6 BY-LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A. Examine and check the contract Documents for compliance with the Statutory Requirements so that
written notice of any divergence the contractor may find between the contract Documents and the
Statuary Requirements, can be issued to the Owner's Authorized representative by the contractor in
due time so as not to delay the progress of the works, Where Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities require to witness tests, the contractor shall give all necessary notice, carry out such tests,
provide attendance and facilities and copy any documents, etc., as required.
10.7 NOTICES AND FEES
A. Give all notices in accordance with BY-Laws and regulations and pay all fees and charges legally
demandable. Provisional Sums are included in the Bill of Quantities for fees and charges payable to
Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities.
10.8 BUILDERS WORK IN CONNECTION
A. Obtain details of any builders work required, and provide the Owner's Authorized representative with
all necessary details of same.
10.9 AMENDMENTS
A. Details of any amendments to the works deemed necessary by a Statutory Undertaking or other
Authority shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized representative prior to work being executed
10.10 FORMALITIES
A. Comply with all formalities in connection with test notices, agreements, application for supply forms,
etc., and forward all such documents requiring the Owner's signature to the Owner's Authorized
representative in ample time.
B. Prepare composite installation Drawings for fire alarm systems, sprinkler system, fire mains, pumps and
the like, together with related calculations and technical information in a suitable form and submit same
to the local Authorities and Fire Insurers as required by the Owner's Authorized representative.
10.11 CORRESPONDENCE, ETC.
A. Provide copies of all correspondence, test certificates, notices, etc.
Page 29 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
10.12 COST OF RE-CONNECTIONS, ETC.
A. The contractor shall be responsible for any cost changes for re-connections, re-visits, re-testing, etc.,
except for such charges arising from any direction of the Owner's Authorized representative arising from
any direction in respect of defective work.
10.13 GENERAL FACILITIES
A. Arrange for facilities to be provided for the purpose of laying new mains and services and adjusting
existing equipment.
B. Notify the owner's Authorized representative that the work of the Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities is complete in order that the owner's Authorized representative can issue directions in
respect of covering up of the permanent works by other contractors
PART 11 - CONTROL OF QUALITY
11.1 SPECIFIED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Unless otherwise specified all materials, plant and equipment, and the use and installation thereof, shall
comply with the material, test and other requirements of the relevant IET wiring regulations 17th
edition, IEC standards, BS standard.
B. Materials or substances which are generally known at the time of use to be deleterious shall not be used
other than as allowed by standards or statutory regulation current at the time of use
C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality, and shall be produced by skilled and responsible craftsmen
fully experience and in their respective trades.
D. Allow for proper packing and safe delivery of all equipment and materials and for returning re-usable
packaging to the suppliers as appropriate
E. Include for obtaining materials from any source whatsoever to complete the works within the contract
period and no claim will be allowed for materials ex-stock or from any other source in the event of
difficulty of supply.
F. Identical parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable and any items, fittings or accessories which
are used in quantity shall in each case be the produce of one manufacturer.
11.2 GUARANTEE AVAILABILITY OF SPARES
A. Guarantee or provide manufacturers' written guarantees that spares will be available for a minimum
period of ten years from the date of practical completion both to the Owner and to any other future
building Owner, occupier or contractor having responsibility for the maintenance of the works.
Page 30 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
11.3 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO FIXING
A. All installation materials, component parts or complete items of equipment shall be delivered and
stored on site in properly labeled boxes, crates or containers, suitably designed and constructed to give
protection against transportation and handling damage and deterioration during storage. The packing
shall be weather-proof.
B. Store all materials on raised boarded platforms under weather-proof cover and store pipes, conduits,
Trunking and the like on racking.
C. Equipment or component parts of equipment specifically designed to operate in normal room

conditions, shall be delivered to and stored on site with suitable waterproof protection.
D. Take particular care to protect component parts specifically designed to act as heat transfer surfaces.
These surfaces shall have purpose-designed packing to protect them whilst in transit and storage on
site.
E. Completely cover valve ports and ends of pipes or plug to prevent the ingress of foreign matter, and
additionally protect flanges against damage to the flange surface.
F. Examine all materials and equipment supplied under this contract on delivery to site and immediately prior
to installation. Any material or equipment which is damaged or faulty shall be replaced.
11.4 SETTING OUT
A. The contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the works and for the
correctness of position, levels, dimensions and alignment for all parts of the works and for the provision
of all necessary instruments, appliances and labor in connection therewith. If any error shall appear or
arise in the position, levels, dimensions or alignment of any part of the works the setting out for which
the contractor was responsible, the contractor shall at his own expense rectify such error.
B. The checking of any setting out or of any line or level by the Owner's authorized representative shall not
in any way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for the correctness thereof. The contractor shall
carefully protection preserve all bench-marks, sight rails, pegs and other things used in setting out the
works.
C. Take all necessary dimensions on site, check runs and levels and mark out for builder's work.
D. Any unnecessary work carried out by the Owner's authorized representative or other contractor due to
inaccuracy of the contractor's drawings, dimensions, or marking out shall be paid for by the contractor.
Page 31 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
11.5 PROTECTION OF NEW WORK
A. The contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that all his work is adequately protected.
Protection shall be by the contractor at the completion of each day and during periods of inclement
weather, and all work exposed to view on completion in the works shall be protected from spillage,
stains and other damage. All systems shall be kept in a fully drained condition prior to commissioning.
B. Test water shall be disposed of so as not to damage any part of the temporary or permanent works, or
any adjoining land or property.
11.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING GENERALLY
A. Agree procedures for notices, witnessing, reporting and recording tests with all parties involved
including local authorities and statutory undertakings, prior to the commencement of the works.
B. Submit copies of the formal test certificates signed by the contractor's representative not later than
seven days after completion of successful tests.
11.7 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Re-test or carry out at no extra cost any additional tests required to establish acceptability of the works
following failure of any part thereof or any item therein to meet the required standard or functional
performance.
11.8 INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING
A. Supply, check, re-calibrates whenever necessary and maintain in good working order all instruments and
equipment for setting out, measurements, gauging, inspection, commissioning and performance testing
whether they are specifically called for or implied by the contract documents.
B. All such instruments and equipment shall be adequate for the purpose and shall satisfy the purposes
and accuracy’s required by the contract documents.
C. All instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the contractor.
Page 32 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
11.9 PROVISION OF STAFF
A. Provide all necessary staff with the relevant skills and competence for all inspection, testing,
commissioning and performance testing.
11.10 ACCEPTABLE HARMONIC LEVELS
The acceptable limits of harmonics voltages and currents shall be as per the IEEE 519 standards.
The following table shows the permitted harmonic currents distortions limits at any point on the system
(including background levels)
Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in Percent of IL
Individual harmonic order (odd harmonics)1,2
ISC / IL 3 ≤ h < 11 11 ≤ h < 17 17 ≤ h < 23 23 ≤ h < 35 35 ≤ h < 50 TDD
< 203 4.0 2.0 1.5 0.6 0.3 5.0
20 < 50 7.0 3.5 2.5 1.0 0.5 8.0
50 < 100 10.0 4.5 4.0 1.5 0.7 12.0
100 < 1000 12.0 5.5 5.0 2.0 1.0 15.0
> 1000 15.0 7.0 6.0 2.5 1.4 20.0

1
Even harmonics are limited to 25% of the odd harmonic limits above.
2
Current distortions that result in a DC offset, e.g. half wave converters, are not allowed.
3
All power generation equipment is limited to these values of current distortion, regardless of actual ISC / IL
where:
ISC = maximum short circuit current at point of common coupling.
IL = maximum demand load current (fundamental frequency component) at the point of common
coupling under normal load operating conditions.
The following table shows the permitted harmonic voltage distortions limits at any point on the system
(including background levels)
Page 33 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Voltage Distortion Limits
Bus voltage V at Point of Total Harmonic Distortion

Individual Harmonic (%)
Common Coupling THD (%)
V ≤ 1.0 KV 5.0 8.0
1 KV < V ≤ 69 KV 3.0 5.0
69 KV < V ≤ 161 KV 1.5 2.5
161 KV < V 1.0 1.51
1
High-voltage systems can have up to 2.0% THD where the cause is an HVDC terminal whose effects will have
attenuated at the points in the network where the future users may be connected.
The contractor must submit harmonic calculations / analysis and to add all needed harmonic filters with
appropriate size to be connected in the network and/or at places where source of harmonics exists (such
as electronic equipments, UPS...etc.) in order not to exceed the above mentioned figures.
PART 12 - INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING
12.1 GENERAL
A. Provide assistance and make available to the consultant and Owner's authorized representative any
instruments or other equipment he may require from time to time for examining the accuracy, quality
and performance of the contract works.
Page 34 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 13 - INSPECTION AND TESTING CERTIFICATES
13.1 PROCEDURES
A. Schedule and submit an integrated program in respect of those elements of the works for which
inspections and tests shall be carried out and for which inspection and test records shall be maintained.
These elements shall include in particular those which will be covered up during construction, and other
matters described under certificates for materials and equipment.
B. Testing of individual items of plant and equipment at manufacturers' works shall be witnessed and
approved by Owner's consultant. On site and final testing of completed installations or parts of
installations shall all be in accordance with the contract documents.
13.2 CERTIFICATES FOR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All materials shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the appropriate British Standard or
as described. Should the contractor propose an alternative item without the appropriate certification,
independent testing shall be carried out at the contractor's expense to determine compliance with the
contract documents.
B. Where appropriate all materials delivered to the site shall bear the manufacturer's name, brand name
and any other data that may be required to verify their exact nature and relate it to the requirements
of the contract documents.
13.3 WORKS TESTS CERTIFICATES
A. Works tests certificates shall include, whenever applicable, full information to enable the item tested to
be identified, such as project title, contractor's name, manufacturer's nameplate or serial numbers, the
location in the works and the delivery or batch which the sample represents.
13.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING RECORDS
Page 35 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Maintain records of all inspections, and testing performed to substantiate conformity with the contract
documents including those carried out by the contractor and/or third party testing agencies, together
with manufacturers' or suppliers' certificates of test.
B. All records shall be retained on site and made available to the Owner's authorized representative on
request. On completion of the works all records shall be handed over to the Owner's authorized
representative unless otherwise directed.
C. These records shall include, as appropriate, but not be limited to, project title, contractor's name, the
identification of the element, item, batch or lot, the nature and number of the observations and tests,
the dates of testing, the name and signature of the person responsible for the testing, the number and
type of deficiencies found, and details of any corrective action taken.
D. Any record which indicates that any part of the works inspected or tested does not comply with the
contract documents shall be submitted without delay in order that the contractor's proposals for
rectification may be assessed.
13.5 MATERIALS AND SAMPLES
A. Each manufacturer must be willing to admit the Owner's authorized representative and the consultant
to his premises during normal working hours for the purpose of examining and witnessing the testing
of materials and equipment proposed for the works.
B. All materials and equipment shall be new.
C. Obtain and implement manufacturers' instructions on the assembly and installation of materials and
equipment.
D. Submit all samples required by the contract documents.
E. The procedure for submission of samples shall be agreed prior to commencement of the works.
F. Samples of materials, workmanship, components and equipment accepted as complying with the contract
documents will be retained by the consultant and all related items included in the works shall be at least
equal in all respects to these samples.
Page 36 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Provide safe storage of accepted samples on site including racks for display, reference and inspection.
13.6 REJECTION OF MATERIALS OR WORKS NOT TO STANDARD OF SAMPLES
A. Any material or work which is inferior to an accepted sample or is different from parts of the works
already constructed or which is stained or damaged after installation will be treated as defective work.
13.7 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Defective work, and the opening up of the works to ascertain same, shall be dealt with strictly in
accordance with the requirements detailed elsewhere in the contract document.
B. Replace defective work with materials, goods or work in accordance with the contract documents.
Alternatively submit proposals for any treatment or making good that is considered will bring the
defective work to the standard required by the contract documents. Such proposals shall not relieve the
contractor of his responsibility to execute the works to the full intent of the contract documents.
C. The costs as defined in the contract conditions shall include the cost of any related delay or disruption
in the progress of the works, or any other consequential cost.
13.8 DAMAGE BY INCLEMENT WEATHER
A. The contractor shall not execute any work when it is likely to be adversely affected by inclement weather
and he shall make good any damage so caused at his own expense.
PART 14 - COMMISSIONING THE WORKS
A. All pre-commissioning checks, setting to work, commissioning and performance testing shall be carried
out as detailed elsewhere in the contract documents.
14.1 ATTENDANCE AND CO-OPERATION
A. give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of requirements for the
attendance and co-operation by the Owner's authorized representative and by other contractors.
Page 37 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
14.2 NOTICE TO CONSULTANT
A. Give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of any commissioning or
testing to be carried out to enable the consultant to witness all or any of such tests, etc.
14.3 UNSUCCESSFUL TESTS
A. The contractor shall pay any costs incurred by the Owner, Owner's authorized representative or the
consultant in connection with unsuccessful tests, including costs incurred due to the inability of the
contractor to make or complete a test, having given the notice required above.
14.4 CHECKING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning includes the setting to work and regulation of the installation.
B. Check all installations and commission in accordance with the contract documents including but not
limited to the following:
1. Co-operation with the Owner's authorized representative to produce a coordinated program for
the testing and commissioning of the complete works.
2. Provision of all consumable materials.
3. Provision of such temporary communication apparatus as is necessary to enable members of the

commissioning team who are unable to be in visual or aural contact with each other to carry out
their tasks safely and effectively. Such apparatus shall not cause interference with equipment
owned or operated by any other parties.
4. Provision of proper and permanent records of relevant readings of all quantities taken during the
checking, pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures.
The form of the records shall be agreed with the Owner's authorized representative in advance of
commissioning and the record for each complete commissioning procedure shall be dated and
signed by the person whom the contractor has appointed to be formally in charge of
commissioning.
Page 38 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
14.5 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. When the Contractor has completed the commissioning of the whole of works he shall give to the
Owner's authorized representative written certification of this fact. The certificate shall be signed by
the director or manager responsible for the contract.
B. Only when this written certification has been received by the Owner's authorized representative will
performance tests be allowed to commence. Unless otherwise agreed by the Owner's authorized
representative in writing, where engineering systems involve the works of more than one works
contractor, performance tests will only be allowed to commence when written certification from all the
relevant works contractors has been received.
C. Carry out during this period full tests on the complete works to demonstrate that the works meet the
requirements of the contract documents.
D. The Owner's authorized representative may at his discretion waive any part of the full test procedure if
he considers it has been satisfactorily demonstrated, recorded and properly certified at any earlier time
but the contractor shall however allow in his costs for carrying out all of the provisions in this clause.
14.6 RECORDS OF WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Keep a daily record throughout the contract period of the maximum, minimum and average outside
shade temperature, humidity and wind speed.
14.7 SUMMER AND WINTER PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Test the performance of the whole of the works in both summer and winter design conditions and allow
for any special visits to site and provide any necessary attendance during the defects liability period to
set up, monitor and remove test and recording equipment.
14.8 SYSTEMS USED BEFORE PRACTICAL COMPLETION
A. No part of the permanent services installations shall be used by the contractor for his own benefit
without the written agreement of the Owner's authorized representative.
Page 39 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Should any part of the works be operated during the period of the contract for the benefit of the
contractor and/or the Owner's authorized representative, all consumable spares, including light bulbs
and tubes which have been so put to use shall be replaced by new not more than seven days prior to
practical completion.
14.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY
A. Defects, shrinkage’s or other faults appearing at any time during the defects liability period which have
led, or, in the opinion of the Engineer, are likely to lead to failure or malfunction of any part of the works
shall be made good immediately upon receipt of any instruction or direction of the Owner's authorized
representative.
B. Prepare and submit a record of any failure or malfunction of any part of the works, the remedial action
taken, subsequent re-testing and the results thereof.
C. Notify the Owner's authorized representative of any malfunction in, or damage to, the works which the
contractor can demonstrate had been caused by incorrect operation of the system, vandalism or action
of a third party.
D. Inform the Owner's authorized representative in writing when all defects are finally rectified so that an
inspection may be carried out prior to the issue of the final certificate.
PART 15 - PREVENTION OF NUISANCE AND DANGER TO PERSONS
15.1 SITE SAFETY GENERALLY
A. The contractor before commencing work shall inform the, Owner's authorized representative of the
person who will be on site during working hours and who will have the authority to take action on and
be responsible for all aspects of safety, health and welfare in connection with the contract works.
B. Take all the necessary precautions to ensure the safety of all site personnel, and the general public, and
in respect of the contract works provide for the safety, health and welfare of work-people employed on
the site to comply with the requirements of the following and of all other relevant statutes, statutory
instruments, statutory regulations or industrial agreements.
Page 40 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
15.2 FIRE PRECAUTIONS
A. Take all reasonable precautions to avoid the outbreak of fire, particularly in work involving the use of
naked flames and impress on workmen the dangers involved in the careless disposal of matches and
cigarettes, etc., and the accumulation of rubbish on site. Where considered necessary due to the nature
of the works or as directed by the Owner's authorized representative, institute a "No smoking" regime.
B. The use of naked lights shall be prohibited except in cases of absolute necessity, and extreme care taken
in the use of all equipment likely to cause fire damage.
15.3 NOISE AND NUISANCE CONTROL
A. Conduct operations in such a manner that nuisance shall not be caused to the general public, adjoining
residents and users of adjacent buildings.
If such nuisance is being caused the contractor shall immediately make such arrangements as will
prevent a recurrence of the same and indemnify the Owner against any claims arising there from.
B. Attention is also drawn to the necessity to comply with BS 5225 Code or Practice for noise control on
construction and demolition sites.
Page 41 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
15.4 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Comply with local regulations and satisfy the requirements of the environmental health office under
whose authority the works are being executed.
15.5 RADIO AND TV INTERFERENCE
A. All apparatus where the normal operation is such that interruption of low frequency or direct electrical
currents occur shall be fitted with means of suppressing the radio and TV interference so caused.
B. The equipment and methods to be used in determining the level of radio interference shall be as
specified in BS 727 and the limits of interference shall in all cases be those specified in BS 800.
C. Reference shall be made to CP 1006 for guidance on the provision and installation of equipment to meet
the above standards.
D. C.B. radio shall not be used except with the written consent of the Owner's authorized representative.
15.6 USE OF LASER EQUIPMENT
A. The following safety precautions shall be observed in addition to the recommendations of BS 4803.
1. At least one warning notice at each laser location.
2. The laser should be turned off or shuttered when not in use or unattended.
3. The laser should be set well above or below the heads of employees when possible.
4. Employees should never stare directly into the laser beam or point the laser at another person.
5. All laser equipment must bear a label indicating the maximum beam output, which must not exceed
5 milli watts.
6. Only qualified employees shall be assigned to install, adjust and operate the laser equipment.
B. In addition, the maximum period of exposure (MPE) to laser light should be determined and monitored
in accordance with BS 4803
Page 42 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 16 - EXISTING SITE SERVICES
A. Co-ordinate and co-operate with the Owner's authorized representative in the location, protection and
any necessary temporary diversion of existing site services.
B. Make a dimensioned sketch describing the exposed service and locating it in plan and section to
permanent and accessible reference points date and sign the sketch and submit same to the Owner's
authorized representative.
C. Any service so exposed shall only be covered up by permanent works with the written consent of the
Owner's authorized representative.
PART 17 - EXISTING TREES AND PLANTS
A. Carefully protect and maintain all trees, hedges, shrubs, etc., in proximity to the works and which are to
be retained in the permanent works.
PART 18 - INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S STAFF IN OPERATION OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO
PRACTICAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to practical completion of the installation, the Owner will be appointing maintenance staff or
maintenance contractor to undertake the operation and maintenance of the building services
installation.
The contractor shall include for providing assistance to the Owner's staff during the course of the
installation to explain the purpose and function of the works.
B. Include for a minimum period of 25 plant operating days prior to practical completion, to instruct the
Owner's maintenance staff or maintenance contractor in the day to day running of the plant and systems.
The location and function of all items listed on the record schedules shall be explained and the
procedures given in the operating and maintenance manuals for starting up, shutting down, isolating
sections, emergency procedures, etc., shall be comprehensively explained and demonstrated to the
Owner's satisfaction.
Page 43 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 19 - SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
19.1 ADDITIONAL SPARE PARTS
A. Six weeks prior to practical completion, submit a schedule of the additional spare parts that the
contractor recommends should be supplied over and above those consumable spares required up to
practical completion and for routine maintenance.
B. Each item on the schedule shall have the manufacturer's current price inserted, which shall also include
for packaging and delivery to site.
C. These additional spare parts may or may not be ordered during the currency of the contract and
therefore the cost thereof shall only be included in the contract sum when the subject of an instruction
by the Owner's authorized representative.
D. Spare parts shall be completely interchangeable and suitable for use in place of the corresponding part
supplied with the plant. They shall be greased and/or painted before packing to prevent deterioration
during delivery and storage.
E. Where spare parts are supplied by the contractor, each package shall be clearly marked and numbered
for identification in accordance with the schedule of spare parts and referenced to the equipment list in
the operation and maintenance manual.
F. Spare parts shall be handed over to the appointed representative of the Owner.
19.2 TOOLS
A. At practical completion, provide two complete sets of tools and portable indicating instruments for the
operation and maintenance of all plant and equipment together with suitable means of identifying,
storing and securing same.
Page 44 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 20 - FUEL AND POWER FOR COMMISSIONING
A. Fuel and power for commissioning and performance testing the works including payment of statutory
undertakings for same.
B. Fuel, water and power for running the contract heating system to dry out the building including payment
of statutory undertakings for same.
PART 21 - ATTENDANCE UPON OTHERS
A. Attendance upon and co-ordination of other contractors as necessary for the commissioning and
performance testing of the contract work.
PART 22 - TEMPORARY WORKS
A. All temporary works required for the proper and safe construction of the permanent works and for the
protection of personnel on site.
B. Advise the Owner's authorized representative and the consultant of all temporary works required to be
carried out together with all details of work required to uphold existing services and intended temporary
connections thereto.
PART 23 - CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SERVICES
A. All necessary notifications and authorizations in respect of connection of temporary or permanent

connection to existing services or investigator opening up thereof.
B.No temporary or permanent connection to existing services or investigator opening up thereof shall be
carried out without prior notification to the Owner's authorized representative and any necessary
authorization obtained from the Owner's authorized representative.
PART 24 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. The contractor shall provide and maintain in full working order all necessary safety equipment for access
and inspection purposes for use by the contractor and for use by other personnel on site as instructed
by the Owner's authorized representative. Such equipment shall include, but not be limited to,
protective clothing, safety harness, gas detection and emergency breathing apparatus for inspection of
confined spaces.
Page 45 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 25 - SCOPE OF WORKS
25.1 THE CONTRACT WORKS
A. The works covered by this contract are the design, selection, manufacturing, works testing, supplying
and delivery to site, erecting, connecting up, testing, commissioning, performance testing and handing
over in working order the complete engineering services installations described in the contract
document.
25.2 SYSTEMS INCLUDED
1. Metal clad medium voltage switchgear, medium voltage cables and transformers.
2. Low voltage switchgear and distribution boards.
3. Bus way and low voltage cables distribution.
4. Emergency diesel generator.
5. Automatic transfer switches (A.T.S)
6. Lighting installation.
7. Central battery system.
8. Lighting fixtures for indoor, outdoor, emergency and exit lighting fixtures.
9. Fire alarm & voice evacuation system.
10. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system.
11. Earthing system.
12. Automatic reactive power compensation.
13. Lightning Protection system.
14. Voice and Data Communication Cabling
15. Telephone System
16. Fire Alarm System
17. Clock System
18. IP Nurse Call System
19. Public Address System
20. Network Video Door Stations
21. Queue Management System
22. Master Antenna Tv System
23. Security System
Page 46 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 26 - RELATED WORK
There will be other Contract Works associated with and related to this Contract.
The Contractor shall make himself fully aware of the interfaces between the requirements of his Works and
the works of other. The Contractor's Works related to the Works of others shall include but not be limited to
the following.
A. Associated Contract Works
Substructure and under slab drainage
B. Associated Local Supply Company Works
1. Gas company
2. Water Company
3. Electricity Company
4. Telephone company
5. Sewage company
C. Associated Works in Other Divisions of this Contract
Mechanical, IT, Security, SCADA and Lifts, site wide infrastructure and integration of all systems.
The Contractor shall, before commencement his contract work, make himself fully aware of the special
setting-out and installation requirements of other contract Works that affect the Works of this Section.
PART 27 - EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION
All visible components of the Electrical System shall be selection to coordination with the interior design
concept of the architect.
Samples of all visible components shall be submitted to the authorized representative for approval
before any order is passed.
Page 47 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 28 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. The contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems under this Contract
function and operate in full accordance with the Specification and the testing and commissioning
procedures described elsewhere in this Specification.
B. Once the Contractor has demonstrated the operation of the Works to the satisfaction of the Owner's
Authorized Representative the complete integration of the Contractors Works with the Works of others
will be the responsibility of others.
C. Notwithstanding this, the Contractor's Works will not be deemed complete until the works are fully
integrated and demonstrated in function and operation as being fully integrated with the associated
works by others.
D. The Contractor shall allow for full attendance to the Owner's Authorized Representative and others in
order that the whole of the Works under this contract can be successfully demonstrated to be
functioning and operating with all other associated works to the satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
E. This shall not relieve the contractor in any way of his responsibilities under the Contract.
END OF SECTION 260500
Page 48 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260513
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and
Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500, applies to work of this Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to wire and cable work specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
D. Raceways and boxes for electrical systems, section 260533.
E. Cable trays for electrical system, section 260536.
A. Work includes providing all cables and connections, complete with all accessories in accordance
with Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system. Wiring size referenced in
this Section is metric, except as noted. For special wiring for individual systems, refer to respective
Section of these Specifications.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of cables, and connections of types, sizes
and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60183, IEC 60227,
IEC 60228, IEC 60502, IEC 60331, IEC 60811, IEC 61034, ICEA, SASO, IPCEA S61-402 and IEEE
Standards pertaining to cables and connections.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
D. In case of conflict among the specifications, drawings and BOQ, the more stringent provision will
govern.
Page 49 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on cables and connectors.
B. Samples: Submit 25cm length cables of each type and size Cables, Manufacturer Name, insulation
class and reference No. should be indicated on the submitted sample.
C. Compliance Sheet: Submit compliance sheet with the specs item by item, duly signed by the
manufacturer / manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.
D. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to verify compliance of the main equipment with the
relevant IEC Standards.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of the warranted item.
Warranty shall include both, materials and workmanship.
B. Warranty shall include:
1. Defective materials and installation.

2. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
3. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
4. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and
use.
6. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may be
required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with Employer,
manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not
cancelled due to the repair work.
C. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
date of substantial completion of the project.
Page 50 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. 13,800 volts circuit as referred to herein or shown elsewhere in the contract documents shall comprise three
single-core cables or one three-core cable rated
8700/15000 volts, armored or unarmored with a separate single-core green/yellow insulated earth cable of
the sizes shown on drawings and specified herein.
B. Medium Voltage (MV) Cables shall be suitable to operate at altitude of 2250 m above sea
level.
2.2 MULTICORE MV CABLES
A. Provide 3 core, armored or unarmored (as per drawings) MV cable rated at
8700/15000 Volts, as shown on Drawings. The cables shall conform to the following minimum
requirements:
1. Conductor: Concentric circular copper, stranded to IEC 60228 class 2.
2. Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting thermosetting material, 0.3mm minimum

thickness.
3. Insulation: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 4.5 mm

thick rated 90 C to IEC 60502 and containing no carbon black.
Manufacturer shall warranty that the insulation will not emit any
toxic fumes in the event of a fire.
4. Insulation Shield: Extruded semi-conducting thermosetting material and uncoated

copper tape. Metal shield shall have a fault capability of 1,000
Amps rms symmetrical minimum for 1 second. Semi-conducting
material shield shall be readily removable for termination.
5. Armor: If shown on Drawing, the armor shall be of galvanized double steel

tape armor over extruded PVC bedding.
6. Outer Sheath: Extruded Red PVC Type ST2to IEC 60502.

Page 51 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Manufacturer shall warranty that the outer sheath will not emit
any toxic fumes in the event of a fire.
7. Marking: A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the outer

jacket (over sheath) at intervals not exceeding 610 mm. Marking
shall include Manufacturer's name, insulating material, conductor
size and voltage class. Cores shall be marked by red, yellow and blue
tapes applied within the insulation screen.
8. Outside Diameter: As per IEC 60502.
B. Coordinate the critical dimensions of the MV Cables to be within the allowable tolerances
of the premolded splices and tapes.
C. The short circuit ratings of all MV Cables shall be coordinated with associated MV
switchgear and short circuit study/calculations.
2.3 SINGLE-CORE MV CABLES
A. Provide single core, armoured or unarmored MV Cables rated up to 8700/15000 Volts, as

shown on the Drawings. The cables shall conform to the following minimum
requirements:
1. Conductor: Concentric circular copper, stranded to IEC 60228 class 2.
2. Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting thermosetting material, 0.3 mm minimum

thickness.
3. Insulation: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene (XLPE), minimum 4.5 mm

thick rated 90C to IEC 60502 and containing no carbon black.
Manufacturer shall warranty that it will not emit any toxic fumes in
the event of a fire.
4. Insulation Shield: Extruded semi-conducting thermosetting material and uncoated

copper tape. Metal shield shall have a fault capability of 1,000
amps rms symmetrical minimum for 1 second. Semi-conducting
material shield shall be readily removable for termination.
5. Outer Sheath: Extruded Red PVC type ST2 to EC 60502.

Page 52 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Manufacturer shall warranty that the outer sheath will not emit any
toxic fumes in the event of a fire.
6. Marking: A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the outer

jacket (over sheath) at intervals not exceeding 610 mm. Marking
shall include Manufacturer's name, insulating material, conductor
size and voltage class. Cores shall be marked by red, yellow and
blue tapes applied within the insulation screen.
7. Outside Diameter: As per IEC 60502.
B. Coordinate the critical dimensions of the cable to be within the allowable tolerances of the pre-
molded splices and tapes. Cables which do not allow utilization of pre-molded splices and tapes
shall be removed from the work site.
C. The short circuit ratings of all MV cables shall be coordinated with associated MV switchgear
and short circuit study/calculations.
D. Single core cables shall neither run individually in a ferrous enclosure or pipe nor shall be
surrounded by any ferrous material.
E. Where shown on the Drawings, armoured single core MV cables shall have non- magnetic armor
wire (aluminum type).
2.4 EARTH CABLE
A. Provide separate earth cables in all medium voltage ring and radial circuits in accordance with
applicable International Standards and the requirements given in Section 260526 -
GROUNDING.
B. The Size of earth cable for each MV cable or circuit shall be based upon short circuit
calculations, but in any case not less than 95 mm2.
C. In case the MV cable is armoured cable (steel or aluminium), armouring can be used as the
earth cable.
2.5 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
Page 53 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Cable splicing or jointing shall not be allowed in any circumstances, except where the required
run length of any individual cable exceeds the maximum/standard length as Manufactured
in the factory. Obtain Engineer’s written approval for any splice or joint, prior to ordering the
cable.
B. Splices and terminations for all MV Cables rated up to 8700/15000 Volts shall be furnished in
kit form and shall conform to the recommendations of the cable Manufacturer. All material
shall be furnished in factory sealed packages and shall not be opened until required for use.
C. Splices for all MV Cables shall be pre-molded and rated for continuous duty and short circuit
duty at the rating of the services to which they are connected. They shall be suitable for
direct buried underground installation or mounted on cable trays/ladders as per the
requirements on site.
D. Termination shall be insulated using the materials specified and the procedures
recommended by the Manufacturer of the kit being used.
E. Splices for the earth shall be made exothermally or as per the recommendations of MV cable
splice Manufacturer.
2.6 CABLE MARKERS, SUPPORTS AND CLEATS
A. Cable markers and identification discs for all MV Cables shall be provided in accordance with
the applicable codes and regulations.
B. The supports for all MV Cables shall be approved galvanized cast steel clamps/ cleats with 10 mm
hexagon headed zinc plated fixing bolts and studs.
C. All MV Cables shall be tied on cable trays/ladders by non-releasing type cable cleats or any other
approved clamps.
D. The clamps for single core cables shall be of cast aluminum type or other equal and approved non-
ferrous material.
Page 54 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
Refer to list of recommended Manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the cables are to be installed and correct any
unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer.
3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Follow requirements of Specifications Section 260500 and details shown on

drawings.
B. No work shall commence until the Contractor has investigated the site satisfactorily, and
ascertained that the area is free from drains or other underground services. The Contractor
shall obtain approval of the routes for external cables with appropriate installation details on
shop drawings prior to commencement of any excavation on site.
C. Pull cables off drum mounted on cable jacks or a stationary cable trailer. Care shall be taken to
protect the cable at all times during the installation process. Cable rollers shall be used to
prevent undue friction below the cable and at all changes in direction. The Contractor shall
comply with all other Manufacturer's instructions.
D. Pull cables into position using a conductor pull or a wire basket over the metallic insulation
screen.
E. When installing into a duct system via a manhole, utilize a feeding tube long enough to reach
from the conduit entrance to the outside of the manhole.
F. When installing into cable ducts, all multi-core cables shall be installed singly and continuous
between the manholes. Splicing of cables between the manholes shall not be allowed in any
case.
G. For cables pulled into thrust boring or cable ducts exceeding 10 m length, use cable stockings
for hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken on the cable cores as well
as on the sheath. The pulling tension of the cable shall not exceed the maximum tension
recommended by the Cable Manufacturer.
Page 55 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
H. Utilize both manual and power types puling mechanisms on site as required with the rated
capacity (in Newtons) clearly marked on the mechanism. A dynamometer shall be used to
show the tension on the cable during all pulls and the indicator shall be constantly watched.
If any excessive strain develops, the pulling operation shall be stopped at once and the
difficulty determined and corrected. The dynamometer shall have a maximum tension
indicator to show the maximum tension developed during a pull. The cable play-out reel shall
be equipped with a suitable brake and shall be constantly manned during all pulls.
I. Under no circumstances shall cable be pulled using equipment not monitored by a
dynamometer. The use of motor vehicles in pulling cable is prohibited. Any cable so pulled
shall be removed and replaced.
J. To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends in raceway runs, the
pulling tension in the cable in Kg as it leaves the bend shall not exceed 500 times the radius of
the bend in meters.
K. Support cables at all times without excessive sag. Cables shall be located in such a way as to
minimize interference with other cables to be installed.
L. Provide adequate length of cables in manholes to avoid distorting pressures on the cables at
conduit bushings. Provide cable protection such as a layer of light rubber belting, friction tape
or similar material where required before permanently fixing the cables in place.
M. Exercise extreme care to prevent tension during bending of MV Cables. The permanent radius
of cable bend at any location after installation shall not be lesser than the cable manufacturer’s
recommendations.
N. Seal cable ends during pulling and immediately after cutting if splices or terminations are not
to be made immediately.
O. Arc proof all MV cables in manholes and building entrances. Arc proofing in a manhole shall be
extended in one helically wound half lapped layer from one duct end along the cable to the
other duct end. Secure arc proofing in position with glass tape randomly wrapped to the
instructions of the arc proofing tape Manufacturer.
P. Provide moisture seal in conduit/building transition after all MV Cables are installed. A special
caulking compound of a putty-like consistency shall be used, which shall be workable with the
hands at temperatures as low as 1.7 oC, and shall not slump up to a temperature of 149 oC or
less. It shall not be hardened materially when exposed to air.
Q. Install earth cable and its associated MV cable(s) in same conduit or together with the MV
cable(s) when they are direct buried. Ground earth cable in every manhole. Shields and
armour of MV cables shall be earthed at both ends.
Page 56 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
R. Install cable markers and identification discs in accordance with the applicable codes and
regulation and locate them so that they are readily visible when cable is permanently fixed in
position.\
3.3 SPLICING AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splicing and terminations of all MV cables shall be carried out by the personnel certified by
Saudi Electric Company (SEC).
B. Utilize appropriate crimping tools for splicing and terminations of all MV Cables, with guides
to position the connectors or lugs in the tool correctly. The connectors, lugs and associated
dies shall be of correct type and size suitable for the MV cable under splicing or terminations.
Crimping tools shall be designed with steps to prevent over crimping and shall be of a type
which have provision to prevent the tool from opening until the crimp action is completed.
Crimping tools shall be an approved product by the connector Manufacturer.
C. Comply with Manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions for splicing and terminations
of MV cables, provided these do not contradict with the applicable standards. Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer any contradictions found prior to work commencements.
D. Splices shall not be made to utilize short lengths of cable. When cables are being installed into
a duct system with manholes, the splices shall only be provided within the manholes and no
splice shall be allowed outside the manholes.
E. Keep work areas dry, dust free and ventilated during splicing and terminating MV cables.
F. Before making final splice or termination of MV cables, ensure conductor phasing is correct.
G. Where the shape and configuration of terminal fittings make workmanlike insulation of the
bare connection impractical, the contours of the connection shall be smoothed by filling voids
and moldings over irregular surface with electrical putty before application of the
recommended thickness of insulating material.
H. Follow the detailed splicing and termination requirements and procedure, as applicable for MV
cables splicing and terminations, given in Section 260519.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After completion of the installation of all MV cables, test each conductor for phasing, continuity
and insulation resistance. Carry out a high voltage DC insulation test between each conductor
and earth at 2½ times the phase to earth working voltage for 15 minutes. Full tests shall be
carried out only once. Where preliminary tests are required on sections of cable prior to
terminating or jointing they shall be carried out at reduced time and voltage. Test procedures
shall be in accordance with the appropriate IEC standard.
B. All MV cables shall be tested when splicing and terminations are fully prepared and completed
except for final connections of cable tails onto equipment.
C. In addition to above, carry out any test(s) required to comply with the procedures of Saudi
Electric Company (SEC) for power connection requirements, and any other test required by the
Engineer.
Page 57 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260519
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS A N D CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
C. The requirements of this section apply to wire and cable work specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
D. Raceways and boxes for electrical systems, section 260533.
E. Cable trays for electrical system, section 260536.
A. Work includes providing all wires, cables and connections, complete with all accessories in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system. Wiring size
referenced in this Section is metric, except as noted. For special wiring for individual systems, refer
to respective Section of these Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wires, cables, and connections of types,
sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60183, IEC 60227,
IEC 60228, IEC 60502, IEC 60331, IEC 60811, IEC 61034, ICEA, BS 6004, BS 6121, BS 6500, BS 6746,
IPCEA S 66-524, IPCEA S 68-16 and IEEE Standards pertaining to wires, cables and connections.
govern.
govern.
Page 58 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on wires, cables and connectors.
B. Samples: Submit 25cm length cables of each type and size of wires and Cables, Manufacturer Name,
insulation class and reference No. Should be indicated on the Submitted Sample.
D. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to verify compliance of the main equipment with the
1.5 WARRANTY

use.
Page 59 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MAINS AND SUBFEEDER CABLES
A. GENERAL
Provide all of the mains cables shown on the drawings or detailed in the cable schedules or the
schedules of work.
All single and multi-core cables shall comply with IEC 502 and all conductors shall be copper
conductors, XLPE insulated and LSHF sheathed and shall have insulation class level not less than
(0.6/1KV), armored or non-armored type as indicated on the drawings.
Copper conductors shall be stranded for sections 2.5mm2 and above. Signal and control cables shall
have solid conductors. Flexible cords shall have finely stranded conductors.
Conductor sizes shall be metric, as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with cross-sectional areas
smaller than specified will not be accepted.
The current carrying capacity of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for the specified type of insulation and the expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in the specified type of insulation, unless warranted by special conditions
and approved by the Engineer.
The insulation of each conductor shall be color coded or otherwise identified as required by the
Regulations. Color coding shall be maintained throughout the entire installation.
For each lot of cable supply a certificate of origin issued by the manufacturer stating its origin,
manufacturer, constitution and standards to which it complies with. In the absence of such
documents, the Engineer reserves the right to require that tests, at the Contractor's expense, be
performed by an official laboratory on samples taken from lots of cables delivered to the Site.
Be responsible for any delays in the work resulting from non-compliance with the requirements
mentioned above.
Page 60 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Cable installations whether so indicated or not shall include all joints and their accessories at
terminating ends or at tap-off points, earthing and bonding etc. Carried to completion.
Joints in cable shall not be accepted unless so required in the Drawings. Cables shall be supplied in
lengths sufficient for a straight-through pull from termination to termination.
The definition of "Low Voltage" given in the IEE wiring regulations shall apply and "High Voltage"
shall mean any voltage higher than low voltage.
All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer's seals, labels, or other proof of origin
intact. Such labels and seals shall not be removed until the cable is required for use, and shall be
retained for inspection.
Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the drawings or in the cable schedules all cable
over sheaths shall be black.
Cables shall be handled, terminated and installed in accordance with the cable manufacturer's
recommendations. The technical advice of the manufacturer's recommendations. The technical
advice of the manufacturer's specialists shall be followed if any special conditions or unusual
circumstances apply.
Where cable sizes are not indicated on the drawings or in the cable schedules, the contractor shall
be responsible for determining the correct size of each cable.
Cable sizes shall be determined on the basis of current rating and/or voltage drop and/or earth loop
impedance, (for checking the need of RCD) together within allowance for grouping with other
cables and the method of installation, whichever is relevant, after taking into account the type of
cable, the ambient conditions, the method of installation and the disposition of each cable relative
to other cables.
Full details, with illustrations, of all cable supports and fixing devices shall be submitted before any
orders are placed or work put in hand. All cable supports and fixing devices shall be designed to
have a factor of safety of not less than 4.
Wherever cables pass through walls, ceilings, partitions and the like, a heavy-gauge PVC sleeve shall
be provided, of internal diameter greater by at least 12mm, but not more than 25mm, than the
diameter of the cable.
The length of any such sleeve shall be such that each end projects by 5 mm beyond the surface of
the element through which it passes, and the ends of they bore shall be provided with an adequate
radius to prevent chafing of the cable sheath.
Page 61 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Wherever cables pass through floors a heavy gauge steel sleeve shall be provided, of internal
diameter greater by at least 12mm, but not more than 25mm, than the diameter of the cable and
projecting above floor level by at least 50mm.
Where cables pass through walls and/or floors which form part of the building's fire
compartmentation, the hole(s) through which the cables pass shall be sealed after the cables have
been installed, so as to give the same standard of fire resistance as the original wall or floor. Details
of the proposed sealing method shall be submitted prior to implementation.
All cables shall be separated from water, gas, and other piped services by a distance of not less than
150 mm unless the circumstances of the installation make this impossible.
Fire resistant cables will be used as indicated on the drawings and it shall be (copper conductors,
mica/glass tape, XLPE, LSHF, SWA, LSHF) fire rated for 3hours (950 °C), category C, W and Z with
normal operating temperature (90 °C) to meet BS 6387 and shall have insulation class level not less
than (0.6/1 KV).
2.2 CONTROL CABLES
All control cables shall comply with IEC 60502 and IEC 60227. All conductors shall be solid copper
conductors with PVC insulation and PVC sheathed.
All control cables carrying analogue signals shall be shielded type using collective screen (24 µm
aluminium/PETP tape over tinned copper drain wire).
All control cables shall have insulation class level not less than (450/750 V).
All flexible cords shall have finely stranded conductors.
The number of cores and cross section areas (1.5 mm2 minimum) for all control cables shall be as
per the manufacturer’s recommendations; and the approved shop drawings and calculations
submitted by the contractor.
All control cables feeding life safety equipment such as (smoke fans, pressurization fans, etc.) shall
be fire resistant type (copper conductors, mica/glass tape, XLPE, LSHF, SWA, LSHF) fire rated for
3hours (950 °C), category C, W and Z with normal operating temperature (90 °C) to meet BS 6387.
Page 62 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.3 FINAL SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING
Final sub-circuit work originating from light and power panel boards shall be arranged as shown on
the Drawings.
Final sub-circuit wiring shall be copper conductors, LSHF insulation and shall have insulation class
level not less than (450/750 V).
Fire resistant final sub-circuit wiring shall be (CU/Mica/LSHF) fire rated for 3 hours (950oC), category
C, W and Z with normal operating temp. (90oC) to meet BS 6387 and shall have insulation class level
(0.6/1KV), and shall be used to feed the life safety equipment such as (smoke dampers, safety lights,
exit signs…etc.).
At least 300 mm of free conductor shall be left at each outlet, switch point and pull box for the
making up of joints, or the connection of fixtures or devices, except where conductors are intended
to loop without joints through lamp holders, receptacles and similar device boxes.
Generally, branch circuit conductor sizes are indicated on the drawings. Such sizes are minimum
requirements and must be increased, where required, to suit the length of run and voltage drop, at
no extra cost. Voltage drop from distribution transformers to furthest outlets shall be maximum 5%.
2.4 LOW CURRENT CABLES
A. Provide cables for all low current systems according to the requirements given in the relevant
section of each system contained elsewhere in these Specifications. All such cables shall
comply with the applicable international standards.
2.5 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. Cable splicing or jointing shall not be allowed in any circumstances, except where the required
run length of any individual cable exceeds the maximum/standard length as manufactured in the
factory. Obtain Engineer’s written approval for any splice or joint, prior to ordering the cable.
B. Splices and terminations for all LV. cables rated 600/1000 V grade shall be furnished in kit form
and shall conform to the recommendations of the cable manufacturer. All material shall be
furnished in factory sealed packages and shall not be opened until required for use.
C. Splices for all LV cables shall be pre-molded or heat shrink type and rated for continuous duty at
Page 63 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
the rating of the services to which they are connected. They shall be suitable for direct buried
underground installation or mounted on cable trays as per the requirements on site.
D. Terminations shall be insulated using the materials specified and the procedures recommended
by the Manufacturer of the kit being used.
E. Splices for the earth shall be made exothermally or as per the recommendations of the LV cable
splice Manufacturer.
2.6 CABLE MARKERS, SUPPORTS AND TIES
A. Cable markers and identifications discs for all LV cables shall be provided in accordance with the
applicable codes and regulations.
B. Cleats, saddles and clips used for fixing cables shall be black nylon for up to 20 mm dia. cables
and glass reinforced nylon for cables above 20 mm dia. All saddles and clips shall be secured
using brass round screws for cables up to 20 mm dia. and 10 mm hexagon headed zinc plated
bolts and studs above 20 mm dia.
C. All LV cables shall be tied on cable trays/ladders by non-releasing type cleats or any other
approved clamps/saddles.
D. Clamps for single core cables shall be of cast aluminum type r other equal and approved non-
ferrous material.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION OF L.V CABLES
Except in the case where it is terminated in full view onto a clearly labelled switch, starter, distribution
board or similar piece of apparatus, or onto a motor or other item of equipment the function of which is
evident, each and every cable end shall be provided with an approved means of identification. In
particular, this requirement shall apply to all cables terminating on the back, or in the base, of cubicle
type or similar switchboard or control panel and in any other case where the function of the cable is not
immediately obvious.
The means of identification shall be as follows: -
A. An engraved brass or aluminium label securely fixed to the cable sealing box.
B. An engraved brass or aluminium label securely tied to the cable with galvanized iron or tinned
copper binding wire.
Self-adhesive embossed plastic labels will not be accepted as permanent means of identification.
The means of identification shall give the cable size, number of cores, and function together with
the cable reference number if one has been allocated.
The cores of all control cables shall be individually identified, at terminations, by means of approved
plastic ferrules bearing indelible characters, in accordance with the numbering on the relevant
wiring diagrams.
All cables run above and underground shall be identified by means of engraved brass or aluminum
label at intervals not exceeding 30 meters. The labels shall bear details of the cable size, number
of cores, function, and reference number (if any) and shall be securely attached to the cables with
galvanized iron or tinned copper binding wires.
Page 64 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
L.V cables glands
1. CMP (Nickel steel type for multi-core cables and brass nickel type for single core cable)
(U.K)
2. PFLITSCH (Nickel steel type for multi-core cables and brass nickel type for single core cable)
(Germany)
3. Hawke (U.K)
Or approved equal from SAUDI market.
3M for the following :- (U.S.A)
 Lv. Cable terminations.

 Wire nuts.
 Cable marking.
 Lugs.
 Connectors.
 Underground splicing kits for outdoor/landscape lighting network only.
 Cable accessories, etc.
Or approved equal from SAUDI market.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the cables are to be installed and correct any
unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
Page 65 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3.2 SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING INSTALLATION
A. The sub-circuit and final circuit wiring for lighting, small power and equipment power installations
shall take the following forms:
1. Single core LSHF insulated wires in trunking or conduits for internal wiring.
2. Multi-core XLPE/LSHF insulated unarmored cables in cable trays, ladders or conduits

for internal wiring.
3. Multi-core XLPE/SWA/LSHF insulated armored cables in conduits, cable trays, ladders

duct banks or direct buried for external wiring.
B. The types of lighting and small/equipment power installations and accessories are detailed
elsewhere in the Specifications and on the Drawings.
C. No conductor smaller than 2.5 mm 2 shall be used for lighting installations and small/equipment
power installations. Direct buried cables whether used for external lighting or any other purpose
shall not be less than 4.0 mm 2.
D. Small power installations shall be wired using the radial system or as described on the Drawings.
E. Equipment power installations shall generally be wired on a single circuit basis (1-phase or 3-
phase), as shown on the Drawings and will serve fixed items of equipment.
F. Each lighting and small/equipment power circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor
throughout to each light/switch point, power socket outlet or fixed equipment.
G. Where a lighting or small/equipment power circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit

together with any other circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductor shall be de-rated
for grouping in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and This would normally result
in the need to increase the conductor sizes as shown in the Panel board Schedules or on the
Drawings to fulfill the approved manufacturer recommendations.
H. Not more than 2 final sub-circuits shall be run in any conduit.
I. Normal and emergency circuit wiring/cables for lighting, small/equipment power or any other
purpose shall be run in separate conduits or in separate compartments of trunking or on separate
cable trays/ladders.
Page 66 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3.3 FLEXIBLE CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Flexible cables shall not be concealed directly in any part of the installation except in conduits or
sleeves. Follow requirements of Specifications Section 260500 and details shown on drawings.
B. Where flexible cables are subject to heat they shall be constructed containing a minimum of three
cores.
C. All flexible cables are to be of circular construction containing a minimum of three cores.
D. Where portable appliances exceed 200-watt rating, the flexible cable conductor size shall not be
smaller than 28 x 0.25 mm (equivalent to 1.5 mm 2).
E. Flexible cables exceeding 1.5 m in length shall not be allowed, hard wiring shall be taken to within
1.5 m of all equipment or apparatus to be supplied.
3.4 INTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Where cables enclosed in conduits and run vertically in excess of 5 m, the cables shall be clamped
to relieve strain on the cables, using suitable approved clamps. Follow requirements of
Specifications Section 260500 and details shown on drawings.
B. Where multiple circuit wiring follows a common route then the wiring shall be installed in trunking
rather than multiple conduits with prior approval of the Engineer.
C. Where cables and wires run in trunking, each circuit or group of circuits shall be clipped together
using nylon straps or other suitable straps or clips. Vertical runs of trunking exceeding 5 m shall
be supplied with pin racks to relieve the strain on cables Trunking maximum filling ratios shall not
exceed what permitted by IEC standards.
D. Multicore power cables shall not be run inside cable trunking.
E. All cable runs shall be continuous; no joints will be permitted except where the required run length
of an individual cable exceeds the standard/maximum length of a cable drum as manufactured in
the factory. Obtain approval of the Engineer for each joint, prior to ordering the cables.
F. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent tension during bending of LV cables.
G. The permanent radius of cables bend at any location after installation shall not be smaller than
the cable manufacturer’s recommendations and in full compliance with the NFPA-70
requirements.
H. Where cables are supported on cable tray, they shall be fixed to the cable tray using suitable
approved clamps/saddles. Clamps/saddles shall be spaced at not greater than 600 mm intervals
along each cable, and within 100 mm of each bend or set.
I. Where cables are laid on cable trays or ladder in mechanical or electrical rooms or prone to be
Page 67 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
damaged elsewhere on the project, they shall be mechanically protected by a cover to a height
not less than 2 m from the finished floor level.
J. When installing cables, care shall be taken to ensure that electrolytic action does not take place
between dis-similar metals used for cable trays, ladders, supports, clamps, etc.
K. Each cable gland shall be from the same Manufacturer as the cable on which it is used and shall
be stamped describing the size and number of conductors. PVC shrouds shall be used to protect
every gland.
L. Power and lighting cables can be installed on a single cable tray or cable ladder.
M. However normal and emergency power cables shall be installed either on separate cable
trays/ladders or separated by mechanical separators if combined on a single cable tray/ladder.
N. TV, Communications and other low current cables shall be installed on separate cable trays or
cable trunking with fire alarm cables separated by mechanical separators from other cables.
3.5 EXTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A. No work shall commence until the Contractor has investigated the site satisfactorily, and
ascertained that the area is free from drains or other underground services. The Contractor shall
obtain approval of the routes for external cable with appropriate installation details on shop
drawings prior to commencement of any excavation on site. Follow requirements of Specifications
Section 260500 and details shown on drawings.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, excavations within 600 mm of existing services shall be by hand
digging. All services uncovered, whether expected or not, shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer; they shall be supported by slings or other suitable means and protected. Any damage
to services, however minor, shall be reported immediately to the Engineer; no repairs or
replacement shall be done unless the Engineer gives his approval.
C. When cable trenches are opened, all cables shall be laid as quickly as possible.
D. The Engineer’s approval shall be obtained before a trench is backfill, generally backfilling shall be
commenced within 24 hours of cable laying and the work completed speedily.
E. Keep excavations free of water and protected against damage or collapse. The safety of persons
and the protection of structures, buildings, roads and services from damage shall be ensured.
F. Before cables are laid, grade bottom of the trench evenly, clean out loose stones and cover for the
full width of the trench with a 150 mm layer of sieved sand. Where the level of the trench bottom
varies the slope shall not be greater than 1 in 12.
G. Pull cables over cable rollers adequately spaced to prevent the cable being dragged over ground
or other surfaces. For cables pulled into thrust boring or cables ducts and for all cables exceeding
10 m length, use cable stockings for hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is
taken on the cable cores as well as the sheath and excessive strain shall be avoided. The pulling
Page 68 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
tension of the cable shall not exceed the maximum tension recommended by the cable
Manufacturer.
H. After cables have been laid, a further layer of sieved sand shall be added over the full width of the
trench and tamped to provide finally not less than 150 mm cover over the cables.
I. Backfill trenches in layers and compact layer before the next layer. The first two layers shall be 100
mm deep and compacted by hand; then mechanical compacting may be used. Cable warning tapes
only shall be provided over the external lighting cables, but warning tapes and cable protective
tiles shall be used over LV power and MV cables.
J. Warning tapes shall be of polythene not less than 150 mm wide and at least 0.25 mm thick. They
shall be yellow in color and bear the continuously repeated legend "-Caution Electric Cable Below"
- or similar in English and Arabic, in black letters not less than 30 mm high.
K. Provide cable protective tiles in accordance with the applicable regulations and standards. Cable
protective tiles shall be placed directly on the compacted sand cover over the cables.
L. Where cables laid in trenches and cross other cables; a minimum clearance of 250 mm between
the crossing cables shall be maintained. Cables shall not be laid one above the other except where
shown on the Drawings.
M. Where cables run under roadways, install in PVC ducts encased in concrete. The ducts shall extend
for a minimum distance of 1 m on each side of roadway and shall be sealed at each end.
N. Ducts shall be sized to allow installation of cable without excessive tension loads. 20% spare ducts
shall be provided with a minimum of one spare duct at each location.
Page 69 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
O. When installed in cable ducts, all multi-core cables shall be installed singly and continuous
between the manholes. Splicing of cables between the manholes shall not be allowed in any case.
P. Utilize both manual and power type pulling mechanisms on site as required with the rated
capacity (in kilograms or pounds) clearly marked on the mechanism. A dynamometer shall be used
to show the tension on the cable during all pulls and the indicator shall be constantly watched. If
any excessive strain develops, the pulling operation shall be stopped at once and the difficulty
determined and corrected. The dynamometer shall have a maximum tension indicator to show
the maximum tension developed during a pull. The cable play-out reel shall be equipped with a
suitable brake and shall be constantly manned during all pulls.
Q. Under no circumstances shall cable be pulled using equipment not monitored by a dynamometer.
The use of motor vehicles in pulling cable is prohibited. Any cable so pulled shall be removed and
replaced.
R. To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends in raceway runs, the pulling
tension in the cable in kilograms as it leaves the bend shall not exceed 500 times the radius of the
bend in meters.
S. Support cables at all times without excessive sag. Cables shall be located in such a way as to
minimize interference with other cables to be installed.
T. Provide adequate length of cables in manholes to avoid distorting pressures on the cables at
conduit bushings. Cable protection such as a layer of light rubber belting, friction tape or similar
material shall be provided where required before permanently fixing the cables in place.
U. Install and support cables in such a way that there shall be no undue mechanical strain on the
cable terminations. The requirements of NFPA-70 shall be fulfilled for the erection of LV cables, as
applicable.
V. Terminate cables using only the correct size and type of gland with earth tag and PVC shroud, as
supplied or recommended by the cable Manufacturer. All glands shall be dustproof and the glands
for outdoor usage shall be fully weather and waterproof.
W. Bond cable armoring to earth at each termination by means of a green/yellow Cu/LSHF earth
conductor, sized in accordance with IEC 60364 and NFPA-70, article 250, connecting the cable
gland earth tag to the local earth terminal. The apparatus gland plate shall be cleaned to bare
metal around the cable gland earth tag bolted connection to ensure a sound electrical connection.
X. Where cables pass through walls or floors, protect by PVC or mild steel sealed sleeves cast into
the building fabric. The sleeves shall be fire stopped after installation of the cable(s) to the same
rating as the walls or floors through which they pass.
Y. Before any tradesman is allowed to terminate an armored cable in the permanent works, he shall
make a demonstration termination in the presence of the Engineer and obtain the approval of the
Engineer.
Z. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the ends of the ducts or
sleeves using a special caulking compound of a putty-like consistency. It shall be workable with
the hands at temperatures as low as 1.7 oC, and shall not slump up to a temperature of 149 oC or
Page 70 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
less. It shall not be hardened materially when exposed to air.
AA. Install cable markers and identification discs in accordance with the applicable codes and
regulations and locate them so that they are readily visible when cable is permanently fixed in
position.
3.6 INSPERCTION AND TEST PROCEDURES
1.1 The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to:-
3.6.1 Low-Voltage Cables 600 Volt Maximum
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and evidence of overheating.
2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-

wrench method.
c. Perform thermographic survey.
3. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-resistance
ohmmeter, if applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and

adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and
1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute.
C. Test Values
1. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
2. Bolt-torque levels.
Page 71 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available,
investigate any values which deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent
of the lowest value.
4. Minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously obtained

results but not less than two megohms.
3.7 SMALL WIRING
A. For the purpose of this specification, the description "small wiring" shall apply to all low voltage
cables and wiring connected directly or indirectly to the public electricity supply system, or to any
independent private supply system for the purpose of supplying electricity to general power and
lighting circuits, except the following:
1. telephone, public address, and other communication circuits,
2. fire detection, alarm, and other security circuits operating at a voltage level of 24 volts or
less between conductors.
3. cables and wiring forming part of a system for the control and/or supervision of the building
engineering services.
All of the above cables and wiring included are fully described elsewhere in this Specification under
appropriate headings.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant British Standards and
manufacturer recommendation.
The contractor shall submit with his Tender details of any internationally recognized Standards and
Codes of practice he proposes to use in lieu of, or in addition to, those stated.
B. All wiring shall be carried out using one or more of the following wring systems, as indicated on the
drawings.
1. single-core unsheathed cables drawn into metallic or non-metallic conduit and/or trunking
as specified elsewhere.
2. twin- and/or multi-core sheathed cables, armored or unarmored, clipped to building

surfaces or structures or to cable tray as specified elsewhere.
Page 72 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. mineral insulated cables, sheathed or clipped to building surfaces or structures or to cable
tray as specified elsewhere.
4. flexible cords and/or cables.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the IEC 60502.
PVC cables to IEC 60502 and rubber cables to IEC 60245 shall not under any circumstances be run
underground.
No cables shall be installed unless the ambient temperature and the temperature of the cable are
above 0 oC, and have been so for the preceding 24 hours.
Where cables have subjected to temperatures below 0 oC, care shall be taken to ensure that they
are above that temperature for 24 hours before installation.
3.8 SPLICING AND TERMINATIONS
A. Cable splicing or jointing is not allowed, except where the required run length of any individual
cable exceeds the maximum/standard length as manufactured in the factory. The Contractor shall
obtain Engineer’s written approval for any splice or joint, prior to ordering the cable.
B. The Engineer shall be informed whenever cables are to be spliced or terminated.
C. The Engineer shall be given evidence that the joint or termination Manufacturer has stated that
materials to be employed are suitable for the type of cable to be jointed or terminated.
D. Supply and install all materials, equipment and accessories necessary for the proper jointing,
terminating and connecting, ready for service, of all cables included in the works.
E. Employ for this work, staff who are fully qualified and competent for the types of joints and
terminations to be made.
F. Take all necessary precautions to prevent damage and ingress of moisture and impurities; cables
ends shall be made free from moisture before jointing commences. Where circumstances prevent
completion of the jointing or termination, the cable ends shall be sealed properly.
G. All jointing and terminations, once commenced, shall proceed continuously until it is completed
and sealed in the shortest possible time, without interruption. No terminations shall be made
under wet or dirty conditions.
H. Terminate all cables in brass compression glands complying with BS 6121 and of a design
appropriate to the type and size of cable(s) being terminated. Glands for armored cables shall be
Page 73 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
provided with a properly designed clamping device for the armor or screen. All cable glands shall
be provided with a dust and waterproof outer sheath seal.
I. Provide compression glands with earthing tags and close-fitting PVC shrouds.
J. Except where it is impracticable to do so, the cable cores shall be taken through the terminating
box directly to the terminals of the equipment, without crosses, and shall be made off with an
approved type of hydraulically crimped socket.
K. The cores of all cables shall be correctly 'phased out' before the final jointing, terminations or
connections are made. Continuity of spare cores shall be maintained at joints. At terminations,
any spare cores shall be connected to spare terminals.
L. At all cable terminations the armoring or metallic sheath of the cables, if any, shall be solidly
bonded to the equipment earth terminal or bar by means of properly designed brass or copper
clamps and a copper conductor of section not less than that required by the IEC 60364, subject to
a minimum section of 2.5 mm².
M. Core identification at terminations shall be done by colored or numbered plastic stretch or shrink
ferrules.
N. Utilize appropriate rimping tools for splicing and termination of all cables with guides to position
the connectors or lugs in the tool correctly. The connectors, lugs and associated ies for the
compression tool shall be of correct type and size. The crimping tool shall be designed with steps
to prevent over crimping and shall be of a type which have provision to prevent the tool from
opening until the crimp action is completed.
O. Tools for manipulation and termination of cables shall be of a design approved by the cable
manufacturer. Corrugation of the metal sheath or damage to outer coverings will not be accepted.
A wood block or wooden faced tool shall be used to finally dress the cable into position.
P. Repairs to a cable sheath, regardless of the extent of the damage, will not be accepted; straight
through joints only are permitted.
Q. Splices shall not be made to utilize short lengths of cable. When cables being installed into a duct
system with manholes, the splices shall only be provided within manholes and no splice shall be
allowed outside the manholes.
R. Jointing and terminations shall be made in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
S. The sleeves used for jointing and terminations shall be heat shrink type. They shall provide a
sufficient thickness of insulation to suit the particular application.
T. The insulation tapes used for jointing and terminations shall have temperature rating and
insulating property not less than the cable insulation. They shall be fully compatible with the type
and size of cables and comply with the applicable standards and regulations.
Page 74 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. After completion of the installation of L.V. cables and wires, carry out insulation resistance test for
1 minute at 500 V or 1000 V, according to the rated voltage of the cables/wires under test. The
test voltage shall be applied between the conductors and between each conductor and
earth/neutral and shall comply with the requirements of IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th edition and
other applicable standards.
B. All LV cables and wires shall be tested when splicing and terminations are fully prepared and
completed, except for final connections of cables/wires tails onto equipment.
Page 75 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500, apply to work of this section.
C. Lightning protection for structures section 264113.
D. Low-voltage electrical power conductors and cables, section 260519.
E. Raceways and boxes for electrical systems, section 260533.
F. Requirements of this section apply to electrical earthing work specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation, all system earthing, equipment earthing, earthing of outlets,
special earthing for telecommunication, earthing of raceways and conduits, earthing of distribution
Panel boards, transformers, ring main units, MV switchgear... etc., earth pits and accessories work shall
be in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of earthing products, of

types, and ratings required, and ancillary materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus and
bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
Page 76 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 62305, IEC 60364-1,
BS 7430, NEC 250, BS 50310, TIA 607-B (for Telecom systems earthing), TIA 568, TIA 569, SAS0 1270,
SASO 1486, SASO 1487, SASO 1357, SASO 1614, BS 6651 and IEEE Standards pertaining to electrical
earthing circuitry and equipment. Provide earthing products which are labelled for their intended
usage.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will govern.
govern.
Page 77 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on earthing products and associated accessories.
B. Samples: Submit sample of earthing cables and earthing accessories.
C. Shop drawings: Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background drawings.
D. Compliance Sheet: Submit compliance sheet with the specs item by item, duly signed by the
1.5 WARRANTY
D. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
E. Warranty shall include:

use.
F. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
Page 78 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRODES
A. Earth rods shall be of circular cross-section copper clad steel earth rod 2 (20mm x 1.5 meter) type
Sections shall be jointed with purpose made couplings and a suitable driving cap and tip shall be fitted
to the rod extremities. Couplings shall not exceed the diameter of the rod.
B. Rod section couplings, driving cap and tip shall be bronze or other material which exhibits mechanical
strength, electrical continuity between sections and does not give rise to electrolytic or corrosive action. All coupling
units shall be the same length of threaded length of the rod.
C. Earth rods shall be a minimum length of 3 meters and shall be driven into the ground using a suitable
mechanical hammer. The tops of the rods shall be driven below ground level to suit the inspection pit.
D. The top of each rod electrode shall be housed in a purpose made concrete pit to facilitate inspection.
The pit shall be provided with a lid and the assembly shall be flush with ground level.
E. Earth pits shall be provided with a waterproof seal where installed inside the building.
F. Earth pit cover shall be stamped with “Earthing Pit”.
G. All copper cables or strip sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings and to be connected from the top
of the earth rod with a purpose made nonferrous thermo weld.
H. Parallel connected earth rods shall be spaced at a horizontal distance equal to twice the length of one
rod. They shall be connected with bare 240 mm² stranded copper cable unless otherwise shown on the
drawings, buried not less than 800 mm below ground level unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
I. Copper strip or stranded cable may be installed where necessary in the same trenches as HV/LV cables
but shall be separated from all other cables and services by a distance not less than 300 mm.
J. The earthing resistance shall be not more than (5) ohm for power systems and to be less than (1) ohm
for light current systems.
Site testes shall be made to ascertain that the electrode system resistance meets this requirement. If
the resistance exceeds this figure the contractor shall submit his proposals to reduce the system
resistance to the specified level for the consultant for review / approval.
Page 79 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.2 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
A. Earthing conductors connecting the main earthing terminal or bar and electrode system shall be
green/yellow PVC insulated, stranded copper cable. A minimum of two earthing conductors shall be
installed and separately connected to the distribution bus bars and test links main earth bar with bolted
test links of copper and having a cross section as indicated on the drawings.
2.3 MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL
A. The main earthing terminal shall consist of tin plated hard drawn copper to IEC 62305, BS EN
13601:2013 formed into a bar having minimum dimensions as detailed in the earthing schematic.
B. Each earthing bar shall be mounted not less than 450 mm above the finished floor level and spaced by
means of insulators not less than 50 mm from the fixing surface.
C. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third of earthing bar width. Where this is not possible
then the connection shall be made to a copper flag welded to the earthing bar.
D. Each connection to the main earthing terminal shall be identified with an appropriately worded label
made of durable material.
2.4 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
A. Protective conductors between equipment earthing terminals or bars and the main earthing terminal
or bar shall be made with 240 mm² stranded copper insulated cables unless otherwise shown on the
drawings. Cables shall be connected to remote ends of the equipment earthing terminals or bar and
separately connected to the main earthing terminal or bar.
B. Where a number of protective conductors follow the same route these shall be green/yellow PVC
covered and installed on a galvanized cable tray and fixed with purpose made cleats.
C. Connections between main earthing terminal or bars, equipment earthing terminals, etc, and stranded
copper cables shall be made with appropriate compression type lug, bolt, nut and lock washers. Contact
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned.
Page 80 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Sockets lugs, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets, clamps, cleats or other items which come into direct
contact with copper protective conductor’s bars, strips, cables etc, shall be non-ferrous and
manufactured from brass, bronze or other suitable conducting material which will not cause
electrolytic or other corrosion. Where connections occur between copper and galvanized structures,
contact surfaces shall, additionally, be tinned and after completion compounded to exclude moisture.
Protective conductors, cables, strip, bars, lugs, etc, shall be installed in visible and serviceable positions.
E. The joints shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting point of at least 600o C. The
amount of overlap between the two strips to be jointed shall not be less than the width of the larger
conductor.
2.5 L.V. EARTHING AND BONDING
A. A complete and effective system of earthing shall be provided for the L.V equipment. The system of earthing
shall comply with the IET wiring regulations and the recommendations stated in IEC, DIN/VDE Standards BS
7430, except where detailed otherwise in this specification and the drawings. Where the IET wiring
regulations and IEC, DIN/VDE Standards differ then the former shall take precedence.
B. The connection of a grounding electrode conductor shall be made in a manner that will in ensure a
continuous permanent and effective grounding path. The effective bonding shall be provided around
insulated joints and section and around any equipment that is likely to be disconnected for repairs or
replacement. Bonding conductors shall be of sufficient length to permit removal of such equipment while
retaining the integrity of the bond.
C. The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment such as kitchen equipment …etc. shall be effectively
bonded together.
D. Bonding shall apply at each end and all intervening raceways, boxes and enclosures between the service
equipment and the grounding bus bars.
E. Metallic pipe services for example, gas mains, water mains and dry risers when applicable shall be effectively
bonded to the main earthing terminal at their point of entry. Connections shall be made to the services with
purpose-made earthing clamps to BS 7671 Standards.
F. Where there is a lightning conductor system for the building or structure, it shall be effectively bonded to
the main earthing terminal in accordance with the requirements of IEC 62305 Standards. A suitable label
shall be provided adjacent to this bonding connection at the main earthing terminal indicating the purposed
of connection.
G. Steel framed structures or metallic cladding shall be effectively bonded to the main earthing terminal.
H. The cross-sectional area of all earthing, bonding and protective conductors shall comply with the
requirements of the IET wiring regulations. Except where detailed otherwise in this specification or on the
drawings all conductors for earthing shall be copper, manufactured in accordance with IEC, DIN/VDE
Standards for strip and IEC, DIN/VDE Standards for cables.
Page 81 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
I. Single-core cables forming part of the earthing system shall be of stranded copper, insulated to 450/750 V
standards with green/yellow PVC. These cables shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards table 1.
J. Mechanical joints between aluminium and copper shall have the joint faces lightly coated with an anti-
corrosion compound before the connection is made.
K. Where conduits, or glands for mineral insulated or armoured cables, terminate on switchgear, distribution
boards, motor control centre, starter panels or other apparatus, brass compression washers shall be used
to ensure an effective earth connection.
L. Where connections are made between sections of raceways then the manufacturer's earth continuity links
shall be installed across the joint. Connections made between raceways sections crossing a building
expansion joint shall be made with a flexible copper braid.
M. Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and securing with a minimum of two
screwed fixings. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be effectively bonded to the earthing system.
N. The armouring of plastic sheathed cables when applicable shall terminate in compression glands fitted with
purpose-made earth tags. A protective conductor shall connect the earth tag with the apparatus earthing
terminal. The earth tag shall be manufactured from a high conductivity material compatible with the cable
gland.
O. The armouring of metal sheathed cables when applicable shall be securely clamped to the gland at the cable
termination with a purpose-made bolted clamp.
P. A protective conductor shall be installed to connect the armour clamp or gland fixing bolts to the apparatus
earthing terminal.
Q. Metal sheaths and/or armouring of multi-core cables connected to a cubicle type switchgear when
applicable shall be effectively connected to the switchgear earth bar as described in later clauses.
R. Where any metal sheathed and/or armoured cables of rating in excess of 100A are terminated on an
"Industrial" type motor control centre, a separate protective conductor shall connect the sheath and/or
armouring to the motor control centre earthing terminal.
S. Where applicable metal sheathed and/or armoured multi-core cables of rating in excess of 100A are
terminated on a unit motor starter panel or local isolator, a separate protective conductor shall connect the
incoming and outgoing sheaths and/or armouring to the starter panel or isolator earthing terminal. The
motor frame shall be connected directly to the supply cable sheath and/or armouring of the starter panel
or local isolator, whichever is more convenient.
T. The earth terminal of all socket outlets shall be connected to the main protective conductor of the final sub-
circuit. Where applicable the protective conductor is formed by the metal sheath and/or armouring of
cables, the earth terminal of the socket outlet shall also be connected to an earth terminal in the box or
enclosure associated with the cable.
U. Connections between earth bars, equipment frames, etc, and stranded copper cables shall be made by
compression lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned
prior to connection.
Page 82 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
V. Connections between earth bars, equipment frames, etc, and copper strip shall be made with by bolt,
washers, nut and lock nut. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned prior to connection.
The washers shall be of sufficient size to prevent any distortion of the copper strip.
W. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third the width of the earth bar or strip. Where a larger
hole is required in an earth bar then connection shall be made to a copper flag welded to the bar. The weld
shall be tested for continuity.
X. Joints in copper strip shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting point of at least 600o C
or be welded using a molecular welding process such as furse "Thermoweld" or an equal alternative.
2.6 INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES
1.1.1 The test to be carried out shall include but not be necessarily limited to: -
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
2. Inspect anchorage.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform fall-of-potential or alternative test in accordance with IEEE Standard 81 on the

main grounding electrode or system.
2. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding
system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral
points.
C. Test Values
1. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground should be no greater
than two ohms for commercial or industrial systems and one ohm or less for generating or
transmission station grounds unless otherwise specified by the employer. (Reference IEEE
Standard 142)
Page 83 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Refer to list of recommended Manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions under which electrical earthing and bonding connections are to be made and notify
in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. The tests to be carried out in accordance to IET 17th. Edition, BS 7671, IEC 62305, BS 7430, TIA 607-B
and IEEE Standards.
C. Upon installation at site the earthing system should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory
to ensure that no damages have occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical earthing and bonding systems as indicated in accordance with instructions,
requirements of applicable standards (IET 17th. Edition, BS 7671, DIN/VDE, IEC 62305, IET, BS 7430, TIA
607-B and IEEE Standards), and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical earthing and bonding system work with
other work.
C. Earth the electrical installation including, but not limited to the following: system distribution, conduit
system for light and power, switchgear housings, cabinets, motor frames, housings of alarm and control
panels and associated devices, lighting fixtures, lightning protection system, emergency distribution
system, telephone system, fire alarm system, smoke detection system, communications and security
system, kitchens equipment, motor control centers, individual starters and other non-current carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment.
D. Wherever flexible metal conduit or cable are used for part of a raceway run, provide an earthing
conductor in the raceway or cable and connect to earthing bushings at each end of run.
E. Where pull boxes contain barriers, provide an earth lug in each section.
F. Install earthing conductors in all wiring where non-metallic conduit is used.
Page 84 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment earthing conductors with earthing lug, bus,
or bushing.
H. Tighten earthing and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.
I. Route earthing connections and conductors to earth and protective devices in shortest and straightest
paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
J. Make earth wires continuous without splices. Avoid soldered joints in any earth connection. Use
solder less type connectors, clamps, etc.
K. Earth interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductors connected to metallic raceway at each
end.
L. Earthing system for computer, all I.T racks and communication system shall be taken from the external
earthing network as indicated on the drawings and to be in accordance with TIA 607-B.
M. Apply corrosion-resistant finish to field-connections, buried metallic earthing and bonding products,
and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which are subjected to
corrosive action.
N. Where expansion fittings occur, provide internal code size earth conductor terminating in adjacent
pulling points with earthing bushings.
A. Weld earthing conductors to underground grounding electrodes.
B. Earthing each separately-derived system neutral to:
1. Effectively earthed metallic water pipe where applicable

2. Effectively earthed structural steel member.
3. Separate earthing electrode.
4. Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured & checked against specified
resistance.
5. Electrical continuity of all earthing & protective conductors including main & supplementary
equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.
Page 85 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal
parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, earthing conductor in raceways and cables,
receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing system.
C. The Contractor shall inspect and carry out tests on all the system and equipment earthing provisions
in accordance with the requirements of the IET Wiring Regulations.
D. The method of test and the selection of suitable test instruments shall conform to the guidelines given
in the IET Wiring Regulations, 16th. Edition.
E. These tests shall be carried out on all system and equipment earthing supplied, installed and connected
under this Contract.
F. Where an existing installation has been effectively extended in relation to the system and equipment
earthing provisions supplied under this Contract, the existing system and equipment earthing shall be
inspected and tested for compliance with the IET Wiring Regulations.
G. The Contractor shall inspect and re-test the system and equipment earthing provided under this
Contract thirty days prior to the end of the Defects Liability period. The Contractor shall give the
Employer's Authorized Representative seven days’ notice of his intent to carry out these tests.
Page 86 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
(General Requirements) apply to work of this section.
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, Section 260500, applies to work of this section.
C. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems, section 260548.
D. The requirements of this section apply to raceways specified elsewhere in this specification.
A. Work includes providing completely coordinated grounded raceway systems complete with boxes,
fittings, supports, anchors, sleeves, hangers, clamps, straps, seals, flexible connections to vibrating
equipment, accessories and cable trunking system as specified and as required for a complete
operational system. Conduit or tubing sizes referred to in the specifications and on the Drawings are
nominal internal diameters. Raceway is required for all wiring unless specifically indicated or specified
otherwise.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of cable trunking system, raceway systems,
boxes, fittings of types and sizes required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, SASO, VDE/DIN, IEC
61950, IEC 61084, IEEE, 80.3, BS 4607, IEC 61386-21 and BS 4568-1 standards pertaining to raceways,
boxes, fittings and cable trunking. Provide all metal raceways, boxes, accessories and cable trunking
products/components to be UL listed and labelled.
govern.
govern.
Page 87 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and installation
instructions for cable trunking system complete with all accessories and from each type of raceway,
boxes. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Samples: Submit 15cm length of exposed type surface raceways with required finish, in accordance
with requirements of Division 1. and Submit 50 cm length of cable trunking complete with its
accessories and fittings.
C. Shop Drawings for raceways: submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of
raceways, boxes and fitting including, but not limited to size of raceways, boxes and fittings elevations,
type and reference no.
D. Shop Drawings for cable trunking: Submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds
of cable trunking including, but not limited to, offsets and connections. Show accurately scaled cable
trunking with locations of supports and fittings, including fire stops and weather seals. Indicate spatial
relationship of cable trunkings to other associated equipment.
E. Compliance Sheet: Submit compliance sheet with the specs item by item, duly signed by the
1.5 WARRANTY
G. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
H. Warranty shall include:

use.
I. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
Page 88 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC): Full weight steel pipe hot dipped galvanized inside and outside, threaded,
minimum 20mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15mm for switch legs.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid intermediate grade, hot dipped galvanized outside,
threaded, minimum 20mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15mm for switch legs.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Thin wall steel, galvanized, thread less, minimum 20mm, unless
otherwise noted; minimum 15mm for switch legs.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit: Continuous length of specially wound interlocked, galvanized strip steel,
minimum 20mm.
E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Continuous length of flexible interlocked, galvanized inside and
outside steel tubing, with a continuous copper bonding conductor wound specially between the
convolution, coated with a liquid tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum 20mm
F. Polyvinyl Chloride Condui
1. Self-extinguishing and heavy gauge conduits and conduit fittings to meet
BS 4607, BS EN 61386-1 (classification code 4421) and BS7671 wiring regulations.
2.For concrete encasement.

3.For direct burial, Schedule 40 conduit.
4.Minimum 20mm for lighting and power wiring, minimum 25mm for each structured cabling
outlets installation
G. Wire ways: Galvanized steel / Stainless steel, minimum 1.5mm thickness, with screw-on covers,
raceway knockout, elbow fittings, hangers, wire retainers, and cabinet adapter; size as noted or
required
2.2 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES FOR RACEWAY
A. GENERAL
1. Accessories as required including, but not limited to, bushings, knockout closures, locknuts,
mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plasterboard
expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfil
installation requirements for individual wiring situation.
2. Die-cast fittings not permitted.
3. Earthing (grounding) Bushings: With lug suitable for the size and type of earthing (grounding)
conductor to be terminated.
B. RIGID STEEL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS
1. Steel or malleable iron, standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows.
2. Conductive type thread compounds to insure low resistance ground continuity through
conduit. Watertight couplings and connections in concrete.
3. Locknuts of the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of the
enclosure.
Page 89 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
4. Bushings of the metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked
into the metallic body of the fitting.
5. Corrosion resistant metallic conduit fittings.
6. Sealing fittings of the threaded cast iron type. Where sealing fittings are used to prevent
passage of water vapor, utilize the continuous drain type.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings: Steel or malleable iron concrete tight couplings and connectors of
the gland and ring compression type; set screw type connectors are permitted for interior dry
locations only, indent type connectors are not permitted.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Steel or malleable iron, insulated throat angle wedge type.
E. Surface Metal Raceway Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer to match integrity of raceway

system.
F. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit Fittings: As recommended by the manufacturer to match integrity of each
type of raceway system.
G. EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION COUPLINGS
1. Comply with approved applicable standards.
2. Accommodate 1.9cm deflection, expansion and contraction in any direction.
3. Allow 30-degree angular deflection.
4. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault
currents.
5. Watertight, seismically qualified corrosion resistant threaded and compatible with associated
conduit.
6. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber
material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
H. SUPPORTS
1. Zinc coated or equivalent.
Page 90 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. Conduit hangers, designed for the purpose and have pre-assembled closure bolt and nut and
provision for receiving hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers not less than 38cm x 38cm, 2,7mm thickness steel, cold
formed, dipped clamps. Hanger rods not less than 0.95 cm diameter steel.
4. Anchors of types, sizes and materials designed for the purpose.
2.3 OUTLET BOXES
A. OUTLET BOXES
1. PVC heavy gauge for embedded work, and galvanized cast iron or aluminium with threaded
hubs for exposed work; boxes of shapes, cubic inch capacity, and sizes as required, suitable
for installation at respective location.
2. With mounting holes and with cable and conduit size knockout openings.
3. With threaded screw holes, with corrosion resistant ridged cover and grounding screws for
fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment grounding.
4. For embedded work, utilize 10cm square or octagon outlet boxes, except as otherwise
required by construction devices or wiring and as follows:
a. Above ceiling: 3.8cm deep.
b. In ceiling or slab: 7.6cm deep.
c. In wall for fixtures: 7cm deep.
d. In wall for receptacles and switches: 3.8cm deep.
e. With raised covers and fixture studs where required.
f. Back-to-back boxes type not permitted.
g. Gang able type boxes are not permitted.
h. For installation of more than two devices in a common outlet box, utilize boxes and device
rings manufactured specifically for this purpose.
Page 91 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
i. Outlet box device rings used to be of sufficient depth so as to make the use of extension
boxes and rings unnecessary.
5. For exposed work utilize 10cm round x 5cm deep for mounting on ceilings and 10cm square x
5cm deep for mounting on walls, except as otherwise required by construction, devices, or
wiring.
6. Provide blank covers for outlet boxes without devices. Covers to match adjacent plates.
2.4 WIRING TROUGHS, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Heavy gauge PVC, galvanized sheet steel with screw-on covers for interior work, and galvanized cast
iron and/or 2.7mm thickness stainless steel with threaded hubs, gaskets for outdoors and damp
locations; boxes of shapes, cubic cm capacity, and sizes as required, suitable for installation at
respectable location.
B. Insulated cable supports.
2.5 CABLE TRUNKING
A. GENERAL
1. Trunking and connectors shall be manufactured generally in accordance with DIN/VDE.
2. Trunking and connectors for internal use shall be finished with protection in accordance
with DIN/VDE.
3. Lengths of trunking shall be efficiently bonded to each other using strip copper links not
less than 12 mm wide x 1.5 mm thick and fixed with brass nuts, bolts and asked serrated
washers.
4. Lids shall be lipped and fixed at intervals not exceeding 1 meter by means of quick release
can fasteners. Steel screws and fasteners shall be protected against corrosion by a finish at
least equivalent to zinc coating to DIN/VDE.
5. Metal partitions in trunking shall be a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm and the finish shall be
of the same standard as the trunking. The method of fixing partitions to the trunking shall
not cause long term corrosion or electrolytic action and shall be such that the partitions
cannot be inadvertently displaced.
Page 92 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
6. Connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking and shall be designed
so that the trunking sections mate with butting joints.
7. Vertical trunking shall be supplied with a cable support unit with insulated pins at intervals
not exceeding 3 meters.
8. Horizontal trunking sizes exceeding 100 mm x 50 mm shall be supplied with cable

separators with insulated pins at intervals not exceeding 2 meters.
9. Trunking shall consist of base, Snap-On covers, coupling end plates, wall flanges, panel to
trunking rubber grommet, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and all necessary hangers supports
and accessories.
10. Trunking shall be constructed of steel sheet with a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm. All steel
units shall be hot dip-galvanized after fabrication, for light current network the trucking
shall be electro-static paint.
11. All trunking parts shall be mechanically and electrically coupled while protecting wires from
abrasion.
B. Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the finish shall be made good. All burrs and
rough edges shall be removed. Where any corrosion has occurred it shall be removed and the area
treated with a rust- proofing agent. After this it shall be treated by the application of either a zinc
rich epoxy primer or equal alternative followed by a coat of colour matching paint.
C. Any fixing used for securing or fitting shall not cause any long term corrosion or electrolytic action
- black japanned fixing screws shall not be used. Where brackets are used they shall be constructed
of mild steel angle or channel iron finished to the same standard as the trunking.
D. Connections to conduit, multiple box, switchgear and distribution boards shall be made with
flanged units.
E. Where trunking crosses settlement and expansion joints a trunking joints shall be made. The
connector at this point shall be made with slotted fixing holes to permit a movement of 10 mm in
both the horizontal and vertical planes. The earth continuity links across such joints shall be of
braided copper tape not less than 15 mm wide x 2 mm thick having a resistance from fixing to fixing
equal to or less than the links used for the standard trunking joints.
The braid shall be long enough to allow for the maximum movement of the trunking. The braid ends
shall be folded, and sweated soiled.
F. The trunking system could be used for lighting and socket circuits in plenum areas with LSHF
wires, except the life safety circuits which shall be installed in separate metallic conduits. Size of the
trunking system shall be as approved by the consultant in the shop dwg’s.
B. Refer to list of recommended Manufacturers.
Page 93 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings are to be installed and
substrate which will support raceways. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Examine conditions under which cable trunkings are to be installed. Notify Engineer in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
3.2. INSTALLATION FOR RACEWAYS
A. GENERAL
1. Install raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s
written installation instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves
intended function.
2. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways, boxes, and components

with other work. Run raceways concealed, except as noted.
3. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways for conductors to form
continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide
electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly. Maintain grounding continuity of interrupted
metallic raceways with ground conductor.
4. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where
dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before
assembling.
5. Support raceways by means of ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, wall brackets with back spacer,
structural steel angles or channels. Support riser raceways at each floor. Secure raceways to
supports with pipe straps or U-bolts. Space supports as per applicable electrical code and per
manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Mount supports to structure with toggle bolts on hollow masonry, expansion shields or inserts on
concrete and brick, machine screws on metal, wood screws on wood. Nails, raw plugs, wood,
and/or plastic plugs are not permitted.
7. Keep raceways clear of motor foundations and boilers. Also, do not obstruct headroom,
doorways, or walkways, with raceway.
Page 94 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
8. Do not install conduit in terrazzo floors.
9. Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings, and
plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application.
10. Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment furnished by equipment supplier.
Set conduit and boxes for connection to equipment only after receiving dimensioned drawings
from equipment installer and after checking location with other trades.
11. Test conduits required to be installed, but left empty, with ball mandrel. Clear any conduit which
rejects ball mandrel.
12. Provide long radius bends for empty raceway systems where required to satisfy the system cabling
requirements.
13. Install complete raceway runs before pulling in wire or cable. Install raceways so that required
conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain to raceway or cable. Where
raceway size is not indicated, follow applicable code.
14. Keep end of raceways plugged or capped during construction.
15. For empty raceways over 3m long, provide fish or pull wire. For 3.8cm and larger pull wire to
consist of steel core nylon rope and terminal ball.
16. Remove damaged or deformed raceways.
17. Do not support branch circuit conduits by the suspended ceiling or its supporting members,
lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or air conditioning ducts.
18. Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings. Avoid present and future
openings in floor, wall or ceiling construction, when so indicated on drawings.
19. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 45cm from parallel runs of fuels or boiler breaching and
15cm from hot water pipes or other sources of heat. Wherever possible, install horizontal
raceway runs above water and steam piping. Provide thermal insulation where these separations
cannot be maintained.
20. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
21. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where required, use
3-piece union or split coupling.
22. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.
Page 95 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
23. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical
wiring.
24. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 150 mm separation.
25. Do not install aluminum products in concrete. Plug and seal conduit interconnections.
26. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.
27. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached or
solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
28. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage.
29. Set boxes square and true with the building finish. Secure boxes to the building structure and
adequately support all boxes during construction to prevent movement.
30. Verify outlet locations in finished spaces with Architectural Drawings or Interior Design drawings,
details and finishes. Take caution in locating outlet to allow for overhead pipes, ducts, and
variations in arrangement, thickness in finish, window trim and other Architectural Construction
Details.
31. Correct any inaccuracy in locating outlets without additional expense to the Owner. Refer to
Architect any condition that would place an outlet box in an unsuitable location, such as a
molding, break glass in wall finish, or behind a heating enclosure.
32. Mount outlet boxes for similar equipment at uniform height within same or similar areas. Where
mounting height or location of outlets is not shown or specified, mount outlet as best suited for
equipment connected thereto, or as directed.
33. Provide barriers between switches connected to different phases.
34. Except where special outlets are required, provide 10cm square wall outlets with single gang
raised cover and bushed plate for signaling systems.
35. In cold rooms, walk-in refrigeration boxes, etc., when applicable weatherproof raceway
installations and use sealing fittings and compounds as entries.
36. For conduit or cable tray runs exposed inside the building, mark (stencil 3 M on centers, including
in hung ceiling, with the notation, "Danger, Volts," indicating the actual voltage (i.e. "Danger
13,800 Volts," "Danger 400 Volts").
Page 96 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
37. Install conduits located underground beyond the building as follows:
a. With a minimum of 60 cm top cover, above the conduits, and sloped away from the
building.
b. Placed over well tamped trench bottom and on concrete block 1.5 M on center. Anchor
conduits to prevent their movement. Stagger conduit joints a minimum of 15 cm apart.
Make all joints watertight.
c. With a minimum clear separation between the electric and telephone conduits of 30 cm
of well tamped earth or 15 cm of concrete.
38. For conduits and direct burial cable entering the building and for the manholes preceding the
conduits entry to the building, when applicable perform the following:
a. Plug all empty raceways.
b. Enter through floor or wall entrance fittings. For the entrance fittings utilize a gland
assembly cable of provide seal around the conduit or cable to withstand 15M head of
water without leakage.
c. Slope away from building.
d. In lieu of wall entrance fittings through floor or wall, 2.5 mm metal plates may be utilized
subject to the following:
1) Plate extends a minimum of 100mm from raceway in every direction.
2) Plate is welded to raceways forming a watertight seal.
3) Raceways are not damaged.
39. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to avoid damaging
them.
40. Provide weather-tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.
41. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. Coordinate trim with type of finish,
i.e., tile, carpet, etc.
Page 97 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. For all vibrating equipment adjacent or above acoustically treated areas, provide the following:
1. Flexible conduit at the entries, exits, and outlets.
2. Sealing fittings with compound at the entries and exits.
3. Supports of rubber-in-shear ceiling hangers.
4. Expansion fittings at isolating slab joints.
5. Rubber gasketed recessed outlets.
6. Back plaster recessed outlets.
7. Free-standing equipment with vibration isolators.
Page 98 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
1. Use rigid steel conduit for underground installation, in wet or damp locations, for exposed
runs on the exterior of the building, in concrete slabs, for all feeder conduits, in electro-
mechanical equipment spaces, and as noted.
2. Where conduit is directly buried, provide two coats of polyurethane. Dry thoroughly between
coats and before backfilling.
3. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5mm with concrete
envelope with walls not less than 8cm thick.
D. ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
1. Use electrical metallic tubing for branch circuits in dry locations (hung ceilings, hollow block
walls, plenum areas, electrical equipment spaces and furred spaces) and where in accordance
with all applicable codes, authorities, etc.
2. EMT is not permitted to be used in mechanical equipment spaces and where subject to
moisture, dampness ...etc.
E. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
1. Use flexible steel conduit with an internal earth (ground) connection for short connections
where rigid conduit or tubing is impracticable and for final connections to vibrating
equipment.
2. Provide a minimum length of 46cm with slack. Connect the earth (ground) conductor to the
enclosure or raceway at each end.
F. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
1. For damp and wet conditions.
2. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to motor terminal boxes,
transformers and other vibrating equipment.
3. Provide a minimum length of 45cm with slack. Connect the ground conductor to the
enclosure or raceway at each end.
G. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC)
Page 99 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Use in or below slabs for service entrance conductors for lighting system and telephone
service and only as otherwise indicated. Provide separate earthing (ground) wire.
2. Cut ends square, ream smooth, wipe clean, apply approved solvent cement and quarter turn
as drawing up tight in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.
3. Convert to steel conduit using adapters when entering the building from underground
locations.
4. Maintain a 1M minimum clearance of PVC conduits from hot water and steam lines, when
applicable.
5. Where located under building, parking lot, and roadways, concrete encase conduit for all runs
above 50mm, when applicable.
6. Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be of the same manufacture to provide a consistent
system with compatible appearance. The use of alternative designs and different
manufacturer's products will not be permitted.
7. All conduit joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacture's installation
recommendations using a solvent adhesive recommended by the maker of the conduit. All
such joints shall be watertight.
The same conditions shall apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. The
dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is expressly forbidden. Before joints are
made, conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed. Care
should be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all faces of conduits
and accessories prior to jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts and butted
into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes.
8. Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for on the drawings or when
the PVC conduit is to be connected to metal equipment, conduit and fittings with screwed
entries. Where such entries are not available, non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be
used.
9. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints or where there are changes of temperature
in excess of 25oC, flexibility of the conduit to cope with the associated movement shall be
achieved by a method approved by the manufacture of the conduit.
10. All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25 mm and below may
be set cold but all larger sizes shall be set hot. A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any
other operation. The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 time the outside
diameter of the conduit. Naked flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending
purposes. The use of conduit bends having factures and conduits with any wrinkles on formed
bends is not permitted.
Page 100 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
11. Concealed conduit and accessories shall be securely fixed before any operations involving
casting, concrete pouring, screed laying and plastering. Fixing shall be by means purpose
made clips which shall not cause deformation of the conduit. Fixings shall be used at regular
intervals not exceeding 1.5 meters and the distance of clips on each side of bends or
accessories shall not exceed 150 mm.
12. A protective conductor of not less than 2.5 mm2 with green and yellow insulation shall be
installed throughout, sufficiently long to allow looping in and of fittings and accessories.
Where expansion couplers are used allowance shall be made in the length of the protective
conductor to accommodate any expansion.
13. Where luminaries are to be connected to a ceiling conduit system, metal conduit boxes shall
be used. Fittings may not be hung from the PVC conduit system and full details of the means
of support shall be shown on the Co-ordination and Builders Work Drawings.
14. Where a number of conduits converge, large adaptable PVC boxes shall be employed to avoid
the conduits crossing. Conduits shall be connected to the boxes by means of male bushes and
couplers.
15. Different colors shall be applied for conduits of different systems.
H. Provide expansion-deflection fittings at expansion joints and on length of runs in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize expansion - deflection fittings of size as required complete
with bonding jumper.
I. For Hazardous Locations
1. Utilize rigid steel only, unless otherwise noted.
2. Install approved sealing fittings to prevent passage of explosive vapors as required by the
applicable electrical codes.
J. For Wet, Damp, or Moist Locations
1. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm
to cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, air conditioned spaces, or similar spaces.
3.3. INSTALLATION FOR CABLE TRUNKING
A. Install cable trunking and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable standards and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of cable trunking work with other works.
Page 101 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Install integral fire stops where cable trunking penetrates fire-rated walls and floors. Seal between
cable trunking and opening and around opening with fire-rated sealant not less than wall, or floor,
fire ratings.
D. At floor openings provide concrete curb, 10 cm wide and 10cm high, around cable trunking and seal
with non-combustible material.
E. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for cable trunking Tighten
connections to comply with tightening torques specified by manufacturers to assure permanent and
effective connections and grounds.
F. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures are permanently
and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper mounting.
G. Route cable trunking as required and make final field measurements before ordering cable trunking.
H. Where there is insufficient elevation or lateral change in direction to accommodate fittings directly
connected, adjustable vertical connectors or adjustable horizontal connectors with straight section in
between may be used. Avoid slopes that would cause cable to bend on smaller radii; than that
allowed by cable manufacturer.
I. Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting cable trunking as
required.
3.4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, perform continuity tests by testing the resistance of all
feeder conduits from the service to the point of their final distribution using 1 conductor return. Limit
the maximum resistance to 25 ohms. When possible, field-correct malfunctioning equipment, then
retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected, at
no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Prior to installing cables in cable trunking, test for electrical continuity of bonding, and earthing
connections, and to demonstrate compliance with grounding requirements.
C. Electrically energize cable trunking systems and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
Page 102 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260536
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, Section 260500, applies to work of this Section.
C. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless
specified to the contrary.
D. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems, section 260548.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete
and make ready for operation by the Owner, all cable trays shall be in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable trays of the types and capacities
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,SASO, BS EN 1461, IEEE
and IEC 61537 Standards pertaining to cable trays. Provide cable trays products and components
which have been listed and labeled.
govern.
govern.
Page 103 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for cable trays.
B. Samples: Submit 30 cm length of each size of cable tray complete with its accessories and fittings.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of cable trays
including, but not limited to, offsets and connections. Show accurately scaled cable trays with
locations of supports and fittings, including fire stops and weather seals. Indicate relationship of cable
trays to other associated equipment.
E. Third party test certificates.
F. Factory tests.
1.5 WARRANTY
J. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
K. Warranty shall include:

use.
L. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Page 104 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.1 CABLE TRAY
A. General
1. A complete cable support system with all required straight sections, fittings, connectors and
accessories.
2. All trays and system components as defined by and in conformance with approved Standards or
latest applicable revisions.
3. Cable Support System:
a) Exposed non-plenum rated areas; ladder type.
b) Width as required or as shown on the drawings; radius of fittings, 60cm minimum for wiring
95mm² and larger; 45cm for wiring 70mm² and smaller or as shown on the drawings.
4. Fittings such as elbows, tees, crosses, etc., with a tangent, or straight section beyond the
curvature to accept one type of universal splice plate to simplify field erections.
5. Usable Minimum Clear Loading Depth: 8 cm.
6. Straight Sections: 3.7 - 4 meters in length.
7. Cable Support System: Aluminum: 6063T6 alloy for extruded parts and 5052 alloy for parts
fabricated from sheet.
8. Cable trays shall meet class C requirements for perforation free area as per IEC 61537 as a
minimum.
9. The galvanization thickness will be 60-70 micron.
10. Cable trays shall be perforated type and manufactured from mild steel and to be galvanized after
fabrication the galvanization must be hot dip galvanized.
11. Minimum thickness of cable trays shall be 1.5 mm thickness for cable tray 30 cm width and below
and shall be 2mm thickness for 40 cm width and above.
12. Cable trays shall be manufactured with plain return flanges
Page 105 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
13. Adequate supports shall be provided to prevent stress on cables where they enter or leave the
tray. Where cable trays extend transversely through partitions and walls additional protection in
the form of fire-proof non-combustible barriers shall be provided.
14. All cables shall be fastened securely by purpose made straps or saddles to the cable trays.
15. Cable trays shall be connected by means of flexible tinned straps to the nearest bare earthing
conductors and at maximum of 30 meters spacing.
16. Cable trays must be specially reinforced to have high loadbearing capabilities across wide spans,
maximum deflection should not exceed 0.5% in the longest span. Also it shall be mechanically
designed to give high torsional rigidity and good resistance against lateral loading.
17. Where the supported cables run in either a vertical or horizontal direction, manufactured bends
or sets shall be provided in order that a continuous cable tray be provided throughout the length
or run.
18. Bends in either vertical or horizontal directions should be dimensioned such that cables may not
be curved less than 15 times its diameter.
19. Perforate-type cable tray shall be used above the suspended ceiling. It shall be manufactured
from mild steel, finished hot-dip galvanized with a 20 mm return flange on both edges. Edge
height 80 mm.
20. All components and accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized steel after manufacture to give
resistance to corrosion.
21. Same typical details of trays, ladder and perforated type are shown in the drawings.
22. Cable tray width shall be chosen according to the number and diameter of cables laid on the tray.
all feeders and sub feeders shall be laid such that their outer radius are spaced a distance equal
to the diameter of the largest cable.
23. All Cable trays/ladders installed in mechanical rooms, parking areas, un-covered areas and on roof
shall be covered with cover.
B. Safety factor
1. Cable Tray at 2.5 meters Span: Capable of sustaining a working (allowable) load of 68 kg per linear
30 cm with a safety factor of 2, when tested as a simple beam and in accordance with approved
load test method; test specimen to be a single section of cable tray.
Page 106 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. In addition to and concurrent with the above working load, a 90 kg concentrated load applied at
mid span to result in no permanent deformation of the tray.
3. Design to be such that all like parts are interchangeable and that trays may be readily assembled
and joined without the use of special tools.
C. Fittings: at least the same thickness and cross sectional area of side members and (rungs, bottom) as
straight sections.
D. Connectors: High pressure rigid plate type connected by ribbed-neck or square-neck plated steel bolts
and free-spinning lock type nuts not requiring a washer; ribbed-neck or square-neck portion of bolt
to grip the tray side member and connector plate metal to prevent bolt from rotating during
tightening of nut.
E. Where necessary, provide expansion guides and connectors per manufacturer's thermal contraction
and expansion table; install fixed hold down clamps approximately midway between expansion
connectors; install expansion guides at all other support locations to allow thermally induced
movement of the tray.
F. Resistance of the connection between adjacent sections of cable trays: not more than 0.00033 ohms;
use bonding jumpers of suitable ampacity at all expansion connections and at all adjustable points.
G. Ladder type tray sections
1. Ladder-type cable tray shall be used to support heavy cabling as indicated on the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer. The tray shall be designed ladder-like, offering free circulation of air
around cable and minimum moisture and dust-gathering surfaces. Rungs shall be welded to the
ladder profiles. Rung width shall not be less than 30 mm.
2. Cables are to be prevented from falling down the ladder system by 50 mm height edges along the
whole length of the ladder.
3. Rungs (transverse members) assembled to the side rails by welding to insure integrity of fault
ground path for the life of the system and maximum structural capability; non-welded joining of
rungs to side rails are not acceptable.
4. Cable ladder shall be manufactured from hot dip mild steel and galvanized after fabrication.
5. Cable ladder shall meet class Y requirements for free base area as per IEC 61537 as a minimum.
6. The ladder thickness should not be less than 2 mm.
Page 107 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
7. Bearing Surface of Transverse Members: Minimum of 2 cm.
H. All cable trays shall be heavy duty type unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Examine conditions under which cable trays are to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
Page 108 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable trays and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
requirements of applicable standards and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure
that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of cable trays work with other work.
C. Install integral fire stops where cable trays penetrates fire-rated walls and floors. Seal between cable
trays and opening and around opening with fire-rated sealant not less than wall, or floor, fire ratings.
D. At floor openings provide concrete curb, 10 cm wide and 10 cm high, around cable trays and seal with
non-combustible material.
E. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing (grounding) connections for cable trays. Tighten
connections to comply with tightening torques specified by manufacturers to assure permanent and
effective connections and grounds.
F. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures are permanently
and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper mounting.
G. Route cable trays as required and make final field measurements before ordering cable tray.
H. Where there is insufficient elevation or lateral change in direction to accommodate fittings directly
connected, adjustable vertical connectors or adjustable horizontal connectors with straight section in
between may be used. Avoid slopes that would cause cable to bend on smaller radii; than that allowed
by cable manufacturer.
I. Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting cable tray as required.
A. Prior to installing cables in cable trays, test for electrical continuity of bonding, and earthing
connections, and to demonstrate compliance with earthing requirements.
B. Electrically energize cable tray systems and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
Page 109 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260543
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, section 260500, applies to work of this Section.
D. Low voltage electrical power conductors and cables, section 260519.
E. Medium voltage cables, section 260513.
F. Communications Backbone Cabling, section 271305.
G. Cast-in-Place Concrete, section 033000.
A. This specification covers the requirements for concrete encased duct banks, electrical / light current
manholes and hand-holes.
B. Work includes providing all materials, micro-duct for Telecommunication System ABF cables, duct
trenches, equipment foundations, bases supports, ducts, and duct banks, manholes, hand holes
and earth pits, chases, holes, sleeves, boxes, fittings, supports, anchors, hangers, straps, clamps,
bolts, brackets and accessories and as required for complete operative system. Raceway is required
for all wiring unless specifically indicated otherwise.
C. Any item of equipment or material not specifically addressed on the related drawings or in this
document, and which is necessary to provide a complete and functional installation should be
provided in a level of quality which is consistent with other specified items.
Page 110 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. The work covered by these specifications includes installations, all labor necessary, all materials and
equipment incorporated in such installation all services, facilities, tools to perform and complete
such installation and coordination among all trades.
E. The contractor has full responsibility for performing complete site survey before bidding in order to
confirm system compatibility with actual site conditions.
Page 111 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wires, cables, and connections of types,
sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with the latest editions of the requirements of applicable local
codes, and the following standards: -
1. Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and BS 3506 Standards.
2. The institute of electrical and electronic engineers, Inc. (IEEE).
3. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI).
4. International organization for standardization (ISO).
5. TIA 942-A: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers.
6. TIA-568.0-D: Generic telecommunication cabling for customer premises.
7. TIA-568.1-D: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
8. TIA-568.2-D: Balanced Twisted pair telecommunication cabling and components standards.
9. TIA-568.3-D: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
10. TIA-569-D: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
11. TIA-606-B: Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure
12. TIA-607-C: Telecommunications Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding for Customer Premises.
13. ITU-G 984.x Gigabit-Capable Passive Optical Network (GPON), Class B+ or C+.
14. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 800 series.
15. ITU-T, International Telecommunications Union–Telecommunications Sector.
16. TIA/EIA-TSB72, Centralize Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines.
17. ITU – TG.652D Single mode optical fiber cable characteristics.
18. IEC 60794- 1/3/5 & IEC 61753-1.
19. EIA / TIA-568-A commercial building telecommunications cabling standard.
Page 112 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
20. EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for Telecommunications infrastructure of commercial
buildings.
21. EIA/TIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bounding Requirements for

Telecommunications.
22. IEEE 802.3, Ethernet Standards.
23. ISO/IEC11801:2002 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises Standard.
24. Telecommunication installation guidelines should comply with the requirements of project
operator & service provider.
25. ASTM D 3350 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials.
26. ASTM D 2774 – Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure
Piping, ASTM D 2103, ASTM D 882, ASTM D 882-75B, ASTM D 1709A, ASTM D 1922 and
ASTM D 2103-86.
27. EIA/TIA-570, Residential and Commercial Telecommunications Warning Standard.
28. EIA/TIA-TSB 67: Transmission performance specifications for field testing of unshielded
twisted –pair cabling systems.
29. EIA/TIA – TSB 72 Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guide Lines.
30. IEEE 802.3, Ethernet Standards.
31. Telecommunication installation guidelines should comply with the requirements of SASO &
service provider requirements.
32. ASTM C 33-Concrete Aggregates.
33. ASTM D 1557 - Compaction Density Test.
34. ASTM D 1785 - PVC Plastic Pipes.
35. SASO 14 -Standard for UPVC Pressure Pipes.
36. ASTM D 3350 - Class PE 345434C (Designated as PE 3408)
37. DIN 8074, 8075 HDPE Sub – Duct and Mini Duct.
38. DIN 8062.
Page 113 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
39. ISO 161-1.
govern.
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to verify compliance of the main equipment with the
B. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation from the certifying manufacturer
showing the project is registered and qualified for the System Assurance Warranty. All subsequent
work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
C. The Supplier’s BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) supervisor shall
review, approve and stamp all documents prior to submitting. The Supplier’s RCDD shall warrant
in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein upon completion
of all work.
D. Submit Detailed Bill of Materials indicating Part Numbers, Description and Country of Origin for
the proposed system.
E. Technical study on which the proposed BOQ & Material List are submitted.
F. Country of origin, tech. support office location, warranty and required certificates shall be
submitted.
G. Product Data: Submit detailed original catalogue for the proposed manufacturer marked up with
all of the proposed Equipment, Cables & Accessories.
H. Riser Diagram: Submit detailed riser diagram to indicate the connection between all of system
components, the interface with all other system, and products part number.
I. Submit Complete Sample Board for the proposed conduits, ducts, sub-ducts and Micro duct and all
related accessories. Submit 50 cm length from each size of each sample type indicating the
Manufacturer Name, part no … etc.
J. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings, shop drawings
to consider the following:
i. Legend for all used symbols.

ii. Dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and locations.
Page 114 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
iii. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish
between factory and field wiring.
iv. Signed Coordination table, reference of approved material and design drawings shall be
clearly provided on shop drawings.
K. Compliance List: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this specification.
Compliance sheet to be submitted in Table Format (Itemized) where the proposed system does not
comply or accomplish the stated function or specification in a manner different from that described
and specified, a full description of the deviation shall be provided. Where a full description is not
provided it shall be assumed that the proposed system does not comply with the requirements in
the specification. The Compliance Statement should be duly signed by the manufacturer /
manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.
L. Submit the Certification of the proposed supplier indicating that the supplier is a current partner
for the proposed manufacturer.
M. Submit Valid Certification for the Design & Installation Team.
N. Submit the manufacturer typical installation details / guidelines.
O. The contractor should ensure compatibility of sizing between the proposed ABF systems
components and implemented civil works (micro ducts, manholes, cabinet holes etc.).
1.5 WARRANTY
M. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
N. Warranty shall include:

use.
O. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
Page 115 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UPVC DUCTS
A. The UPVC ducts shall be schedule 40 UPVC high impact un plasticized polyvinyl chloride and shall
meet BS 3506 - class B specifications, supplied in standard 6m length one end of each length
tapered.
B. Conduit shall be suitable for installations which require encased or exposed applications, corrosive
and/or wet locations, and where low impedance conduit is preferred.
C. Material shall have tensile strength of 48.2 MPa at 23°C, flexural strength of 75.8 MPa and
compressive strength of 59.3 MPa.
D. All ducts to be provided with galvanized steel pull wires.
2.2 UPVC DUCT FITTINGS AND ACCSSORIES
A. Rigid U PVC opaque solvent welded type couplings, bell end fittings, plugs, caps, adaptors,
spacers as required to make complete installation.
B. Expansion joints.
C. Rigid UPVC 5-degree angle couplings.
D. All un-terminated ducts to be capped.
E. Duct Supports: Rigid UPVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete cover
depths indicated, while supporting ducts during concreting.
F. Duct Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to cable
insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 1 deg C. Capable of withstanding temperature
of 149 deg C without slump and of adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits,
conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and
common metals.
2.3 CABLE RACKS
A. Cable racks and supports manufactured from ASTM A-36 steel and hot dipped galvanized as per
ASTM A-123 and A-153, heavy duty underground type.
B. 12 mm x 100 mm galvanized steel inserts for rack mounting.
C. Cable racks are galvanized steel channels and shall be used to support the cable rack hooks. They
shall be mounted on the cable rack supports as well as flush to the manhole wall.
Page 116 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.4 CABLE RACK SUPPORTS
A. Cable rack supports shall be used to mount cable racks away from the manholes walls. The
supports are “L” shaped galvanized steel straps and are used to support the cable racks. at each
end of the racking bays.
2.5 CABLE RACK HOOKS
A. Cable rack hooks are formed steel hooks with a smooth surface, that attach to the cable racks and
shall be used to support the cables and splices inside the manholes and hand holes.
2.6 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. Concrete inserts shall be fastened to the formwork of the manhole and will be permanently
imbedded in concrete during manhole construction. The inserts shall accept threaded
galvanized steel machine bolts to fasten cable rack supports, flush mounted cable racks, or
bonding ribbon fasteners or any other structural hardware to the manhole and hand hole walls.
2.7 BONDING RIBBON
A. Bonding ribbon shall be placed in all communication manholes and hand holes and will be
attached to the walls via the concrete inserts. All cables sheaths shall be bonded to this bonding
ribbon in each structure.
2.8 CABLE PULLING EQUIPMENT
A. Pulling iron: Hot-dip galvanized 7/8 inch formed steel rods, shape as indicated, integrally cast
in concrete.
B. Pull rope: 6 mm stranded nylon, tensile strength 5 kN, continuous throughout each duct run with
3 m spare rope at each end.
2.9 MANHOLES / HANDHOLES
A. Constructed of 32 Newton/mm2 (4,000 psi), in 28 days, concrete with steel reinforcement and
chimneys where indicated or required. Each manhole shall have sufficient depth to accommodate
required grading of ducts, as well as maintaining minimum distance of 22 cm from bottom of lowest
duct centerline entering manhole to finished floor line and/or top duct to roof of manhole.
Manhole shall be built on, or placed over, a 150mm layer of well tamped gravel and 50mm mud
slab. Prior to installation, a 2.5mm base membrane polyurethane membrane is to be installed (See
subsequent Paragraph B).
Minimum overall sizes and details as indicated on the drawings & as approved on the shop
drawings.
Page 117 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. All manholes/ hand holes shall be watertight and furnished with sump pits. Floor shall be graded
in order to accommodate draining to pit. Outside surfaces of manhole and pull boxes shall be
coated with an approved polyurethane water-proofing coating of 1.8 mm minimum thickness (all
sides and roof). Care shall be taken to assure bonding of side coating with base membrane.
C. Bolted and Gasketed Manhole Frames and Covers: Cast iron of indicated size. Set frame and cover
to final grade as indicated or required. Fully coordinate with the civil and landscape details.
D. Duct envelopes and conduit shall enter manholes and pull boxes at right angles to box wall.
E. Cables shall be well supported on walls by cable racks, attached to the wall with hot dipped
galvanized machine bolts and stainless steel inserts, and equipped with adjustable rack arms and
insulators. At least two cable racks shall be installed and/or as scheduled on drawings, with not less
than two spare rack arms on each cable rack. Insulators not required on spare rack arms.
F. Bolt or studs imbedded in concrete for cable rack mounting are not acceptable.
G. Install pulling eye irons imbedded in walls opposite each duct entrance plus the floor, and securely
fastened to the manhole reinforcing rods before concrete is poured.
H. All hardware used in the manhole shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
I. In manholes and pull boxes, bond to "Z" bar ground bus with 35 mm2 bare copper ground all metal
non-current carrying parts, e.g., cable racks, frames, bushings, etc.
J. Manhole covers shall be manufactured from ductile iron components to BS 2789/ISO 1083 and to
be non-slip surface pattern.
Manhole frames shall be manufactured from grey iron components to BS 1452/ISO 185 and shall
be equipped with "I" beam design profile to provide a robust and rigid frame.
The frames and covers shall withstand loads not less than (400KN), as be set to final grade as
required.
Covers shall be equipped with lifting handles and stainless steel spring assist lifting enabling one-
person operation and integrated with hold open safety bars.
The manhole frames & covers shall be watertight.
The word "Light Current manhole" or "Power manhole", as appropriate shall be cast on the upper
side of each cover.
Page 118 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.10 MICRO-DUCTS AND MICR SUB-DUCTS
A. All ducts, sub-ducts, micro-ducts and accessories (e.g. couplers, connectors…etc.) are direct buried.
B. The main ducts shall be constructed of polymeric material PE, which are light-weight, flexible,
corrosion resistant and non-conductive.
C. All micro-ducts and micro sub-ducts should be able to withstand 10 bars.
D. Ducts size shall be as indicated on drawings.
E. Maintain clearance from other utilities as per local regulations. A minimum of 500 mm is allowed
when running parallel with other services and 250 mm when crossing at right angles.
F. Duct banks should be honed (or covered with 150 mm) in concrete at road crossings.
G. The main ducts shall be suitable with man-holes/hand-holes' openings and shall be multiway to
accommodate micro-ducts.
H. Temperature Range:
- Storage/Transport -40 to +60°C

- Installation -20 to +60°C
- Operation -40 to +60°C
I. All unused Micro ducts must be sealed with end-caps.

J. The micro ducts shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in colour opacity, density
and other properties. The inside and outside surface shall be free of visible cracks, holes, blisters, foreign
inclusion or other deleterious effect accordance to ASTM F2160 or equivalent or better standard.
K. The bundled products should be free from defects. Inner ducts should not be adhered to or fused to the
sheath. Inner ducts should be completely free once the outer sheath is removed.
L. The micro ducts shall be capable of being bent 180° over a mandrel (mandrel diameter shall be equal to
or less than 20 times diameter of the micro ducts) and shall be able to be straighten without any
buckling, kinking or permanent ovalization accordance to IEC 60794-5 or equivalent standards.
M. The coextruded layer on the inner wall of the micro ducts for reducing frictional resistance shall be
permitted. Coextruded layer material shall be compatible with the conduit and any cable jacketing.
N. Inner micro ducts shall be compatible with the fiber optic cable installed within.
Page 119 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
O. The outer sheath shall be easily removed and no further fettling should be necessary to prepare the
inner ducts for jointing.
P. Marking on the micro-ducts shall be legible and a colour that contrast with the colour of the micro ducts.
Q. The outer sheath shall be inkjet printed with marking every meter interval throughout the entire length
of the cable.
R. The markings shall be durable and easily legible under normal handling, storage and be resistant to
abrasion encountered during micro ducts placement.
S. The contractor shall coordinate with the contractor(s) of Infrastructure Telecom cabling system to
gurantee that
T. The ABF outdoor cables of for the infrastructure works shall be pulled inside HDPE outdoor thin-walled
micro-duct with the following sizes:
1. 7 Way , 20mm/16mm (outer diameter/inner diameter) to accommodate ABF cables from 12

core to 288 core.
2. 4 way, 7mm/3.5mm (outer diameter/inner diameter) to accommodate 4 core ABF cables.
3. 2 way, (7mm/3.5mm (outer diameter/inner diameter) to accommodate 4 core ABF cables.
4. 24 way, (7mm/3.5mm (outer diameter/inner diameter) to accommodate 4 core ABF cables.
U. The micro-duct material shall be high-density polyethylene (HDPE) and it shall be smooth inside &
outside surface, free of blisters, shrink hole, flacking, scratches and roughness.
V. The micro-duct shall have 3% maximum reversion as per ISO2505.
W. The micro-duct shall have min. 20 N/mm2 tensile strength at yield and min. 500% elongation at break as
per ASTM F 2160 (type IV specimen & ASTM D 638, speed 50mm/min.).
X. Impact Strength: There shall be no crack/split when 9.1 Kgs (Tup B) and load dropped from 1.5-meter
height after conditioning at 0-degree C for 1 hour as per ASTM D 2444.
Y. The micro-duct shall have less than 0.06 internal coefficient of friction.
Z. ESCR: Samples shall not crack or split for 96 hours at 50+/-1-degree C when kept in 10% reagent soln as
per ASTM D 1693.
Page 120 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
AA. Crush Resistance Test: Recovery after deflection to 15% of inside diameter shall be more than 95% of
initial inside diameter with 2.5 minutes as per ASTM D 2412.
2.11 WARNING TAPE
A. Warning Tape width for Telecommunication Micro ducts should be 150 mm.
B. Warning taps should be supplied in standard 300 mm lengths "different lengths should be presented by
the contractor".
2.12 MICRO DUCT CONNECTORS
A. The connectors of Telecommunication micro ducts provide a quick, easy and secure connection and
water sealing of micro ducts
B. The connectors of Micro-duct shall verify the following:
1. All connector types should be direst buried and IP68.
2. Straight Connectors are used to join sections of micro ducts.
3. Reduction connectors are used to join micro ducts of different dimensions.
4. If used, shall not reduce the inside diameter of the inner duct.
5. The connector shall be rated for working pressure up to 10 bar.
6. All required accessories for connection of the tube duct shall be according to manufacture
requirements and recommendations
2.13 MICRO DUCT END CAPS
A. The end caps for Telecommunication micro duct provide a quick, easy and secure connection and
water sealing of micro ducts.
B. All end caps should be IP68.
C. End Stops are used to block open duct ends and prevent water and dirt from entering the micro
duct.
Page 121 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.14 TELECOM INFRASTRUCTURE CIVIL WORK
A. MAIN GUIDELINES
1. If there are any contradictions between this document and Service Provider standards / applicable
specifications, Service Provider documents will supersede.
2. All telecommunication ducts are to be installed in trenches at minimum depth of 700mm in case
of walkway and 900mm in case of street asphalt.
3. In case of conflict between telecommunication ducts and other utility ducts (sewage, water and
electrical cables), telecommunication ducts could be passed above or down these utilities keeping
depth between duct surfaces and street asphalt at least 900mm.
4. Vertical and horizontal spacing between duct pipes should be 30mm.
5. Manholes and cabinet holes should be located at each splice location, intermediate manholes to
maintain a maximum spacing of 150 meters, centre to centre as indicated on the project design
drawings.
6. The ducts should be completely sealed, open or broken surfaces within the duct routes will not be
accepted.
7. The executed shop drawings should ensure the co-ordination of all other services located along
the route.
8. At least 250mm between streets asphalt and marker/warning tape (non-metallic) that must be
placed parallel to the duct runs.
9. No right angle bends should be incorporated throughout the duct length, except for one wide
angle bend (factory made) at the terminating end of the duct.
B. STANDARDS FOR MANHOLE AND DUCT BANK DESIGN

Design of manhole and duct banks should be in accordance with general Telecom Standards based on
the following:
1. PVC ducts for outdoor telecommunication infrastructure cable installations are to be non-sparking
type, suitable for direct burial in ground, supplied in standard 6 m lengths “different lengths should
be presented by the contractor”, with one end of each length tapered. Ducts are to be nominal size
shown on the Drawings, with minimum wall thickness 3.2 mm for 50 mm ducts.
2. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) ducts with telecommunication infrastructure cable installations
are to be with the following material specifications:
i. Polyethylene class is PE 80.
ii. Polyethylene average density ≥ 0.94 g/cm3.
iii. Tensile strength at yield ≥ 20N/mm2 – tensile test should be as pair ASTM D 638.
iv. Tensile strength at break ≥ 350%.

Page 122 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. PVC/HDPE ducts, draw-cords, spacers, entrance box and covers, and all other fixture and fittings
should be included. Ducts should be left in a clean dry condition and should be capped and sealed
to prevent ingress of water and debris.
4. Duct support: pre-formed, non-metallic of approved type. Supports containing metal are to have
the metal non-continuous and not forming a magnetic loop in any manner.
5. Maintain clearances from other utilities as per local utility requirements. A minimum clearance of
500 mm is allowed when running parallel with other services and 250 mm when crossing at right
angles.
6. Duct banks should be honed (or covered with 200mm) in concrete at road crossings.
7. Minimum angles for PVC/HDPE ducts turns should be 135o.
8. All underground duct structures should utilize industry standard, preformed spacers placed at no
more than 1500mm apart to keep ducts uniformly separated. Ducts need to be staked down before
pouring at road crossings.
9. Ducts entrances to the manhole should be covered by concrete layer (with minimum length 12
meters and minimum thickness 20 cm)
10. Manholes should be located in such way to provide workable pulling tensions and therefore the
distance between two manholes should not exceed 150m for a straight pull. No more than two
ducts turns are allowed in a run.
11. All manholes should not be adjacent to electrical manholes or share any walls.
12. All manholes should be painted with isolated chemical material.
13. All manholes should be water and dust sealed.
14. Manholes’ bases should be pre-casted according to technical specification of service provider.
15. Manholes’ Covers should be cast iron or cast steel, recessed type and of suitable duty for the
particular application including all needed fixation tools and accessories.
16. All manholes’ covers should be secured and marked with customer name, service provider name,
manhole number, etc. (more details could be defined by the owner).
17. Stub out spare ducts one meter from manhole and cap for future use.
18. HDPE end bells should be fitted at every duct ends and should be levelled with the inner surface of
the manhole walls.
19. Brackets, Supports, Rails, and Tracks for supporting telecommunication installations are to be
galvanized steel, fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material. Plastic inserts and lead
anchors are not acceptable unless approved for specific light duty installations.
20. Duct spacers should be one piece.
21. Warning tape width should be 150mm.
Page 123 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
22. Warning tapes should be supplied in standard 300 m lengths “different lengths should be presented
by the contractor”.
23. The contactor should coordinate with roads department to define the manhole height in relative
to street level.
24. The contractor has full responsibility for all civil works and applying safety regulations.
C. STANDARDS FOR MANHOLE AND DUCT BANK DESIGN
1. CABINETS FOUNDATIONS AND BASES: reinforced concrete, as approved by the Engineer after
submission of design calculations. Dimensions, levels and surface finishes are to be suitable for
equipment installed, as shown on the Drawings or in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
2. CONCRETE LAYER FOR DUCTS, installations crossing water, gas and sewage mains, under roadways
and where required or shown on the Drawings, is to be reinforced 100mm concrete layer.
3. MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES: reinforced concrete (concrete mixture: 1 cement, 2 sand, and 4
gravel based 700bto 900letter of water for each 1m3 of cement) using sulphate-resisting Portland
cement, with approved waterproof membrane on external surfaces, and with cable supports where
necessary, pull-eyes, and drain pit and drain pipe as required, outer surface is to be painted with
insulating substances or with petumen. Dimensions and reinforcement are to be as shown on the
Drawings or in accordance with approved standard details shown on shop and construction
drawings.
2.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
C. Refer to list of recommended Manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. Install underground duct banks and manholes including formwork.
B. Build duct bank and manholes on undisturbed soil or on well-compacted granular fill not less than
150 mm thick, compacted to 95% of maximum proctor dry density.
C. Open trench completely between manholes to be connected before ducts are laid and ensure
that no obstructions will necessitate change in grade of ducts.
Page 124 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Install ducts at elevations and with slope as indicated and minimum slope of 1 to 400. Duct runs
shall be graded to drain towards one or both terminal points of the duct run and graded away
from building entrances.
E. Install base spacers at maximum intervals of 1.5m levelled to grades indicated for bottom layer
of ducts.
F. Lay PVC ducts with configuration and reinforcing as indicated with preformed interlocking, rigid
plastic intermediate spacers to maintain spacing between ducts at not less than 75mm
horizontally and vertically for power ducts and 50mm horizontally and vertically for
communications ducts. Stagger joints in adjacent layers at least 150mm and make joints
watertight. Encase duct bank with 75 mm thick concrete cover.
G. Use bell ends at duct terminations in manholes or buildings.
H. Conduit penetrations into buildings shall be sealed with duct sealer.
I. Use conduit to duct adapters when connecting to conduits.
J. Terminate duct runs with duct coupling set flush with end of concrete envelope when dead-
ending duct bank for future extension.
K. Cut, ream and taper end of ducts in field in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, so
that duct ends are fully equal to factory-made ends.
L. Allow concrete to attain 50% of its specified strength before backfilling.
M. Use anchors, ties and trench jacks as required to secure ducts and prevent moving during placing
of concrete. Tie ducts to spacers with twine or other non-metallic material. Remove weights or
wood braces before concrete has set and fill voids.
N. Clean ducts before laying. Cap ends of ducts during construction and after installation to prevent
entrance of foreign materials.
O. Immediately after placing of concrete, pull through each duct wooden mandrel not less than
P. 300 mm long and of diameter 6 mm less than internal diameter of duct, followed by stiff
bristle brush to remove sand, earth and other foreign matter. Avoid disturbing or damaging ducts
where concrete has not set completely. Pull stiff bristle brush through each duct immediately
before pulling in cables.
Q. Install four 3 m lengths of reinforcing rods, one in each corner of duct bank when connecting duct
to manholes or buildings. Wire rods to dowels at manhole or building and support from duct
spacers. Protect existing cables and equipment when breaking into existing manholes. Place
concrete down sides of duct bank filling space under and around ducts. Rod concrete with flat bar
between vertical rows filling voids.
R. In each duct install pull rope continuous throughout each duct run with 3m spare rope at each
end.
Page 125 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3.2 EARTH EXCAVATION
A. Earth shall be excavated to accommodate at least 300 mm of granular backfill around the outer
walls of the unit and where required, a drainage pocket or drainage facilities lower than the
elevation of the maintenance hole floor using 19 mm clear crushed rock shall be provided.
B. Earth shall be excavated for separate drainage pockets and drain pipes as indicated in the contract.
3.3 MANHOLES / HANDHOLES
A. Install pre-cast or cast-in-place vault so as to bring cover 40 mm above grade in unpaved areas,
using riser rings as required.
B. Seal and waterproof pre-cast sections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Provide four 10M steel dowels at each duct run connection to anchor duct run. On runs of 16 ducts
and over, support concrete duct encasement on a 700 mm wide by 75 mm thick concrete pier
poured against manhole wall between slab and bottom of duct run, provide dowels for anchoring.
D. Make manhole to duct connections as indicated on drawings.
E. Install ladder rungs, anchor bolts, pulling irons and cable rack as indicated.
F. Install top slab and cover.
G. Hand holes shall be oriented such that ducts or duct bank entries will have an angle of 90 degrees
between maintenance hole wall and the axis of the ducts or duct bank. If this is not possible, the
angle shall not be less than 45 degrees.
H. All sharp projections and edges of concrete shall be ground smooth prior to installation of wiring
baffles or mechanical supports for cables.
I. All liquid and debris shall be cleaned from the units upon completion and prior to the acceptance
of work by the Consultant.
J. The work for electrical hand holes, regardless of type or size, shall include installation, frames and
covers, duct entry, backfill, and earth excavation.
K. The precast unit shall be installed plumb, true to alignment and grade, and firmly bedded on the
drainage pocket backfill.
L. During installation, the duct entry holes shall be oriented in the required direction. The enlarging
of duct entry holes is prohibited.
3.4 BACKFILL
A. Backfill for units installed within roadbeds or in sidewalks shall be carried out with clean
granular material.
Page 126 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Backfill for units installed in grassed areas shall be native backfill placed and compacted.
A. Inspection of duct will be carried out by Consultant prior to placing. Placement of concrete and
duct cleanout to be done when Consultant is present.
B. The Consultant may request additional tests for quality assurance including cover meter tests
to measure cover to reinforcing steel.
Page 127 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Special and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
C. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The requirements
of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
A. Provide complete engineered design for seismic restraining type support systems for all floor and ceiling
mounted electrical equipment, electrical conduit, cable trays, switchgear, transformers, panels, and etc.
in accordance with these specifications and the contract.
B. Provide seismic restraining type vibration isolation systems to eliminate transmission of movement from
the equipment to the structure or connected or conduit systems. All vibration isolation devices to be of
the seismic restraint type.
C. All reference herein to methods and techniques of equipment support apply to electrical systems.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and capacities required and
described herein, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10
years. Submit project listing to this effect. Provide products produced by a single manufacturer.
Page 128 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. All hanging, restraining and isolating methods and techniques to be as indicated on the documents, in
BOCA and SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of electrical Systems, 1982 Edition, 1982 UBC, Title
24 CAC, GSA, and ATC-3. Where techniques are proposed that deviate from those detailed in the contract
documents, they must be clearly detailed and stamped by a Professional Engineer as indicated under
submittals.
1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall secure from the approved manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control
equipment to have the following responsibilities:
1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations for all electrical
equipment (generators, transformers, M.V switchgears, A.T.S’s, free standing
switchboards/panel boards, UPS’s, batteries, busways, cable trays/ladders...etc.) .
2. Provide equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified.
3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection.
4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation
and performance.
5. Purchased and/or fabricated equipment must be designed to safely accept external forces of
½ G load in any direction for all rigidly and resiliently supported equipment, without failure and
permanent displacement of the equipment. Life safety equipment such as emergency
generator, and machinery, must be capable of safely accepting external forces up to ½ G load
in any direction without permanent displacement. Substitution of "Internally Isolated"
electrical equipment in lieu of the specified isolation of this section must be approved for
individual equipment units and is acceptable only if above acceleration ratings are certified in
writing by equipment manufacturer and stamped by a licensed civil or structural engineer and
are approved by the Architects.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature and catalogue cuts,
indicating maximum loads, dimensions, and recommended installation procedures.
Page 129 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Indicate locations of vibration isolation, inserts, anchors, and guides on the shop drawings.
C. Submit for review full detailed drawings and calculations indicating all methods and devices specified in
the contract documents. To restrain the equipment without failure while subject to an external lateral
force of ½ G acceleration.
E. Samples when requested.
1.6 WARRANTY
P. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
Q. Warranty shall include:

use.
R. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
Page 130 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL
A. It is the objective of this specification to provide the necessary design for the control of excessive noise
and vibration in the building due to the operation of machinery or equipment, and/or due to
interconnected cables trays/ trunking or conduit. The installation of all vibration isolation units, and
associated hangers and bases, to be in accordance with the details shown in the contract documents.
B. All vibration isolators to have either known non-deflected heights or calibration markings so that, after
adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that
the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being
provided according to the design.
C. All isolators to operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection
curves to be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range of not less than
50% above the design deflection.
D. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon load per isolator and
isolator stiffness, not to differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than
+/-10%.
E. All neoprene mountings to have a Shore hardness of 30 to 60 +/-5, after minimum aging of 20 days or
corresponding averaging.
F. Restrain equipment and components to safely accept a ½ G external lateral force without failure while
maintaining all equipment, cable trays/trunking and conduits, etc. in a captive position. Seismic restraints
not to short circuit isolation systems or transmit objectionable, non-rotating or reciprocating vibration
noise. Restraint systems to be Types I, II, III, IV or V as described herein.
G. No cast-iron legs may be used unless indicated on the equipment shop drawings and approved prior to
purchase.
Page 131 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic restraints shall be selected, designed and installed for the non-structural electrical and
communication components in accordance with “EPC 201-2012: Egyptian code to calculate loads and
forces in structural and buildings works" for buildings included under the project to sustain the following
loads:
1. Seismic Loading Classification:
a. Given: Elastic Response Spectrum ‘Type 2’ as per EPC 201-2012 or as directed by Structural
engineer.
1) Ground Type (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-1): [B] or as directed by Geotechnical or Structural
engineer.
2) Soil Factor (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-3b): 1.20 as per selected Elastic Response Spectrum and
Ground type.
3) Peak Ground Acceleration (PGA): 0.15g on type B ground.
4) Building Importance Class (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-9): III
5) Building Importance Factor (ɣ1) (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-9): 1
6) Importance Factor for non-structural elements (EPC 201-2012 Section 8-7-5-3): 1.5 for life
safety components and 1 for all other non-structural components.
7) Response Modification Factors (qa) for non-structural elements (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-8):
Varies as applicable to subject component
b. Seismic design forces shall be calculated for individual supports using the above information
and requirements of EPC 201-2012: Egyptian code to calculate loads and forces in structural
and buildings works including applicable exemptions and exceptions.
2. Wind Loading:
a. 3 second gust wind speed of 36m/sec.
Page 132 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.3 MATERIALS
1. Vibration Isolators:
a. Neoprene or Rubber Pads.
b. Spring Isolators.
c. Restrained Spring Isolators.
2. Seismic-Restraint:
a. Restraint, Type I: To comply with general characteristics of spring isolators having a minimum O.D.
to O.H. of .8 to 1 and minimum run out of 50% to solid. To incorporate built-in snubbing restraint
in all directions. To be capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment
erection. Cast or aluminium housings, unless ductile iron, are not acceptable. System to be field
bolted or welded to deck with ½ G acceleration capability.
b. Restraint, Type II: Each corner or side to incorporate a seismic restraint having a minimum 15 mm
thick resilient pad limit stops working in all directions. Restraints to be made of plate, structural
members or square metal tubing concentric within a welded assembly incorporating resilient pads.
Angle bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G
acceleration capability.
c. Restraint, Type III: Metal cable type with approved end fastening devices to equipment and
structure. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural members using two sided beam
clamps to steel or appropriately designed insert for concrete. All parts of system including cables,
clamps, excluding fastenings are to be single vendor furnished to assure seismic compliance. When
Type III system is used with isolated equipment slack with 13 mm cable deflection.
d. Restraint, Type IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel casing
minimum 8 mm static deflection. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G acceleration
capacity.
e. Restraint, Type V: Non-Isolated equipment to be field bolted or welded (powder shots not
acceptable) to structure to resist seismic forces specified. Bolt diameter and imbedment data must
be shown in certified calculations stamped by a licensed engineer.
f. Channel Support Systems.
Page 133 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
g. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors.
h. Mechanical Anchors.
i. Adhesive Anchors.
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before
shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity
range.
D. Refer to list of recommended Manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL EXECUTION
A. Hangers or clamps installed in contact with copper or brass pipe, to be of copper or provide lead or fiber
shields between iron hangers and clamps to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
B. Furnish and install auxiliary steel required for conduit, cable tray, trapeze, supports, etc. Chain straps,
perforated bars, wire hangers or expansion shields are not permitted.
C. Prime Paint: all black iron hangers to be installed underground, including rods, inserts, clamps,
stanchions, brackets, etc., with zinc chromate, before installation.
D. Anchor points: provide to permit the raceway systems to expand and contract freely in opposite
directions from the anchored points. Anchors may be double bolt riser clamps and shall be located
halfway between guide points and no less than 1 per 30 meters run.
E. Guide points: Locate in the cable trays/trunking system on either side of expansion joints and, or loops,
as specified herein to permit free axial movement only in pipe main runs. Elbows at ends of straight pipe
runs flanking expansion joints or loops are considered expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be installed
to limit straight runs of hot water and hot water circulating pipe runs to 30 meters maximum.
Page 134 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
F. Trapeze hangers with suspension rods having double nuts and securely attached to the construction in an
approved manner may be used in lieu of separate clevis hanger.
G. Maximum weights on hanger rods assuming a maximum operating temperature of 232C to be such that
stress in tension will not exceed 630 Kg/cm² the root area of threaded portion.
H. Hangers on Underground conduits: Provide hangers on all underground conduits beneath building when
installed in unstable soil or in fill or in all cases where installed beneath reinforced slabs on grade. Hangers
to be clevis type with extra heavy rod and 50 x 50 (2" X 2") fish plate sandwiched by two bolts and washers.
Provide complete assembly with zinc chromate primer.
I. Isolation and seismic systems must be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or conduit resulting in stresses
or misalignment.
J. All Electrical equipment and cables trays/trunking systems to be isolated from the building structure by
means of noise and vibration isolators, as described herein.
3.2 SEISMIC BRACING EXECUTION
A. All equipment whether isolated or not to be bolted to the structure to allow for minimum 1 G of
acceleration. Bolt points, diameter of inserts, and imbedment depth to be submitted as part of the
submission for each piece of equipment and certified by a licensed civil or structural engineer.
B. All structurally suspended, overhead equipment, isolated or non-isolated, to be four point independently
braced with Type III seismic restraining system.
C. Install seismic restraining system Type III taught for overhead suspended non-isolated equipment,
electrical conduit/ cable trays and slack with 12 mm cable deflection for isolated systems.
D. Seismically restrain all electrical conduit/cable trays with Type III restraining system in accordance with
the following schedule:
a. Cast Iron Pipe:

1. Lateral Brace: Maximum 3.0 m intervals.
2. Longitudinal Brace: Maximum 6 m intervals.
3. Above lengths may be doubled if 1/2 G acceleration rated couplings are used.
b. Electrical Conduit, Schedule 10, 20, or 40 Weld or Victaulic and all other raceway systems except
surface metal raceway:
1. Lateral Brace: Maximum 12 m intervals.
2. Longitudinal Brace: Maximum 24 m intervals.
E. Place floor mounted equipment on 100 m (4") high reinforced concrete housekeeping pads properly
doweled or expansion shielded to deck to meet acceleration criteria. Mount vibration isolating devices
and related inertia blocks on concrete pad. Concrete work specified in Division 3.
Page 135 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
F. Seismic restraints are not required for the following:
1. Conduits in Electro – Mechanical rooms less than 35 mm (1-1/4") I.D.

2. All conduits suspended by individual clevis hangers 300 mm in length or less from the top of the
pipe support to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
G. Where base anchoring is insufficient to resist seismic forces, supplementary restraints, such as seismic
restraint system Type III, to be located above the system's center of gravity to suitably resist "G" force
levels. Provide equipment with additional lifting lugs to accommodate this requirement. This
requirement includes all water softeners, water filter, and vertical water heaters and other equipment
where required.
H. For overhead supported equipment, overstress of the building structure must not occur. Bracing may
occur from:
a. Flanges of structural beams.
b. Upper or lower truss chords in bar joist construction at the panel points.
c. Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete structures.
3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT SELECTION FOR NON-ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical Equipment
1. All ceiling suspended conduit not excluded by diameter or distance requirement from support.
Seismic Restraint Type III.
2. All ceiling mounted equipment including trunking, cable tray, conduit, trapeze racks and bus ducts.
NOTE: If equipment is rigidly fastened to conduit, diameter and distance requirement from support
applies.
Seismic Restraint Type III.
3. All non-isolated floor and wall mounted equipment including transformers, switchgear, dimmer racks
(boards), etc.
Seismic Restraint Type V.
Page 136 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
4. All ceiling mounted lighting fixtures are to be independently hung and cable braced
utilizing S. R. Type III cables except as noted below. Fixtures, part of lighting grids
to meet local codes for suspension and be four point independently cable braced to
deck unless A.T.C. ceiling meets seismic zone II requirements. If this is met, use two
earthquake clips per fixture to secure fixture to T-Bar construction.
3.4 INSPECTION
A. On completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices herein specified, the
factory representative or Professional Engineer retained by the Contractor to inspect the completed system
and report in writing any installation error, improperly erected isolation devices or other faults in the system
that could affect the performance of the system. Contractor to submit a report to the Project Director,
including the manufacturer's representative's final report, indicating all isolation reported as properly
installed or requiring correction. Include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete
and correct the isolation work.
1.1.2
Page 137 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500, apply to work of this Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to electrical identification specified elsewhere in this
specification.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, and services to complete and make
ready for the Employer, the identification of all electrical equipment as required by this section and
other sections of the specifications. This includes, but is not limited to buried cable warning, power,
control and communication conductors, operational instruction and warnings; danger signs, and
equipment system identification signs.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification products of types

required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 62491 and IEC
61439 standards pertaining to electrical identification.
govern.
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and products.
Page 138 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Samples complete with nomenclature for the following:
1. Engraved lamacoid plates of each size of lettering.

2. Wraparound labels.
3. Metal tags.
4. Enamelled sheet metal signage.
1.5 WARRANTY
S. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
T. Warranty shall include:

use.
U. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAMACOID NAMEPLATES
A. Identification for power centers, switchboards and panel-boards: Engraved lamacoid nameplates
with 6 mm high white lettering on black background fastened to the outside face of the front.
B. Identification for distribution switches or circuit breakers of the following:
1. For Individually Enclosed Units: Engraved lamacoid nameplates with 3 mm high white
lettering on a black background fastened to outside front face of enclosure.
Page 139 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. For Panel-boards Without Doors: Same as for individually enclosed.
3. For Panel-boards with Doors: Typewritten directories mounted behind transparent plastic
cover, in metal frames fastened on inside face of doors; directories to indicate circuit
number, designation of room and number and item being served in directories.
2.2 WRAPAROUND LABELS AND METAL TAGS
A. Identify the wires and cables of feeders by means of fiber or non-ferrous metal tags fastened with
non-ferrous metal wires or bands throughout; fastenings for metal tags of the same metal as the
tag.
2.3 ENGRAVED LETTERING
A. Engrave device plates for local toggle switches, toggle switch-type motor starters, pilot lights, and
the like, whose function is not readily apparent with 3mm high letter suitably describing the
equipment controlled or indicated.
2.4 STAMPED LETTERING
A. Stamp phase identification letters into the metal of the bus bars of each phase of the main busses
of each power center switchboard and panelboard; make letters visible without having to
disassemble any current carrying or supporting elements.
2.5 IDENTIFIABLE MARKINGS
A. Identify each outlet box, junction box and cabinet used in conjunction with empty raceway for wires
of a future system by means of identifiable markings on the inside denoting the system.
2.6 ENAMELED SHEET METAL SIGNAGE
A. Equip all electric switchboard rooms, electric closets, metal screened spaces assigned to electric
equipment and the like, with enameled sheet metal "red on white" signs reading "Electric
Equipment Room - No Storage Permitted"; mount signs at clearly visible locations within the rooms.
2.7 ENGRAVE
Page 140 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Device plate for receptacles other than 230 volts 10 and 16 amperes receptacles with 3 mm high
black letters and designating the following:
1. Voltage
2. Number of phases
3. Current rating.
B. Device plates for receptacles on emergency, engraved "EMERGENCY" as described in Section

262726.
2.8 MARK
A. Cabinets housing emergency lighting and receptacle panel-boards with the word "EMERGENCY"
stenciled in 5 cm high red letters on the outside of the cabinet, in addition to other lettering and
nameplates required above.
2.9 NOMENCLATURE
A. The nomenclature used to identify power centers, dimmer boards, switchboards and panel-boards
to match the nomenclature used on the drawings.
B. The nomenclature used to identify switches or circuit breakers to:
1. Designate where they disconnect mains or service together with suitable differentiating
nomenclature where more than one service or main is involved.
2. Designate the feeder number and the name of the load supplied where they control
feeders.
3. Designate the name of the space and the load supplied where they control lighting and
appliance branch circuitry.
C. The nomenclature used to identify feeder wires and cables to designate the feeder number.
Page 141 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which electrical identification products are to be installed. Notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical identification products with other
work.
C. Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authority for identification of
electrical work.
D. Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical
systems and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment,
including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install signs or
similar equivalent identifications, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls,
devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed,
provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes.
E. Install signs at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where
fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate.
F. Securely fasten signage and nameplates.
G. Identify each wire or cable in a feeder at its terminal points of connection and in each hand-hole,
pull box, junction box and panel gutter through which it passes.
H. Label all conductors in wire-ways and pull and junction boxes with panel-board designations and
circuit number.
I. Identify Individually:
1. MV switchgear
Page 142 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. RMU ring main units
3. Transformer
4. Switchboards
5. Main and feeder devices in switchboard
6. Distribution and circuit breaker panel-board
7. Safety switches
8. Audio-visual equipment cabinets
9. Boxes for fire alarm system
10. Cabinets, junction and pull boxes of all systems installed, i.e., fire alarm (life safety) system,
telephone, television, security, etc.
11. Lighting control panels.
12. MV control system.
13. UPS system.
14. Central battery emergency lighting.
Page 143 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 261200
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (OIL-TYPE)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, apply to work of this Section.
C. Wires and cables section 260519
D. Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and related
contract drawings, apply to this section of the work.
1.2 Description Of Work
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation, all wiring devices in accordance with drawings and
specifications.
1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of transformers of the types, and capacities
B. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, SEC requirements, EN, NEC,
NEMA, ANSI, SASO 693, IEC, CENELEC, NFPA and IEEE Standards, IEEE C57.12.90, IEEE C57.111, IEEE
C57.121, NEMA 260 for safety labels, NEMA STD ATS and NFPA-70 pertaining to distribution power. Provide
products and components which have been UL listed and labeled.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision
will govern.
Page 144 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. In case of conflict among the specifications, drawings and BOQ, the more stringent provision
will govern.
1.4 Submittals
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for transformer including, size enclosures, and electrical ratings
and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of primary switchgear,
single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit detailed wiring diagrams to identify terminals for tap changing and connecting
field-installed wiring.
D. Compliance Sheet: Submit compliance sheet with the specs item by item, duly signed by the manufacturer
/ manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.
E. Type Test Certificates: Submit type test certificates to verify compliance of the main equipment with the
1.5 WARRANTY
a. Defective materials and installation.

b. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
c. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
d. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and
use.
f. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
C. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may be required
due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with Employer, manufacturer, and
installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not cancelled due to the repair
work.
Page 145 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 General
A. The transformer shall be liquid insulated substation type, rated TBD KVA 55▫OA/65▫OA, 13,800 volt delta
connected primary. Basic impulse level (BIL) 95 KV, 4160 volt secondary and filled with less-flammable
biodegradable vegetable oil insulating fluid, average winding temperature rise not exceed 55 degrees C. an
additional 12% KVA output will be provided without exceeding 65 degrees C. winding shall be copper and
designed, manufactured, constructed and tested in accordance with IEC latest edition or DIN/VDE standards
as are relevant, except where modified by this specification.
B. The electrical connections to other equipment shall be properly coordinated to from a complete system (s)
complying with this specification.
C. Workshop drawings shall be provided for each transformer .These drawings shall include fully dimensioned
external and internal general arrangements showing all principle dimensions, weights,
foundation/cable/busbar entry details and the positions of all functional devices, schematic drawings
showing all windings, method of connection, terminal markings, and IP rating.
D. Transformers in the context of this specification shall comprise assemblies of a magnetic core, primary and
secondary windings, supporting framework and enclosure.
E. Unless otherwise specified all terse used shall comply with IEC and DIN/VDE standards
F. The design, manufacture, selection, installation, testing, commissioning and subsequent maintenance of all
equipment and materials described in this specification shall comply with the requirements of, the
electricity at work regulations and the IEE wiring regulations.
G. Where more onerous requirements are specified herein, the conditions of this specification shall take
precedence.
H. All transformers shall be manufactured according to Harmonics K- factor (K1), except transformers used for
data centre shall be (K13).
Page 146 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.2 Performance
A. Equipment, General
1. Equipment shall be in accordance with ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, NEMA, NFPA, UL, as shown on the
drawings, and as specified herein. The transformer shall be assembled as an integral unit by a
single manufacturer.
2. Ratings shall not be less than shown on the drawings.
3. Provide transformers designed to withstand the mechanical stresses caused by rough
handling during shipment in addition to the electrical and mechanical stresses that may occur
during operation.
4. Completely fabricate transformers at the factory so that only the external cable connections
are required at the job site.
5. Thoroughly clean, phosphatize, and finish all the metal surfaces at the factory with a rust
resistant primer and dark green enamel finish coat, except where a different color is specified
in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES. All surfaces of the unit that will be in contact
with the concrete pad shall be treated with corrosion resistant compounds and epoxy resin or
a rubberized sealing compound.
B. Liquid-Filled Transformers
1. Liquid-Filled Transformers: IEEE C57.12.00, three phase, pad-mounted, self-cooled by natural
convection transformer unit.
2. The rating is as indicated in the drawings, 55 deg.C OA / 65 de. C OA. Primary voltage is 13,800
volts and secondary is 4160 volts.
3. Cooling and Temperature Rise; IEEE C57.12.00; Class OA. The average winding temperature
rise shall not exceed 55 degrees C, self-cooled.
4. Insulating Liquid: Filled with less-flamable biodegradable vegetable oil insulating fluid / edible-
seed-oil. Transformer insulating material shall be less flammable, edible-seed-oil based, and
UL listed as complying with NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 600˚F [300 C]
when tested according to ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be biodegradable and nontoxic.
5. An additional 12%KVA output will be provided without exceeding 65 degrees Celsius.
6. Winding: Copper.
C. Service Conditions
1. Meet requirements for usual service conditions described in IEEE C57.12.01 and for the
specified unusual service conditions.
2. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 50 degrees C.
3. Altitude: 2500 m.
D. Ratings
1. Capacity: 4000 kVA or as indicated in the drawings.
2. Primary Voltage: 13.8 kV delta connected.
3. Taps: Standard primary taps.
Page 147 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
4. Secondary Voltage: 4160 volts, delta connected.
5. Impedance: 5.75 percent maximum.
E. Accessories
1. Accessories: IEEE C57.12.00 standard accessories.
2. Tap Changer: Externally-operated type.
3. Secondary Terminations: Spade lugs.
F. Losses
Losses at no-load and loaded conditions shall be the lowest achievable for the transformer type
specified.
G. Noise Levels
The manufacturer shall confirm the guaranteed noise levels, Measurement of sound levels shall
comply with IEC 61746. The transformer shall be provided with noise reduction support blocks in
order to reduce noise level.
H. Electromagnetic Compatibility
Radiation of electromagnetic signals shall not exceed the limits of BS 800 and BS 6667.
Where transformers may be vulnerable to voltage transients, they shall be protected by surge
suppressor, which will reduce transients below the levels of the type tests.
Page 148 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.3 Handling Facilities
A. LIFTING
Transformers shall be provided with permanently fitted lifting lugs or eye bolts to facilitate handling
by crane or hoist.
Transformers shall be equipped with jacking points to facilitate the removal and or insulation pads.
The bottom supporting steel work shall be fitted with holes or have lugs attached for the attachment
of hauling apparatus.
B. FRAME WHEELS
Transformers shall be designed for floor mounting and be provided with removable bi-directional or
steerable rollers.
The rollers shall be lockable or means provided to prevent movement of the transformers after
installation.
2.4 Connection Facilities
A. CONNECTION METHODS
Connection methods shall comply with IEC latest edition. Provision shall be made by the
manufacturer for the mounting and connection of cable boxes and/or busbars as specified for the HV
and LV conductor connections.
Where HV and LV cable boxes and/or busbars are specified these shall generally be arranged on
opposite sides of the transformer. However exact positions shall suit the specified requirements of
each individual situation.
LV cable terminations shall be kept separate from the HV cable connections and insulated to the
specified voltage and able to withstand the specified short circuit currents.
Page 149 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
All HV coil interconnections shall be insulated for the specified voltage, and able to withstand the
specified short circuit currents.
An earthing terminal shall be provide at a convenient point on the supporting steel work. All steel
work shall be bonded to the earthing terminal if it is not electrically continuous. Provision shall be
made for making an earth connection to the neutral of the LV windings, should this be required.
B. TERMINAL MARKINGS
HV and LV winding terminals shall be clearly marked with characters in accordance with IEC 60034.
The characters shall be stamped or engraved on securely fixed, durable and non-corrodible plates.
2.5 Tap Changing Facilities
TAP CONNECTIONS AND LINKS
Each transformer shall be provided with tapping on the HV winding to cater for supply voltage
variations in the range  2.5% and  5% in compliance with IEC latest edition.
Tap changing shall be effected by off-circuit tapping links.
A visible warning notice shall be fixed adjacent to the tapping links and worded as follows:
" WARNING - OFF LOAD TAP CHANGING LINKS - ISOLATE HV AND LV SUPPLIES TO
TRANSFORMER BEFORE OPERATION"
2.6 Rating Plates
Rating plates shall be fitted complying with applicable standards latest edition.
Page 150 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.7 Testing Inspection And Commissioning
The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to :
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition including evidence of moisture and corona.
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
3. Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests, if required.
4. Clean the unit.
5. Verify that control and alarm settings on temperature indicators are as specified.
6. Verify that cooling fans operate.
7. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench

method .
c. Perform thermographic survey .
8. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.
9. Perform as-left tests.
Page 151 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
10. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
11. Verify the presence of surge arresters.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

ohmmeter.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding and each winding ground with test voltage.
Calculate polarization index.
3. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance with the test equipment

manufacturer's published data.
4. Perform a power-factor or dissipation-factor tip-up test.
5. Perform turns-ratio tests at the designated tap position.
6. Perform an excitation-current test on each phase.
7. Measure the resistance of each winding at the designated position.
8. Measure core insulation-resistance at 500 volts dc if core is insulated and if the core ground
strap is removable.
9. Perform an over potential test on all high- and low-voltage windings-to-ground. See ANSI/IEEE
C57.12.91, Sections 10.2 and 10.9.
10. Verify correct secondary voltage phase and phase neutral after energization and prior to loading.
C. Test Values
Page 152 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with manufacturer recommendation unless

otherwise specified.
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated
in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available, investigate any
values which deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
4. Insulation-resistance test values at one minute should be in accordance with harmonization

document HD 464 S1 and IEC.
5. The polarization index shall be compared to previously obtained results and should not be less
than 1.0.
6. Turns-ratio test results should not deviate more than one half percent from either the adjacent
coils or the calculated ratio.
7. CH and CL power-factor or dissipation-factor values will vary due to support insulators and bus
work utilized on dry transformers. The following should be expected on CHL power factors:
Distribution transformers: 5.0 percent or less Consult transformer manufacturer's or test

equipment manufacturer's data for additional information.
8. Tip-up test watts loss values should indicate no significant increase in power factor.
9. Temperature corrected winding-resistance test results should compare within one percent of
previously obtained results.
10. Typical excitation current test data pattern for three-legged core transformer is two similar
current readings and one lower current reading.
11. Core insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously obtained results but not
less than one megohm at 500 volts dc.
Page 153 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
12. AC over potential test shall not exceed 65 percent of factory test voltage for one minute duration.
DC over potential test shall not exceed 100 percent of the ac RMS test voltage specified in ANSI
C57.12.91, Section 10.2 for one minute duration. The insulation should withstand the over
potential test voltage applied.
D. SITE TESTS
All site tests shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification.
After delivery to site each transformer shall be inspected in the presence of the Owner's consultant,
prior to installation.
After installation on properly prepared foundations each transformer shall be tested and inspected
in the presence of the Owner's consultant.
The HV and LV winding connections shall be demonstrated as providing the specified polarity and
phase rotation and tap connections.
The HV and LV windings shall be tested for continuity and insulation resistance with a 1000v
insulation tester. The insulation resistance between adjacent windings shall not be less than 100 M
ohm.
After the HV windings are energized, it shall be demonstrated that the voltage and phase rotation
at the LV terminals are as specified.
E. Installation
A. Install transformers as shown on the drawings, in accordance with the NEC, and as
recommended by the manufacturer.Install plumb and level.
B. Foundation:
1. Provide foundation of reinforced concrete, type C, 21mPa (3000 psi minimum, 28 day
compressive strength), complying with the ACI 318.
2. Locate the top of foundation pads 150 mm above the finished floor level, unless
otherwise shown on the drawings. Refer to drawings for size, location, and structural steel
reinforcing required.
3. Provide vibration pads as indicated in the drawings.
Page 154 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Install safety labels to NEMA 260.
D. Grounding:
1. Ground each transformer in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. Install ground
rods per the requirements of project specifications, to maintain a maximum resistance of
5 ohms to ground.
2. Connect the ground rod to the ground pads and to the secondary and primary with bare
copper conductor as indicated in the drawings.
F. Acceptance checks and tests
A. Perform tests in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Include the following
visual and mechanical inspections.
B. Field quality control
1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or cracked bushings and
liquid leaks.
3. Verify that control and alarm settings on temperature indicators are as specified.
4. Inspect all field-installed bolted electrical connections, using the calibrated torque-wrench
method to verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections, or perform
thermographic survey after energization under load.
5. Verify correct liquid level in transformer tank.
6. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.
7. Verify correct equipment grounding per the requirements of project specifications.
8. Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters, if provided.
9. Verify that the tap-changer is set at specified ratio.
10. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS.
11. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS. In addition to the basic
requirements include the following:
a. Liquid-Filled Transformers:
1) If core ground strap is accessible, remove and measure core insulation resistance
at 500 volts dc.
2) If applicable, measure the percentage of oxygen in the gas blanket.
3) Measure insulating liquid's specific gravity, water content, and dissipation factor
or power factor.
2.8 Particular Requirement - Access
The specified transformers are located as indicated on the drawings.
Page 155 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
This places restrictions on the transformers' physical dimensions in case it is necessary to remove/replace
a transformer once the installation is handed over and in use.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner's consultant that the manufacturer's transformer type
selected could be removed/replaced (without incurring builders work) with access through the proposed
location.
If required by the Owner's consultant, detailed dimensioned drawings proving removal /replacement is
practical shall be provided.
2.9 Acceptable Manufacturer
Refer To The Attached Manufacturer's List.
Page 156 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 261300
GAS INSULATED METAL ENCLOSED MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR (LSC2B-PM)

PART 1 - GENERAL
A. A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified
to the contrary.
C. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500, applies to work of this Section.
D. Identification for electrical system, section 260533.
E. Low-voltage electrical power conductors and cables, section 260519.
F. Medium voltage cables, section 260513.
complete and make the switchgear ready for operation by the Owner in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchgear of the types and capacities
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes , SEC requirements and IEC
Standards pertaining to switchgear. Provide service entrance label and applicable service entrance
features per local code and IEC . Provide switchgear products and components which have been IEC
listed and labeled.
The switchgear and equipment supplied must be designed, manufactured, and tested in compliance
with IEC (International Electrical Commission) standards currently in force. In particular, the following:
1. IEC 62271-1 Common Requirements for High Voltage Switchgear
2. IEC 62271-100 Medium-voltage circuit breakers
Page 157 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. IEC 62271-102 Line-side isolators and earth switches
4. IEC 62271-103 Switches for rated voltages above 1kV up to and including 52kV
5. IEC 62271-200 Medium-voltage switchgears
6. IEC 61869-2 Current transformers/ Electronic current transformers
7. IEC 61869-3 Voltage transformers/ Electronic voltage transformers
8. IEC 60529 IP Protection class
9. IEC 60470 Current contactors and insertion contactors motor
10. IEC 60255-6 Electronic relay – protection and measurement relays
11. IEC 60364-5-51/52 Reading Instruments:
12. IEC 60099-4 Surge arrestors
13. IEC 60282-1 Fuses
14. IEC 60376 Sulphur hexafluorine specifications
govern.
E. E. The manufacturer is to be in possession of a current certification proving compliance with ISO 9001
and ISO 14001. The certification is to be from a recognized international body. A copy of certificate is to
be included with the tender.
F.
G. F. Type test certification are to be submitted to verify compliance of main equipment with the relevant
IEC Standards, including, but not limited to, the following:
H.
1. Impulse withstand-voltage tests
2. Power frequency withstand-voltage tests.
3. Temperature-rise tests.
4. Short time current tests.
5. Verification of making and breaking capacity.
6. Mechanical endurance/operation tests.
7. Internal arc tests.
8. Protection degree test to IEC 60529
9. Verification of degrees of protection for persons against contact with live and moving parts, internal
arc test, protection degree test
10. Approved by certification that MVSWGR could withstand Seismic zone 2A requirement.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract:
Page 158 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Product data for each product specified, including complete manufacturer's catalogues, operating
characteristics, provisions for extension or for addition of components, protective relays and
characteristics, instrument transformers and metering components, accuracies, and curves.
B. Company profiles of local suppliers and original manufacturers is to be provided.

I.
C. Compliance Statement: clause by clause full and compliance statement of specification is to be submitted.
J.
D. Construction Drawings: Submit following drawings/ documents for approval including the following:
1. Plans and elevations, with indication of switchgear mounted components, dimensions and weights.
2. Arrangement of equipment and general layouts.
3. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and Busbars and types
and locations of protective gear (relays, metering instruments, CTs, VTs) etc.
4. Schematic and elementary diagrams of control circuits
5. . Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details
6. Physical arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, instrument transformers, Busbars,
connections etc.
7. Dimensions and weights of control power supply and other auxiliary equipment or components
E. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine test records in
accordance with relevant IEC Standards.
F. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/ manufacturer’s
authorized representative and by the Contractor.
G. Coordination Study: Submit protection coordination study, including pick-up settings and time-grading,
together with time-current curves, equipment damage curves and range of adjustments etc. as required
to coordinate with upstream and downstream protective devices of the complete system based on
coordination curves of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective short circuit currents
at various points. Short-Circuit Analysis and Coordination Study is to be performed by a registered
Professional Engineer. Study is to be signed and sealed by the Engineer. This coordination study, usually,
is out of scope of the MV SWGR supplier.
H. Shop drawings for each switchgear line-up and accessory components. Include dimensional plans,
sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances, installed devices, major features, and materials
lists, weights, cables accesses in slabs, grouting holes and installation details.
I. Wiring diagrams, both elementary and schematic, differentiating between manufacturer- installed and
field- installed wiring including detailed identification of relays, control gear and any other components.
J. Routine tests each complete switchgear unit is to undergo routine tests at the manufacturer's works in
accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test reports, prior to shipping equipment,
indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed rating of equipment under site conditions.
K. Report of Field Tests: certified copies of field tests including ground resistance tests.
L. Maintenance data for materials and products, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual.
1.5 WARRANTY
Page 159 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of the warranted item. Warranty
shall include both, materials and workmanship.

e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and
use.
g. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may be
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RING MAIN UNITS (GIS Type)
A. GIS Ring main unit shall be LSC2-PM as specified under IEC-62271 comprises three (2) numbers of
three-pole motorized load break switches each rated 630 Amps, 13.8 KV for the incoming feeders
cables and no. one (1) or two (2) three-pole motorized vacuum type circuit breaker 400 Amps. for the
outgoing cable connected to the transformer as indicated on the drawings.
B. The ring main unit shall have maintenance free live parts complying with IEC 62271-1, sealed for life
pressure system.
C. The ring main unit shall be provided with status indicators which placed directly on the moving
contacts assembly operating shafts, They give a definite indication of the position of the switchgear and
shall be according to IEC 62271-102.
D. The RMU and busbar shall all be contained in a stainless steel enclosure filled with SF6 gas 1.4 bar abs
at 20o to ensure the insulation and breaking functions. This compartment is a sealed pressure system,
in accordance with the IEC 62271-1 standard, with a service life time of 30 years. In addition. No
refilling of the gas shall be required during the whole service life time.
E. It shall provide full insulation, making the RMU insensitive to the environment (temporary flooding,
high humidity...). Assembled, the active parts of the RMU shall be maintenance-free.
Page 160 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
The tank shall be made of ≥2 mm AISI 304 unpainted stainless steel and be able to withstand an
accidental internal overpressure of ≥ 2.1 bars (relative). The SF6 tank should include ready for service
indictor for SF6 gas monitoring through magnetic coupling without any gauges or valves. The ready for
service indictor should not be affected by temperatures or site altitudes.
F. The ring main unit shall be designed so as to prevent access to all live parts during operation without
the use of tools.
G. The switches in switch-fuse combination shall be of the maintenance-free, low
pressure SF6 gas type. The position of the contacts shall be clearly visible on the
front of the switchboard. The position indicator shall provide positive contact
indication in accordance with IEC 62271-102 standard .
H. MV Cable connection bushings shall be accessible from the front of the RMU. The bushings should be
conveniently located for working with cables specified and allow the termination of these cables in
accordance with the instructions supplied. The profiles of the cable connection bushings shall be in
compliance with EN 50181 standard.
I. The L.B.S’s shall have 3 positions, open-disconnected, closed and earthed, and will be constructed in
such a way that natural interlocking prevents unauthorized operations.
J. An operating mechanism can be used to manually close the switch and charge the mechanism in a
single movement.
K. Fuses shall be installed in 3 individual sealed chambers metalized on the outside and detachable. They
shall be mounted in series with the switch with the following operating mode:
blowing of a fuse releases a striker pin which causes three-phase opening of the switch and prevents
reclosing. The fuse chamber shall be able to be changed when needed.
L. It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping by an integrated push button.
M. Cable termination boxes and elbows shall be provided for the incoming and outgoing feeders.
N. The load break switches shall have the following specifications:
1. Nominal voltage 13.8 KV.
2. Maximum operating voltage 17.5 kV.
3. Rated current 630A.
4. Rated withstand voltage, 1 min 50 KV
5. BIL between phase and earth 125 KV
6. Rated short time current 3 S 20 KA
7. Peak withstand current 50 KA
O. The load break switches shall be operated by hand-operated handles through levers. Protective
barriers must be provided to safeguard the personnel from unintential contact with the live parts
during switching operations.
P. Each load break switch shall be provided with padlocks on the load break switch compartment and
earthing switch compartment
Page 161 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Q. Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the ON/OFF positions of the switches and the hand-operated
handles shall be provided with locks, where required.
Insulating barriers shall be inserted between the open contacts when working on cables.
R. Earthing switches are to be provided on the feeders’ side to enable earthing the cable feeders when
working on the cables.
S. Mechanical interlocking between the load break switches and their relevant earth switches such that
no load break switch can be switched on as long as his mate earth switch is in the ON position and vice
versa.
T. Ring main unit must be equipped with earth fault indicators as indicated on the drawings of the type
and according to the SASO requirements.
U. The degree of protection shall be IP-67 for the SF6 gas tank and IP-3X for the remaining parts of Ring
main unit.
V. The sheet steel thickness shall be (2.0 mm) and with mechanical impact class not less than (IK-07).
W. The ring main unit shall be equipped with space heaters one in the cable compartment and the other
one in the LBS or C.B compartment to prevent moisture and humidity ingress (230V X 2 X 200W)
controlled by M.C.B and hygrostat.
X. All equipment (push buttons - indicating lamps - sockets and plugs – terminal blocks for C.Ts & P.Ts and
control …etc.) must be made of hygroscopic and non-flammable material.
Y. Each RMU shall be provided with measuring cell, KWH meters, KVARH meters, current and voltage
transformers as per SASO requirements.
2.2 Voltage Presence Indicators (VPI):
A. Each RMU function shall be equipped with a Voltage Presence Indicator (VPI) on the front cover to
indicate whether there is voltage in the cables.
B. The voltage indicator shall be in compliance with IEC 62271-206 standard.
C. Cable connection bushings shall be equipped with capacitive dividers that will supply low voltage
power to the voltage presence lamps.
D. The lamps shall be of high performance LED technology to insure high visibility and long life duration.
Three voltage sensing inlets shall be provided on each function to allow checking the phase
concordance.
E. It shall be possible to replace the voltage presence indicator while unit remains energized,
guaranteeing the safety of people.
2.3 Communicating Fault Passage indicator with integral voltage detector (FPIVD):
A. Each of the two Incoming Load break switches shall be equipped with a fault passage indicator with
integral voltage detection device (FPIVD).
B. The voltage signal shall be taken from the Voltage Presence Indicator (VPI) connected to capacitive
divider in each load break switch cable bushing.
C. The voltage detection device shall display the MV network voltage in percentage of the network
service voltage. It is not allowed to use a voltage measuring tool to calibrate the device
D. The fault passage indicator function is used to detect and localise the faulty part of the network.
Page 162 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. It shall indicate short circuit and earth faults with a high performance red LED on the front panel.
F. It shall indicate permanently the load currents of each phase and memorise the maximeters of each
phase.
G. It shall indicate both phase-to -phase and phase-to earth faults.
H. In order to guarantee a fault validation on cable with low load value, a validation by voltage presence
shall be provided.
I. It shall be equipped with both automatic and manual setting modes.
J. It shall be dual powered device such that the FPI function is self-powered however the
communication function shall be with external power supply used for the communication.
K. It shall provide an output for external lamp gathering short circuit and earth fault remote indication as
well as a relay or transistor output for BMS system.
L. The current sensors shall be mounted onto the RMU bushing
M. it shall be communicating using Modbus protocol to the BMS system.
N. It shall indicate permanently that it is in operation, it could be by means of the permanent load
indication.
2.4 General Specifications for RMU Remote Terminal Unit :
A. RMU-RTU shall be built on a modular flexible architecture.
B. The RTU shall be organised with a main communication unit that supports communication with the
remote control centre, communication with devices located in the substations and communication
with interfaces with the switchgears.
C. One interface and treatment unit per Load break switch in the substation.
D. A power supply which integrates a 12Vdc battery charger and provides 48Vdc for the motorisation,
12Vdc for the electronic devices and 12Vdc for the communication transmission systems, the battery
AH shall be as per the manufactures standard & recommendation.
E. The RMU-RTU shall be expandable by adding modules, the number of modules shall not be limited
and not based on a rack design.
F. The RMU-RTU consumption shall be limited to 10W per substation.
G. The RMU-RTU shall be configurable locally or/and remotely.
H. A configuration tool, based on PC, shall be provided for configuration of the RMU-RTU. This tool shall
be connected locally or remotely to download and upload the configuration.
I. A web server shall be integrated into the RMU-RTU communication unit and shall provide facilities for
maintenance, settings including cyber security settings, and historical logs display. This Web server
shall be accessible locally and remotely, by mean of a standard laptop PC. Locally the maintenance
tool shall be connected to the RMU-RTU by Ethernet communication port.
J. The firmware shall be updated either locally or from the central system.
Page 163 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.5 RMU-RTU Particular requirements:
RMU shall be monitored and controlled by receiving signal from the BMS system via the RTU, also It shall
be possible to extend the RTU modules.
The interface with the RMU shall provide at least:
- Closing and opining the load break switches and the circuit breakers.
- two incoming Switch position (Dual input)
- Earth switch position (single input)
- Voltage presence (via communication)
- Fault passage indication alarm (via communication)
- Signals from transformer (winding temperature, status for fans working/alarm/trip).
- Signals from all low voltage circuit breakers, smart meters.
- Incomings LBS’s motor control (each LBS must have its dedicated control module).
- In addition to these direct interfaces with the RMU, the number of operations shall be transmitted
to the ADMS
- The interface shall control the switch motorisation through a dual output which provides the
48Vdc voltage to the interface relay located into the switchgear.
- The control operation shall be secured by a select before execute procedure, the 48Vdc power
supply to the motor shall be activated only during the execute phase.
- All monitoring data shall be transmitted to BMS system via the communication cables.
2.6 Archives
Events and measurement shall be archived in logs.
Events shall be stored in the archive logs with a time resolution of 1ms, and a discrimination of 10ms.
The capacity of the logs shall be up to 500,000 events and measurement
All the logs shall be available from a maintenance tool connected to the RTU or sent on request to the
Remote Control Centre.
Page 164 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.7 Communication
2.7.1 Communication with ADMS
The RTU shall be able to communicate with the ADMS on 2 channels. In case of redundancy the ADMS
will activate the backup communication channel. The RTU shall be able to initiate also a
communication on the backup channel in case of detection of inactivity on the main channel.
2.7.2 Protocol
The RTU shall comply with IEC 870-5-104 IEC 870-5-101 DNP3.0 standard protocol. The RTU shall
support Secure Authentication according to IEC 62351-5.
2.7.3 Transmission
The communication system is based on optical fiber. The RMU-RTU power supply shall be sized to
supply the communication modem.
2.7.4 Transmitted data

The RMU-RTU shall transmit to the ADMS all the status and measurement. Each data shall be
individually configurable to be sent or not to the ADMS.
The measurement shall be spontaneously sent to ADMS according to configuration of:
- Threshold
- Dead band
2.7.5 Communication LAN for other devices
In order to ensure that future needs should be covered, the RMU-RTU shall be able to provide
additional communication ports:
- Ethernet port
- RS232/RS485 port
2.7.6 Power supply
 The RMU-RTU shall include a power supply which integrates a 12Vdc battery charger
 The battery charger shall be compensated in temperature and protected against deep
discharge and overvoltage. A single 12Vdc battery is mandatory in order to limit the
maintenance constraints.
 In case of absence of the battery, the power supply shall be able to supply at least the RMU-
RTU.
 The power supply, from the battery voltage, provides the following :
 48Vdc± 10% for the motorisation (only applicable for RMU-Type-B). This voltage shall be
connected only in execute phase.
Page 165 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
 12Vdc for the communicating devices.
 12Vdc for the RMU-RTU modules.
 Power supply input
 Input voltage: 230Vac ± 10%
 The power supply shall be insulated to 10kV and surge protected up to 20kV, in
compliance with IEC60255-5.
 Battery
 The battery capacity shall maintain a backup time of 2 hours for all the voltage outputs
and shall permit 10 Open/Close cycles of the switchgear.
 The battery shall be able to withstand ambient temperature 50 C.
 The single 12Vdc battery shall be periodically checked, and a battery fault shall be
transmitted to the ADMS.
 The maximum battery charging time shall be 24hours.
 Monitoring
 The power supply shall deliver the following statuses to the ADMS
 End of life detection
 Battery disconnected
 Absence of power input
 Voltage output faults
 Battery fault
 Any other data should be available through a serial link communication.
2.7.7 Cyber Security
 In order to secure all controls and data acquisition, the RTU shall be designed to be compliant
with NERC and IEC62351 requirements. The RTU shall support secure access based on RBAC,
with the possibility to configure the roles.
 Local and remote access connection shall be secured for maintenance (locally and remotely)
with HTTPS, SFTP, IPSEC and SSH protocols.
 Authentication shall be based on a Radius server.
Page 166 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Future proof design
Remote firmware update
- The RTU shall support remote firmware updates

Centralised RBAC management
- The RTU shall be evaluative in order to be compatible with a full centralised RBAC management in
compliance with IEC 62351-9
Hardening
Device hardening
- Disabled or unused functionality shall not compromise security.

- Unnecessary services and programs shall be removed. If removal is not possible, the unnecessary
services and programs shall be disabled.
Interface minimization
- Each interface shall support only the data types and protocols needed to meet the functional
requirements.
- Unused interfaces and ports shall be removed. If removal is not possible, the unused interfaces
and ports shall be disabled.
- A complete list of supported data types and supported communication protocols per interface
shall be provided.
- All hardware interfaces that are used for programming or debugging shall be completely removed
after production.
Account hardening
- The RMU-RTU shall not contain active default, guest and anonymous accounts.
- All remote access to root accounts on the RMU-RTU shall be disabled.
- All Vendor-owned accounts where feasible shall be removed.
- The list of all accounts on the RMU-RTU shall be provided.
Communication
Compliance to Security standards
The RTU shall follow the IEC 62351 standards and at least:
Page 167 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
- IEC 62351-5 : 2013
- IEC 62351-8
Communication Security
The RTU shall support network and transport layer encryption using IPsec.
Configuration
- Access to the RMU-RTU by configuration tool shall be possible only through secured connection:
HTTPS for Webserver and SSH for console and configuration tool.
Access control
RBAC
- The RTU shall support the implementation of Role-based Access Control in compliance with IEC
62351-8.
- It must be possible to configure the privileges of individual roles. It must be possible to carry out
changes by configuration files through a secure way.
- It must be possible to define more roles for future applications.
- It shall be possible to assign each role individual security credentials.
- It shall be possible to bind roles to individual user accounts on the RMU-RTU.
-
- The minimum following function and data shall be controlled through RBAC:
- Configuration files
- Software update
- User management
- Executing program or shell command
- I/O on local maintenance access
- A specific tool shall permit to configure the security policy, role and password.
Management of Security passwords
- The RMU-RTU service application shall support individual user passwords.

- Passwords shall be stored together with a salt using an allowed cryptographic hash function.
- The RMU-RTU service application shall enforce a high complexity of passwords.
- The RMU-RTU shall lock the access after several password error.
User Authentication
Page 168 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
- The RMU-RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the WAN interface using a
challenge-response protocol based on message authentication codes The RMU-RTU shall
terminate the connection if the user authentication fails.
- The RMU-RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the Local Maintenance interface.
- It shall be possible to configure the RMU-RTU so that it blocks authentication requests, either
temporarily or permanently, from an account after a number of failed login attempts. The number
of failed login attempts and the time the account is blocked shall be configurable.
Central management of user account
- The RMU-RTU should allow managing user authentication through a Radius server.
Security Log
- The RMU-RTU shall provide a local audit trail for all security events that occur.
- Log files shall be produced in Syslog format.
- Security events shall be logged locally in a dedicated security log or/and on a SYSLOG server.
Security testing
- The RMU-RTU shall comply with ACHILLE Level1.
2.8 TESTS
A. Supply test results to confirm that the switchgear , ring main units and load break switches have been
tested to substantiate designs according to applicable Standards verifying not only the performance of
the switch but also the suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, factory
test each switch in accordance with approved Standards.
B. All tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer at works and at his expense and under control and
supervision of electricity distribution company.
C. The contractor is responsible for testing all medium voltage switchgear, ring main unites , load break
switches and all protection equipment, …etc. as per Electric Authority requirements on his expenses.
2.9 EQUIPMENT DATA

Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not be limited to the following
:
Construction and installation details for the main 24 kV switchgear equipment.
Page 169 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of cubicles.
Details of connection of high voltage cables to the cubicles.
Wiring and schematic diagrams of power, control, relay, metering and similar circuits. The separate
schematic diagrams shall include complete three line diagrams of all instruments, switches, any other
devices in the 24 kV switchgear Handling, installation and assembly drawings.
Key interlocking scheme showing key numbers and operations performed.
The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by this section shall include
but not be limited to the following :
 Complete technical data on the 24 kV switchgear other equipment including data on operating
characteristics, compliance with standards, dimensions and sights, detailed description, operating
mechanism etc.
 Complete technical data on instruments protective and auxiliary relays, measuring instruments
including manufacturer's catalogues, operating characteristics, operating curves, detailed
description etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which switchgears are to be installed. Notify Engineer in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
B. Routine work tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works in the presence of the Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchgear as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, requirements of

applicable standards, NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of switchgear with other work.
Page 170 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Mount the switchgear assembly on floor steel aligning channels elevated above floor level by a
concrete pad and as noted on the drawings. Provide shims to achieve level installation.
D. Insure that switchgear are shipped in sections which can be fitted through the available structures.
E. Bond together the switchgear structure, sections and all terminating with a bare copper earth cable
and connect to the switchgear earth bus and to the earthing loop as required.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL Standard 486A and B.
G. Adjust operating mechanism for free mechanical movement.
H. Provide 6.35mm minimum thick x 60cm wide insulation mat in front of each ring main unit or load
break switch and at the rear of any freestanding equipment.
I. Provide protective covering during construction for medium voltage switchgear.
J. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish for the switchgear.
K. Coordinate with and obtain approval of Utility Company for equipment requirements including all
metering prior to fabrication and installation.
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been energized, test equipment to
demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field-correct malfunctioning units, then
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new equipment and retest with
no additional cost to owner.
B. Prior to energization of switchgears and:
Page 171 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Perform insulation resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth for one (1)
minute. Minimum test voltage to be 2,500 volts D.C. with a minimum resistance of 5,000
megohms.
2. Megger check phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulating resistance levels of conductors.
3. Set all circuit breaker relays trip rating for maximum coordination with upstream and downstream
devices, including ground fault trips where supplied.
4. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize equipment and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements.
5. Open and close load break switching devices under load.
3.4 PERSONNEL TRAINING
Building Operating Personnel Training: Providing training to Engineers’ Representative comprising building
personnel in procedures for starting up, testing and operating H.V. switchgear and auxiliary equipment.
Furnish three operator's manual providing installation and operating instructions for the medium voltage
switchgear.
Page 172 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3.5 INTER CONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, wiring,
terminal blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information for the central control system
and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and data schedules.
The medium voltage switch gears, R.M.U’s and L.B.S’s shall be provided with Modbus interface card to be
communicating with BMS system for monitoring and controlling.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 230 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should add interposing
relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS supplier (either 4-20
MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
Page 173 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 262413
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
C. Low voltage electrical power conductors and cables, section 260519.
D. Medium voltage transformers, section 261200.
E. Electricity metering, section 262713.
F. Grounding and bounding for electrical system, section 260526.
G. Enclosed bus assemblies, section 262500.
H. Surge protective devices, section 264313.
I. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems, section 260548.
complete and make all switchgears ready for operation in accordance with drawings and
specifications.
Page 174 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchgears of the types, and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC – 61439-1&2, IEC
60947, IEC 61643, SASO 1269, SASO 1609, SASO 1611, IEC 60068-2-11, IEC 60068-2-30, IEC 60529,
IEC 61439-1&2Standards pertaining to switchgear.
C. Standards Compliance for A.C. B’s: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60947,
SASO 1349, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60898
D. Standards Compliance for M.C.C.B’s , M.C.B’s and contactors: Comply with
requirements of applicable local codes, SASO 1349, IEC 60947, IEC 60947-
1, IEC 60947-2, IEC 60947-4, IEC 60947-4-1 and Standards pertaining to
moulded case circuit breakers solid state type (adjustable for long time , short
time and instantaneous protection features) , miniature circuit breakers and
contactors.
E. Standards Compliance E.L.C.B’s: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60947, IEC
61009, IEC 60068-2, SASO and Standards pertaining to residual current devices.
F. Standards Compliance for miscellaneous control equipment: Comply with requirements of
applicable local codes, SASO, DIN/VDE, IEC 61439, EN and IEEE Standards pertaining to
miscellaneous control equipment. Provide miscellaneous control equipment which have been listed
and labelled.
G. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
H. In case of conflict among the specifications, drawings and BOQ, the more stringent provision will
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for switchgears, including size, enclosures, and electrical
ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
D. Type Test Certificates: Submit type test certificates to verify compliance of the main equipment with
the relevant IEC Standards.
E. Equipment Arrangement: Submit workshop drawings for all electrical substations and electrical
rooms indicating the actual dimensions for all panels based on the approved manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Page 175 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
F. Relay and C.B Coordination study:
Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study.
The Current-time characteristics must be plotted on a log-log papers manually or by software

program showing that the choice of the C.B. and relay settings are correct and selectivity
coordinated.
G. If selectivity coordination study is failed for any reason, contractor is responsible to change or add
any number of breakers, relays, such that the selectivity coordination shall be fully achieved with
no extra cost to the employer.
H. Short circuit and Voltage Drop Calculation
Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculations based on the actual
impedance values of the electrical components such as utility short circuit level at the medium
voltage 13.8KV (shall not be less than 500MVA), transformer, bus bars and cables ... etc.
1.5 WARRANTY
V. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
W. Warranty shall include:

use.
X. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
Page 176 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All switchboards shall be type-tested.
B. The switchgears shall be 660 V class 3PH, 60HZ completely wired and type tested at the factory,
ready for installation on the site. Sectionalizing shall be accomplished and bracing provided for
access of the equipment into the building.
C. Switchgears shall be designed and manufactured to comply with IEC - 61439, VDE 660 Part 500, UTE
63 - 410.
D. The Electrical installation has been designed to give load balance across the phases as far as possible
but it is the contractor's responsibility to maintain or improve the balance when making
connections to bars etc.
When the final commissioning is to be completed, the contractor shall allow in his tender for
checking loads and altering connections in order to achieve as even a balance over the phases as
possible.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. The switchboards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:
1. Rated voltage : 1000 V three-phase.

2. Rated operating voltage : As shown on the drawings.
3. Frequency : 60 Hz.
4. Insulated level : 2.5 kV- 60 Hz, 1min
8 kV-1,2/50µs.
5. Busbar rated current : As shown on the drawings.

6. Short-circuit current : As shown on the drawings.
7. Degree of protection (IP) : IP 42 for indoor application and IP55 for
outdoor application.
8. Impact strength (IK) : IK08 fo r indoor application and IK10 for outdoor
application
Page 177 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. The switchgears shall be of the totally enclosed, front and rear. Accessible, indoor type, of size,
rating and form arrangement as indicated on the Drawings. The complete assembly shall be floor
mounted, free standing, with matching cases, to form a continuous integral structure.
B. Switchgears shall consist of the required number of compartmented formed and welded sheet
enclosures required to mount circuit- breakers and other specified equipment or as shown on the
Drawings.
C. Switchgears shall be completely enclosed with hinged front covers and removable steel plates of
not less than 2 mm gauge on sides, top and rear.
D. All fastenings between structural members shall be bolted, not welded, to provide flexibility during
installation.
E. The arrangement shall permit the busbars and/or cables to enter from the top or bottom of the
enclosures as shown on the Drawings and connect at their respective terminals without
interference.
F. A modular arrangement shall be used to permit interchanging differently sized device cover plates
without additional drilling of structure.
G. Structures and busses shall be arranged to permit future sections to be added. A suitable cover
plate shall be provided for temporary protection.
H. Switchgears shall be dust, vermin and rodent proof IP42 according to IEC 60529.
All compartments shall be suitably ventilated where required.
I. All MDB's, EMDB's, chillers' panels, parallel operation panels (P.O.P) shall be form 4-4b; all other
switchboards shall be form 2-2b.
J. The switchgear busses shall be braced for a short-circuit duty as indicated on the drawings.
K. All bolted and plug-in connections shall be Tin plated to a minimum thickness of 0.0125 mm.
L. Spare / space capacity to be as indicated on drawings.
M. Suitable arrangement and equipment shall be provided for extracting and unloading the
circuit-breakers from their cells.
N. A special trolley shall be supplied together with the switchgear for removal or installation of the
air-circuit breakers from their compartment for maintenance or repair.
Page 178 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
O. An earth bus extending the entire length of the assembly shall be provided. The bus shall be sized
in accordance with the Regulations.
P. The switchgear shall be sanded and rust inhibited after fabrication, Electro - static painted on both
inside and outside surfaces. Color shall be Grey.
Q. The Switchgear shall be provided with inlet air filtration.
2.3 BUS BARS
A. All copper bus bars, switching devices and connections shall be sized with the same rating as the
main circuit breaker as a minimum and Tin plated at contact to limit the temperature rise to 25C
cover an average ambient temperature of 40 C outside the enclosure. The manufacturer shall
make any necessary derating required to achieve these conditions.
A. The bus bars rating shall be as indicated on the drawings.
All bus bars and connections shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance purposes.
B. Bus bars are to be of high conductivity copper and rigidly supported to withstand the mechanical
stress of a rated short- time withstand current of the panels for 1sec. in accordance with IEC 61439-
1
C. Main bus shall be of continuous construction. Main bus joints and all top connections shall be silver
plated and tightly bolted to insure maximum conductivity.
D. Bus bars shall be clearly marked with their respective phase colors and shall be furnished for future
extensions.
E. Clearance to earth and to other live metal are to be in accordance with the standards.
F. The main set of bus bars shall be housed in segregated chamber at the top. Bus bar top covers shall
be capable of supporting a man weight without deflection.
G. Incoming and outgoing supplies to switchgears shall be either busways or cables as indicated on
drawings.
H. A full length ground copper bus shall be provided. The ground bus shall be bounded to the metal
enclosure of each compartment and to metering and relaying. Lugs shall be provided one at each
end of the ground bus and one in each cubicle for the user's copper ground cables.
Page 179 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
I. For main and sub-main distribution boards the cross sectional area of neutral bus bars shall be equal
to the associated phase bars sizes and the earth bars sizes shall be half of the associated phase bars
sizes.
J. Access to bus bars and bus bar connections shall be possible only after the removal of covers
secured by bolts or studs. Such covers shall be identified externally by engraved laminated labels
bearing the inscription "BUSBARS DANGER 400 VOLTS" in 30mm high black lettering on a yellow
background.
K. Connections from main and dropper busbars to the supply side of functional units shall be by means
of dedicated conductors. Conductors installed on a loop in principle shall not be acceptable.
L. All neutral supply/load connections shall be made via the enclosure containing the associated
functional unit. Common neutral terminals shall not be acceptable.
M. Where specified in the schedules, or shown on the drawings, switched neutrals shall be provided.
Otherwise bolted neutrals shall be provided. The bolted section shall be mounted in the
compartment containing the associated functional unit or as a separate functional unit and be safe
and easy to access.
N. No diversity shall be used in busbar dropper sizing.
2.4 MAIN CIRCUITS
A. Main circuit wiring shall be PVC insulated to IEC 60502, DIN/VDE standards but with a minimum size
of 2.5mm2. Connections to and from functional units shall be segregated from control and
adequately supported to withstand the forces due to short-circuit faults. The sizes of wires shall be
calculated in accordance with the IET Wiring Regulations.
B. All cable connections shall be made at fixed terminals with no intermediate joints.
C. Insulated conductors shall not rest against bare live parts or exposed sharp edges.
2.5 AUXILIARY WIRING
A. All non-screened auxiliary wiring, except that which is required to be screened, shall be carried out
on 600/1000V grade insulated, multi-stranded flexible conductors complying with IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
B. The minimum conductor size shall be 1.5mm².
Page 180 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. All auxiliary wiring shall be identified at both ends with numbered and resistor color coded ferrules.
These numbers shall be shown on the control schematic wiring diagram.
D. All auxiliary wiring shall be contained within cabling trunking and totally segregated from power
wiring as far as practicable. Wiring of circuits at different voltage categories, e.g. L.V. and ELV, shall
be segregated. Joints will not be permitted on wiring between devices.
E. Cable trunking shall be of the ventilated type with clip-on covers and purpose made junctions and
accessories. Cables shall not occupy more than 25% of the trunking cross-sectional area.
F. Wiring not contained within trunking shall be strapped in looms with removable straps and held in
place by suitable cleats. Looms shall not exceed more than 25 wires. Self-adhesive straps shall not
be acceptable.
G. All wiring connections from trunking and looms to devices shall be run in straight lines, horizontally
and vertically, and be neatly dressed.
H. Wiring to door mounted devices shall be flexible and provided with a large enough loop to clear the
edge of the opening. Protection against abrasion shall be provided by means of flexible conduit or
spiral wrapping securely fixed at each end
I. Where wiring passes through partitions it shall be protected against abrasion by thermoplastic
grommets and spiral wrapping.
J. Interconnections between functional units shall be contained within a separate cabling chamber or
trunking. All cables shall terminate on the functional unit terminals within the cubicle.
2.6 LABELS
A. All enclosures containing functional units shall be clearly labeled with a circuit, unit reference and
current rating.
B. All labels shall be of the engraved type made from suitable multi-layer laminate and shall be fixed
with zinc plated cheese head instrument screws. No other type of label will be acceptable.
C. Every functional unit shall be labeled separately from all others. External labels shall have letters
not less than 5mm in height and internal labels not less than 3mm. The letters shall be black in color
on a white background.
D. All covers/doors not fitted with interlocked switched disconnectors enclosing unshrouded live
equipment shall be fitted with warning labels inscribed "DANGER 400V ISOLATE BEFORE OPENING".
E. Warning labels shall have black letters on a bright yellow background. Wherever possible, letters
shall be not less than 30mm in height. On small covers and doors letters of 20mm or 10mm in height
shall be used.
Page 181 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
F. Cable boxed shall be clearly labeled both externally and internally with the circuit and functional
device number.
G. All terminal blocks shall be labeled relative to the respective functional unit.
H. Every control and metering device, selector switch, pushbutton and indicator light shall be clearly
labeled to indicate its purpose.
I. Main identification labels shall be provided on the assembly together with a rating plate.
J. Fixed and with drawable portions of equipment including fixed and plug-in devices shall be labeled
with drawable portions cross-referenced to their fixed part.
K. Proposed engraving details shall be submitted for comment prior to engraving.
2.7 EARTHING
A. Each assembly shall be provided with a continuous copper earth bar running the whole length sized
in accordance with IEC 60865 standard for the prospective short-circuit current.
B. Discrete terminals shall be provided for connection to all the protective conductors. Each individual
section of the assembly shall be separately bonded to the main earth bar.
2.8 COMPONENTS
A. All components shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of their manufacturers. This
requirement does not negate the requirement for type and routine testing as specified elsewhere
in this Specification.
B. Adjusting and resetting devices shall be easily accessible.
C. All actuators for emergency switching devices shall be mounted between 0.8m and 1.6m above the
base of the assembly.
D. All components shall be installed and wired such that their function is not impaired by interaction
such as heat, arcs, vibration, and fields of energy present in normal operation.
Page 182 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. Barriers for manual switching devices shall be designed such that arcs caused by switching under
normal operation or the interruption or making of a fault current shall not present a danger to the
operator.
F. All removable and with drawable components shall be installed and designed such that they can be
safely disconnected or connected to supply circuits while the associated conductors are live.
G. All spare contacts on relays, contactors, and the like shall be wired to easily accessible terminal
blocks, suitably positioned for future external wiring.
H. Assemblies shall be provided with a spare set of fuses mounted on polyethylene coated spring clips
adjacent to the fuse chart on the doors of a separate cubicle. A total of 20% of each size of fuse
shall be provided with a minimum 4 number of each size.
When commissioning is complete the panel shall be handed over with this complete set of spare
fused. A fully detailed fuse chart shall be provided in the same cubicle as the fuses.
I. Where moulded case circuit-breakers are installed they shall be fitted with rotary action handles.
The handles shall be lockable in the "OFF" position.
2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES/PUSH-BUTTONS/INDICATOR LAMPS
A. The manufacturer's range shall include fully interchangeable contact blocks and lamp holder blocks
which can be fitted to all actuators including switches and push-buttons.
B. Selector switches shall be of the rotary type, with lever or key operated actuators as specified in
the schedules or shown on the drawings.
C. Pushbuttons shall be of the flush type. Colors shall be as specified in the schedules and to IEC,
DIN/VDE standards.
D. Pushbuttons used for emergency stop purposes shall be of the mushroom head type, with a twist
to release action or key reset as specified in the schedule.
E. Contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts, in 'NO' or "NC' configuration rated at
not less than 5A resistive at 230V 60HZ.
F. Indicating lamps shall be of the flush type 22mm diameter with removable colored lenses, allowing
lamps to be changed from the front and shall be provided with a push to test facility.
Colors shall be as specified in the schedules and IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
Page 183 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
G. Indicating lamps on control circuits shall be equipped with completely sealed dual wound safety
isolating transformers and in-built test relay.
H. Fuse failure lamps shall be of the neon type with current limiting device
2.10 WIRING TERMINALS
A. Cable terminations and space for terminations shall be suitable for the sizes of cable called for in
the design, refer to Cable Schedules.
B. Terminal blocks shall be made of thermosetting melamine or polyamide material with a low tracking
index and good flame resistance, tested to withstand a temperature rise of 90 C above ambient
temperature.
Provision shall be made for permanent labels to be applied to each terminal for identification
purposes.
C. All terminals shall be marked in accordance with DIN/VDE standards.
D. All terminals for control wiring shall have provision for plug-in test spills and in addition be fitted
with isolating links. Current carrying parts shall be made of tinned brass or copper.
E. Completely shrouded terminals of the tunnel type shall be used for cup to 10mm². The screw clamp
connection shall be vibration proof, self-locking and suitable for clamping two condos.
F. Stranded cables up to 10mm² shall be terminated in copper or copper alloy ferrule shall retain all
strands of the cable.
G. Terminals for cables in excess of 10mm² shall be of the double connection type with bolted studs
for the connection of cable lugs. The terminal and stud size shall be adequate for the current carried
and the size of cable. Suitable insulating partitions and protective covers shall be provided.
H. All auxiliary wiring except screened cables shall be connected to incoming/outgoing cables Via
insulated terminal blocks, screw/screw type, clipped onto DIN rails. There shall be sufficient space
on the DIN rail for future terminal blocks of not less than 10% or 5 No. whichever is the greater.
I. Wires shall enter terminals singly.
J. Plugs and fixed sockets for the application shall be provided for the termination of screened cables.
K. All terminations shall be mounted at least 0.2m above the base of floor mounted assemblies.
L. All load terminals shall be suitable for the types and sizes of cables as specified in the schedules and
drawings.
Page 184 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.11 WORKS TESTS
A. All assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of IEC 61439.
B. POWER SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL ASSEMBLIES
Where PSC-assemblies are specified, certification shall be provided for all type and routine tests as
per the requirements of IEC 61439.
C. Calculation from first principles for temperature rise and short-circuit strength will not be
acceptable.
Page 185 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required for assemblies having a rated
PSSC not exceeding 10KA or those protected by current limiting devices with a cut-off current not
exceeding 15KA.
E. Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required for auxiliary circuits connected to
transformers whose:
(i) Rated power does not exceed 10KVA for a rated secondary voltage of not less than 110V.
or
(ii) Rated power does not exceed 1.6KVA with a rated secondary voltage of less than 110V, and
whose relative short-circuit voltage is not less than 4%.
F. Works tests shall include inspection of all wiring and a complete electrical functioning test.
G. Protection relays shall be tested by primary current injection with currents equal to overload, short-
circuit and earth fault conditions.
H. Works tests shall be done in the presence of Employer consultant.
The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to: -
1. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition including evidence of moisture or

corona.
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required area clearances.
4. Clean the unit.
5. Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to drawings and
coordination study as well as to the circuit breaker's address for microprocessor-
communication packages.
Page 186 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
6. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to drawings.
7. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-

wrench method
c. Perform thermographic survey.

8. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.
a. Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
b. Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal positions.
9. Lubrication requirements
a. Use appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
b. Use appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
11. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
12. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
13. Exercise all active components.
14. Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.
15. Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear.
16. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers.
17. Inspect control power transformers.
Page 187 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
a. Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of
connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.
b. Verify that primary and secondary fuse ratings or circuit breakers match drawings.
c. Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding contacts and

interlocks.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers
2. Perform ground-resistance tests
3. Perform resistance measurements through bolted electrical connections with a low-

resistance ohmmeter
4. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and

phase-to-ground, for one minute.
5. Perform an overpotential test on each bus section, each phase to ground with phases not
under test grounded, in accordance with manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer
has no recommendation for this test. The test voltage shall be applied for one minute.
6. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied

potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated
cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components or control
devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
7. Perform system function tests in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
8. Control Power Transformers
a. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from winding-to-winding

and each winding-to-ground.
b. Verify correct function of control transfer relays located in switchgear with multiple
power sources.
9. Voltage Transformers
Page 188 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
a. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from winding-to-winding
and each winding-to-ground.
b. Verify secondary voltages.
10. Verify operation of switchgear/switchboard heaters.
C. Test Values
1. Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections.
2. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
investigate any values which deviate from similar bus by more than 50 percent of the lowest
value.
4. Insulation-resistance values for bus and control power transformers shall be in accordance
with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data.
Values of insulation resistance less than this table or manufacturer's minimum should be
investigated. Overpotential tests should not proceed until insulation-resistance levels are
raised above minimum values.
Page 189 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
5. Bus insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
6. Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously

obtained results but not less than two megohms.
2.13 Air circuit breakers (ACB’S):
2.13.1 GENERAL
A. Air circuit-breakers shall be provided with solid state trip units motor operated fixed type or drawable type
as indicated on the drawings, shall be in accordance with NEMA or IEC standards requirements.
B. All circuit breakers connected in one electrical circuit should be fully selective & coordinated, if selectivity
coordination study is failed for any reason, contractor is responsible to add or change any number of
breakers, relays, such that the selectivity coordination shall be fully achieved with no extra cost to the
employer.
C. Circuit breakers have to be provided with communication modules with the following features:
1. Enables the connection of switchboard to SCADA system using Modbus RTU (RS485) or Modbus
TCP/IP (RJ45).
2. The communication modules shall be installed directly on the circuit breaker without any additional
space.
3. Possibility of adding two communication layers through adding additional communication modules.
2.13.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ACBs shall be metal-clad, horizontal cassette type with positively driven "ON/OFF" indication.
B. INTERCHANGE
Means shall be incorporated to prevent the wrong circuit-breaker being racked in at fixed position.
C. SECURITY
Page 190 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Means shall be provided to padlock the breaker in the service, isolated and test positions; and to
close and independently padlock the shutters as specified in the schedules. It shall not be possible
to withdraw or rack-in shall be prevented.
Robust padlocks or cylinder locks shall be provided to lock each circuit-breaker in one or other
position during on-site testing and commissioning. This shall include locking the shutters closed
when a circuit-breaker is racked out. Two sets of keys shall be provided for each padlock, together
with a key cabinet and key schedule.
D. ACBs shall be fitted with the protection devices solid state type, instruments indicators and auxiliary
control functions as specified in the schedules/drawings.
E. OPERATING MECHANISMS
ACBs shall be of the four-pole type or as specified in the schedules/drawings. Where specified,
operating mechanisms shall be the trip-free type and shall have a latching current equal to the
short-circuit prospective value. Alternatively, the ACB shall be fitted with an instantaneous digital
trip or making current release which operates when the ACB is closed onto a short-circuit. Anti-
pumping devices shall be fitted to all operating mechanisms.
The specific method of closing shall be as specify in the schedules or drawings, as one of the
following:
(i) Type MSO: Manual, spring operated closing arrangement with a handle for charging and
releasing the spring in one stroke.
(ii) TYPE MSM or MSE: Manual, spring operated arrangement where the spring is charged to a
latched position pending mechanical/electrical initiation of closure. The spring system shall
incorporate the facility of charging for a second closure when the breaker is closed.
(iii) TYPE MWS: motor wound charged spring as types MSM or MSE. Motor wiring and control
circuitry shall be internal.
(iv) TYPE SOC: solenoid operated from d.c. when available or rectified a.c.
Where ACBs with a spring stored energy closing mechanism are used in an arrangement
involving interlocking with other ACBs, the manual discharge of the spring closing
mechanism shall be disabled by the interlocking system.
Page 191 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Facilities shall be provided to remove or blank off the integral mechanical "CLOSE" pushbutton
where it could be used to override protection devices, lockout relays or remote operating signals.
Mechanisms which store energy shall be fitted with stored energy status indicators.
F. OPERATING FACILITIES
The ACB shall have facilities for isolation, withdrawal and test position operations with the ACB
isolated. Carriage position switches shall be provided for connection into appropriate control
circuits to permit electrical interlocks to be defeated when the ACB is in the isolated and (where
applicable) test positions as specified in the schedules.
G. OPERATION CLEARANCE
Circuit-breakers shall be installed with full clearances for arc-chute vents and adequate side
clearances for unimpeded operation and maintenance.
2.13.3 RATING
The service performance characteristics shall be as specified in the schedules and drawings.
Ratings specified are the required on-site ratings. Written confirmation shall be provided to confirm
that specified ratings will be obtainable under the conditions in which each circuit-breaker operates.
Operating conditions shall include due allowance for ambient temperature, enclosure, physical
situation, position and attitude of the ACB and the proximity of other devices on full load.
B. LABELLING
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker on which
the service performance characteristics shall be displayed.
Page 192 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.13.4 PROTECTION AND TRIPPING
A. RELAYS
Protective relay requirements shall be selected so as to ensure full discrimination between system
levels by the tenderer. Protective relays shall be of the solid state type with adjustable for long time,
short time and instantaneous protection features, in addition to ground fault protection for all
breakers of 1000 AMP. and above. Relays shall comply with IEC 60255, NEC, NEMA, DIN/VDE
standards.
All relays shall be provided with test facilities for use in commissioning and testing from the front
of the switchgear.
Relays shall be of the integral or external type.
B. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of ACB at time of tender. The
details shall include manufacturer's full current discrimination tables showing over current and
short-circuit discrimination and, additionally a full set of overlay transparency discrimination curves
to enable discrimination settings to be checked.
All over current and short-circuit protective devices (relays as item "A" above) shall have separately
adjustable time and current settings. Adjustments and settings shall be possible from the front of
the ACB. The setting adjustment devices shall be behind a lockable cover plate, or similarly
protected against unauthorized access.
Page 193 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Energy for protective devices shall be obtained from integral current transformers. Separate current
transformers shall be of the accuracy class specified in the schedules and comply with IEC, DIN/VDE
NEMA standards, and of suitable ratio and rating for the operating conditions. If the circuit-breaker
is de-rated because of high temperature, then the current transformers shall be replaced with ones
suitable for the higher operating temperatures. Protection current transformers shall not be de-
rated.
Under voltage, trip and closing coils which shall incorporate adjustable time delay shall incorporate
adjustable time delay shall be wired out to secondary isolating contacts in the same position on
each breaker to ensure interchangeability of ACBs with the same service performance
characteristics.
C. COMMISSION LABEL
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker, on which
the final commissioned release setting for that circuit-breaker shall be displayed.
2.13.5 AUXILIARY CONTACTS
A. ACB auxiliary circuits shall be arranged to provide a wiping action on contacts during withdrawal
and re-instatement of the ACB, to and from its isolated position
B. On completion of the switchgear installation, each ACB shall be provided with auxiliary contacts
available for future use for both the ACB contact operation and the isolation operation as specified
in the schedules/drawings. Wiring to the switching contacts shall be ferruled and brought to a
terminal block.
C. All auxiliary contacts shall be mounted in accessible positions and away from possible electrical and
mechanical danger.
2.13.6 SHUTTERS
A. Where ACBs are isolated, safety shutters shall automatically cover exposed conductors.
B. The shutters shall be able to be padlocked in the closed position, but shall be capable of being fixed
open where tests require conductor contact.
Page 194 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Shutter shall operate automatically by the movement of the circuit-breaker, preferably without
using springs.
D. Shutters shall be painted to IEC, DIN/VDE standards:
Shutters Color Ref. Lettering Additional
(White) Requirements
Incoming Circuit "Signal IEC, DIN/ "DANGER _____

VDE
Shutters Red" LIVE
CABLES"
Busbar Circuit "Signal IEC, DIN/ "BUSBARS _____

VDE
Shutters Red"
Bus-Section "Signal IEC, DIN/ "BUSBARS With white arrows to

VDE indicate the section of
Shutters Red" (on each)
switchgear with which the
shuttered contacts are
associated
Circuit "Lemon" IEC, DIN/ _____ _____

VDE
Shutters
2.13.7 FINISHES
A. Special treatments and finishes such as tropicalisation, anticorrosion finish and cold-climate
treatment shall be applied where specified or where conditions make such treatment necessary.
2.13.8 TOOLS
A. Loose equipment shall include test leads and a lifting and transporting device plus any other tools
or equipment needed for routine maintenance.
2.13.9 INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES
2
3 The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to: -
Page 195 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
c. Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating the breaker.
d. Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests, if required.
e. Clean the unit.
f. Inspect arc chutes.
g. Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition, wear, and alignment.
h. Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to satisfactory
operation of the breaker are correct.
i. Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the breaker and its
operating mechanism in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
j. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:
1. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench

method.
3. Perform thermographic survey.
k. Verify cell fit and element alignment.
l. Verify racking mechanism operation.
m. Lubrication requirements
1. Use appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
2. Use appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
n. Perform as-left tests.
o. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings, if applicable.
2. Electrical Tests
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with

the circuit breaker closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
Page 196 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test.
d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied
cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components, follow
manufacturer’s recommendation.
e. Make adjustments to the trip settings in accordance with the coordination study.
f. Determine minimum pickup current by primary current injection.
g. Determine long-time delay by primary current injection.
h. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
i. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection.
j. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection.
k. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
l. Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground-fault or undervoltage trip devices, to

insure operation of shunt trip devices. Check the operation of electrically-operated breakers
in their cubicles.
m. Perform minimum pickup voltage test on shunt trip and close coils.
n. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone
interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, antipump function, trip unit battery
condition, and reset all trip logs and indicators.
o. Verify operation of charging mechanism.
3. Test Values
a. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
b. Bolt-torque levels.
c. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than
50 percent of the lowest value.
d. Circuit breaker insulation resistance.
e. Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously

f. Trip characteristics of breakers should fall within manufacturer's published time-current

tolerance bands.
Page 197 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
g. Minimum pickup voltage on shunt trip and close coils should be in accordance with
manufacturer's published data.
2.14 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB’s):
2.14.0 DEFINITIONS
The definitions of terms and symbols used in this Specification are those used in IEC 60947.
2.14.1 STANDARDS
Moulded case circuit-breakers solid state type, all MCCB's shall comply with IEC 60947 plus any additional
requirements of this Specification.
All MCCB's shall be equipped with solid state release (adjustable for long time and short time and/or
instantaneous protection depends on the selectivity achievements features).
Breakers of 1000A rating and above shall be provided with ground fault protection as per NEC requirements.
2.14.2 GENERAL
Minimum short-circuit capacities of circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the drawings.
All MCCB's connected in one electrical circuit shall be selected to ensure full discrimination up to and
including the prospective short-circuit, and earth fault currents as specified on drawings and Schedules for
prospective earth fault currents the disconnection times shall not exceed 5s.
All MCCB’s should be rated at service short circuit level.
All circuit breakers in one electrical circuit shall be fully selective and coordinated, if selectivity coordination
study is failed for any reason, contractor is responsible to add or change any number of breakers, relays,
such that the selectivity coordination shall be fully achieved with no extra cost to the employer.
Circuit breakers have to be provided with communication modules with the following features:
4. Enables the connection of switchboard to SCADA system using Modbus RTU (RS485) or
Modbus TCP/IP (RJ45).
5. The communication modules shall be installed directly on the circuit breaker without any
additional space.
6. Possibility of adding two communication layers through adding additional communication
modules.
Page 198 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.14.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. MANUFACTURE
MCCB's shall be manufactured with double insulation of the front face, insulating auxiliary
components from the main power poles thereby allowing as far as reasonable the fitting of auxiliary
units on site without full isolation of the unit.
B. CURRENT RATINGS
Rated currents, rated service short-circuit breaking capacities and trip release settings shall be as
specified in cable installation schedules and on drawings.
Current ratings as specified in the schedules and drawings are for interrupted duty at 230/400V in
the final installed location on site under full load operating conditions of the complete installation,
i.e. taking account of heat produced by other devices and the ambient temperature, physical
situation, enclosure, position and attitude of the MCCB.
The appropriate de-rating factors shall be applied to manufacturer's standard ratings when
selecting MCCB's to meet the specified ratings.
MCCB's shall be suitable for operation in both the horizontal and vertical mounting position without
detrimental effect on operation and rating.
Page 199 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of MCCB. The details shall include
manufacturer's full current discrimination tables showing overload and short-circuit discrimination
and, additionally, a full set of overlay transparency discrimination curves or software program to
enable discrimination settings to be checked.
D. TEST CERTIFICATES
Complete certificates shall be provided for each type of MCCB, stating the service and ultimate
short-circuit capacities.
E. CONTACTS
The contact arrangement of current-limiting MCCB's where applicable shall be such that the
current-limiting contacts are in series with the main contacts and remain closed in normal
operation, including time delayed over current tripping.
Contacts shall be arranged so that normal current is carried by low-resistance silver alloy or other
non-welding material while arcing is handled by tungsten contacts.
Multi-set contact MCCB's shall be arranged using one set of contacts for thermal current and other
for arc interruption.
F. TERMINALS
Terminals shall be sized to accommodate the size and type of cable of incoming and outgoing
circuits as specified in the schedules or drawings. MCCB's shall be provided complete with terminal
shields.
Terminals shall be arranged for direct connection to busbars, front or rear as required by the
switchboard design.
All poles of multi-pole circuit-breakers shall be constructed so that contacts open, close and trip
simultaneously. It shall not be possible for one or more poles to be closed while another remains
open and vice-versa.
Page 200 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
G. OPERATING MECHANISMS
Operating mechanisms shall be over-center, quick-make and quick-break type having operation in
which speed of operation of the breaker is independent of the operator.
All hand-operated circuit breakers shall be fitted with rotary action handles only in the main
distribution boards (MDB'S & SMDB'S). The handles shall be lockable in open position.
Where motor operated MCCB's are specified in the schedules or drawings, the motors, the clutches
shall be as scheduled. Direct action operating handles shall be provided for local operation.
Where solenoid operated MCCBs are specified in the schedules or drawings, the operating voltage
shall be as scheduled. Separate solenoids shall be provided for opening and closing operations.
Built-in push buttons shall be provided for local operation.
Indication of the "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" conditions shall be provided not only by the position
of the handle but also by means of a colored band, or line which shall be visible when the circuit-
breaker is on but not when it is off or tripped.
The "TRIPPED" condition shall be indicated by the handle assuming a mid-point position between
"ON" and "OFF" It shall not be possible to manually place the handle in the tripped position.
Indication shall be provided to confirm that all main contacts have separated.
H. ENCLOSURES
Moulded case covers and non-interchangeable trip elements shall be permanently sealed at works
to prevent tampering, but the trip elements may be changed/Adjusted and re-sealed on site by
using suitable tools.
All internal components of MCCB's shall be replaceable on site.
MCCB's shall be certified as satisfying the leakage current testes called for in IEC 60947-2 with
regards to safety isolation.
Page 201 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
MCCB's used for motor starting shall satisfy the Type 2 coordination requirements called for in IEC
60947-4-1. The MCCB and the starter shall preferably be of the same manufacture, and in all cases
shall be tested together and certified as satisfying the co-ordination requirements.
All MCCB's shall be of the same manufacture and those of like kind shall be of the same type. This
requirement applies to lose or individually mounted MCCB's as well as to those incorporated within
assemblies such as control panels, switchboards and distribution boards.
I. PROTECTION MECHANISMS
Each pole shall provide inverse time over current protection and adjustable high set instantaneous
tripping and in accordance to item 2.1 (B) above. All poles shall be tripped simultaneously if one
detects a fault.
Trip units of ratings up to 160A shall be built in. Trip units above and including 160A shall be
replaceable.
Tripping mechanisms shall be selective limiting type to obtain discrimination or by interconnection

with other MCCB trip units.
All adjustable trips shall be visible and adjustable from the front with the breaker in position.
Adjustments to trip settings shall be made to all poles simultaneously by means of a common
adjustment mechanism.
J. OPERATING FACILITIES
Facilities shall be provided for the use of a hand-held tester for on-site testing of all operational
features.
Where specified in the schedules/drawings, earth leakage trips, shunt trips, under voltage trips and
remote operation shall be provided. These accessories shall all be factory assembled and tested.
Energy based limiting MCCB's which require replacement of the current limiters after operatic shall
not be re-settable until such replacement has been made.
Page 202 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided where specified in the schedule or drawings, auxiliary contacts
shall operate simultaneously with the main breaker contacts.
A. Examine conditions under which residual current devices are to be installed and notify in writing of
B. The tests to be carried out in accordance to IET 17th. Edition, BS 7671, all other relevant international
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all C. B’s should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
ensure that no damages have occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
b. Inspect anchorage and alignment.
c. Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests, if required.
d. Clean the unit.
e. Operate the circuit breaker to insure smooth operation.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:
2. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-

wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units.
h. Perform as-left tests.
2. Electrical Tests
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

Page 203 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with
d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied
e. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests by passing 300 percent rated
primary current through each pole separately.
f. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
g. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection.
h. Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection using run-up or pulse

method.
i. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
j. Perform minimum pickup voltage test on shunt trip and close coils.
k. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone
interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.
3. Test Values
a. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
Page 204 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
d. Circuit breaker insulation resistance.
e. Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously

f. Trip characteristic of breakers shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current

characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. Circuit breakers exceeding
specified trip time at 300 percent of pickup shall be tagged defective.
g. Instantaneous pickup values of molded-case circuit breakers shall be within the tolerances.
h. Minimum pickup voltage on shunt trip and close coils should be comparable to previously
2.14.6 GENERAL INFORMATION
A. The following information shall be provided for each MCCB.
- Voltage and rated insulation voltage.

- Rated current.
- Rated operational voltage and rated insulation voltage.
- Number of poles.
- Rated service and ultimate short-circuit capacities.
- Method of mounting.
- Method of connection.
- Protection against external influence.
- Current time characteristic curves on log scale.
- The I²t tripping characteristic curves and the peak let-through currents at prospective fault levels.
- Rated short time withstand current.
- Rated short-circuit making capacity.
2.14.7 LABELLING
A. On the front of each MCCB a visible label shall be fitted and described as follows:
Labelling shall be marked as follows:
- Rated current and trip setting (for MCCB's with multiple current ratings the maximum value shall
be marked plus, without ambiguity, the value for which the MCCB has been adjusted).
- Rated voltage.
- Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
- Type designation, catalogue number or serial number.
- Rated short-circuit capacity in amperes.
Page 205 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
- Reference ambient temperature if different from 30oC.
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker, on which the
final commissioned release setting for that circuit-breaker shall be displayed.
2.15 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB’s):
2.15.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Miniature circuit-breakers (MCB's) complying with Standards shall be acceptable, however, all MCB's
shall comply with the same standard and be from the same manufacturer's range. MCB's shall be rated
for uninterrupted duty at 230/400V.
B. MCBs shall have Type Tested. Manufacturer's tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of
MCB specified.
C. Service and ultimate short-circuit capacities shall be as specified in the switchboard details.
D. All MCB’s should be rated at service short circuit entrance level and shall comply with IEC 60947-2 for
all incoming and outgoing.
E. The joule integral (I² t) energy withstand let-through shall be specified for each MCB.
F. In multi-pole MCBs, including four-pole, all poles shall open, close and trip simultaneously.
G. All breakers in one electrical circuit should be fully selective and coordinated, if selectivity coordination
2.15.1 MECHANISMS
A. Mechanisms shall be quick-make, quick-break, over-center type which are trip-free. The contact
position shall be positively indicated by coloured bands and/or lettering to show whether the contacts
are open or closed.
2.15.2 SECURITY
A. MCBs shall be proved with effective means of locking in the "OFF" position.
2.15.3 CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT-BREAKERS
A. MCB current ratings and instantaneous tripping characteristics shall be as specified in the Cable and
Distribution Board Schedules
B. The manufacturer's standard range shall include all MCB ratings, characteristics and auxiliaries specified
in the schedule.
Page 206 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.16 Earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB’s):
A. This section of the Specification covers residual current devices (RCD's) intended for protection of
final circuits rated at 125A or less. RCD's shall be installed on circuits as specified in the schedules and
single line diagrams.
B. RCD's shall comply with IEC 61009, IEC 60947-2, IEC 60068-2.
C. Residual current shall be measured by a transformer which may be zero-sequence-connected or core

balance type.
D. RCD's shall have rated tripping carrying currents as specified in the schedules.
E. The Residual operating current should not be greater than 30mA unless otherwise as shown on the
drawings.
F. RCD's shall have the appropriate short-circuit strength for the location in the system at which they are
installed and shall be capable of making, carrying and breaking the full short-circuit current. This
requirement shall apply whether or not the RCD is the sole or main circuit breaker at that point in the
system.
G. Unless used as circuit-breakers RCD's shall be connected in series with the overload and short-circuit
devices in the system.
H. RCDs shall not be used as the sole means of protection against direct contact.
I. Every RCD shall be provided with a test button and an engraved, clearly legible label stating "TEST
FREQUENTLY"
J. RCD's shall be suitable for loads with high crest factors and shall operate correctly irrespective of the
harmonic or direct current content of the wave form.
K. RCD's shall not trip out on loss of supply voltage.
L. RCD's shall be provided with auxiliary contacts whenever operation and controls.
M. The earth leakage circuit breaker shall be combined RCD/MCB 2-poles for 230V and 4-poles for 400V.
N. All earth leakage circuit breaker should be rated at service short circuit entrance level and shall comply
with IEC 60947-2 for all incoming and outgoing.
2.17 Contactors
Page 207 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase, four-wire, 400/2300 V, 60 Hz. supplies with
number of poles as shown on drawing and fitted with 200-250 V a.c. coils, unless otherwise detailed.
Contactors shall comply with IEC-60947 Standards only contactors which have been type tested to
meet the requirements of the IEC – 60947 and Standards BS shall be used.
B. Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty as per IEC 60947. The
utilization category shall generally be AC-3 but category AC-1 may be used where the load is positively
identified as being non-inductive, but excluding tungsten filament lamps.
C. Only one manufacturers' interlocking relays shall be used on one project. Relay coils shall be for 200
- 250 V, 60 Hz, unless otherwise detailed elsewhere.
2.18 CONTACTORS AND REMOTE RELAY SWITCHES
A. GENERAL
1. Mechanically or magnetically held with contacts normally open or normally closed and/or
combination as indicated on drawings or required.
2. Rated for continuous operation with capacities and voltage at 60 Hz, as indicated on drawings
or required.
3. Spring loaded contacts to maintain contact pressure in closed position, readily replaceable,
self-aligning type.
4. Suitable for inductive or non-inductive loads, unless otherwise noted.
5. With arc shields and magnetic blow coils if interrupting duty exceeds 300 amperes.
6. Interrupting capability not less than six times rated full load current.
7. Operating coils voltage: 230 volts, unless otherwise noted.
8. Enclosure: Dead front, NEMA type, soundproof, with vibration isolation mounting.
B. MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
1. Single and/or dual coil operation.
2. Positive locking type without the use of latching hooks or magnets.
3. With a manual operator for hand operation giving positive indication of contactor position.
4. Control Circuit: For 3-wire operation with momentary contact open/close stations as indicated.
Page 208 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. MAGNETICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
1. Spring assisted gravity open on normally open contacts and spring loaded magnetically open in
normally closed contacts.
2. Control Circuit: For 2-wire operation with maintained contact open/closed stations as indicated
or required.
2.19 MULTIPLE POLE RELAYS
A. Electrically operated, mechanically held type, with 10 amperes minimum rated contacts.
B. Open and close coils rated 230 volts or 400 volts, 60 Hz, unless otherwise indicated or required.
C. Number of poles as indicated on drawings or schedules.
D. Enclosure: Industry Standards.
2.20 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS
A. Rated as required for voltage, momentary volt-ampere load, and continuous volt-ampere load and
suitable for the intended application.
B. With primary and secondary over current protection with fused switches in accordance with the
codes governing.
2.21 General Specifications for Switchboards Remote Terminal Unit
a. Each switchboard (MDB, EMDB, P.O.P) shall be provided with RTU to monitor all circuit breakers, smart
meters and to control all main incomers/ bus coupler circuit breakers of each switchboard, the RTU
shall be built on a modular flexible architecture.
b. The RTU shall be organized with a main communication unit that supports communication with the
remote control centre, communication with devices located in the switchgears.
c. A power supply which integrates a 12Vdc battery charger and provides 48Vdc for the motorisation,
12Vdc for the electronic devices and 12Vdc for the communication transmission systems, the battery
AH shall be as per the manufactures standard & recommendation.
d. The RTU shall be expandable by adding modules, the number of modules shall not be limited and not
based on a rack design.
e. The RTU shall be configurable locally or/and remotely.
Page 209 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
f. A configuration tool, based on PC, shall be provided for configuration of the RTU. This tool shall be
connected locally or remotely to download and upload the configuration.
g. A web server shall be integrated into the RTU communication unit and shall provide facilities for
maintenance, settings including cyber security settings, and historical logs display. This Web server
shall be accessible locally and remotely, by mean of a standard laptop PC. Locally the maintenance
tool shall be connected to the RTU by a Wi-Fi or Ethernet communication port.
h. The RTU shall be provided with communication interfaces to communicate with SCADA system.
i. The firmware shall be updated either locally or from the central system.
2.21.1 RTU Monitoring and Controlling Functions
The RTU shall be connected to each circuit breaker electronic protection trip unites, circuit breaker,
smart meters.
The following functions shall be achieved at least from each Circuit breaker:
 Controlling for all A.C. B’s,

 Status (on/off/trip/trip),
 Position indication (rack in/test/out),
 Trip history,
 Current, Volt (Ph-Ph, Ph-neutral), Freq., P.F, Phase sequence,Peak factor,
 Power and energy measurements (Active-Reactive-apparent),
 THDI, THDV,
 No. of operation,
 contact wear,
 Load profile,
 Last carried out maintenance.
Also all Smart Meters readings shall be transmitted to the SCADA system.
2.21.2 RTU Communication Unit
The Communications Unit RTU oversees data acquisition, communication protocols. The RTU is also
responsible for checking the integrity of its configuration, embedded firmware, operating status and
maintaining system event logs & alarms up to date.
The RTU must have a modern design based on high quality industrial components with minimum
specifications of:
Page 210 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
CONCEPT MINIMAL SPECIFICATION
MAIN PROCESSOR 32 bits @500MHz
RAM 256MB (DDR3)
NVRAM 2 MB
INTERNAL FLASH STORAGE 256 MB
EXTERNAL STORAGE SD (64GB)
USB 2.0 (host)
RTC – PRECISION < 10 ppm @ 25ºC
HW-ACCELERATED CRYPTOGRAPHY 3DES, AES, MD5/SHA, RSA/ECC and

deterministic FIPS RNG
SECURE PROTOCOLS IPsec, SSL, SRTP
POWER CONSUMPTION < 10W
Each RTU must offer visual indications – LEDs – reflecting the general operation status and potential
diagnostics. Products using batteries to retain data in the internal non-volatile memory will not be accepted.
2.21.3 RTU Communication
2.21.3.1 Communication with Remote SCADA
The RTU shall be able to communicate with SCADA system on 2 channels. In case of redundancy the
SCADA system will activate the backup communication channel. The RTU shall be able to initiate also a
communication on the backup channel in case of detection of inactivity on the main channel.
2.21.3.2 Protocol
The RTU shall comply with IEC 870-5-104 IEC 870-5-101 DNP3.0 standard protocol. The RTU shall
support Secure Authentication according to IEC 62351-5.
2.21.3.3 Transmission
The communication system is based on optical fiber. The RTU power supply shall be sized to supply the
communication modem.
Page 211 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.21.3.4 Communication LAN for smart electronic trip unites of the switchboards' circuit breakers
The RTU shall be able to provide communication ports:
- Ethernet port
- RS232/RS485 port.
2.21.4 Embedded software
Embedded RTU software must have a modular design that includes the following components:
 Operating System based on Linux or LinuxRT.

 Cybersecurity management: RBAC, logs, permissions, etc.
 Real-time database hosting the status of all acquired points.
 Communication channel manager: in charge of handling the activity of each channel,
signalling any anomaly in them and arbitrating redundancy between links configured as
redundant.
 Tele-control protocol implementations.
 IEC61850 client and server.
 Supervision and software Watchdog.
 Secure web-based user interface (https) to monitor, control, manage firmware versions and
check controller diagnostics.
 Secure file transfer server (sftp) to upload/download firmware & configurations.
Page 212 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.21.5 Synchronization
Controllers must be able to be synchronized by:
 Manually via the web interface

 Direct connection to GPS clock
 IRIG-B Standard 200-04 (codes 002, 003, 006 y 007)
 SNTP via Ethernet
 Synchronization via tele-control protocol messages from master (IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-
5-104 o DNP3.0)
It will be possible to define up to two different synchronization sources and multiple servers in the case
of SNTP sources.
The controller, in turn, must be able to act as a synchronization source for downstream equipment
over:
 IRIG-B Standard 200-04 (codes 002, 003, 006 y 007)

 SNTP via Ethernet
 Synchronization via tele-control protocol messages from master (IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-
5-104 o DNP3.0)
2.21.6 Cybersecurity
a. In order to secure all controls and data acquisition, the RTU shall be designed to be compliant with
NERC and IEC62351 requirements. The RTU shall support secure access based on RBAC, with the
possibility to configure the roles.
b. Local and remote access connection shall be secured for maintenance (locally and remotely) with
HTTPS, SFTP, and SSH protocols.
Authentication shall be based on a Radius server.
- The RTU shall support remote firmware updates.
- Compatible with a full centralized RBAC management in compliance with IEC 62351-9.
- Device hardening.
- Disabled or unused functionality shall not compromise security.
- Unnecessary services and programs shall be removed. If removal is not possible, the unnecessary
services and programs shall be disabled.
Page 213 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
c. Interface minimization
- Each interface shall support only the data types and protocols needed to meet the functional
requirements.
- Unused interfaces and ports shall be removed. If removal is not possible, the unused interfaces and
ports shall be disabled.
- A complete list of supported data types and supported communication protocols per interface shall
be provided.
- All hardware interfaces that are used for programming or debugging shall be completely removed
after production.
d. Account hardening
- The RTU shall not contain active default, guest and anonymous accounts.
- All remote access to root accounts on the RTU shall be disabled.
- All Vendor-owned accounts where feasible shall be removed.
- The list of all accounts on the RTU shall be provided.
e. Communication
The RTU shall comply to security standards
The RTU shall follow the IEC 62351 standards and at least:
- IEC 62351-5: 2013
- IEC 62351-8
f. Communication security
The RTU shall support network and transport layer encryption.
g. Management of Security passwords
- The RTU service application shall support individual user passwords.
- Passwords shall be stored together with a salt using an allowed cryptographic hash function.
- The RTU service application shall enforce a high complexity of passwords.
- The RTU shall lock the access after several password errors.
Page 214 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
h. User Authentication:
- The RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the WAN interface using a challenge-
response protocol based on message authentication codes The RTU shall terminate the connection if
the user authentication fails.
- The RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the Local Maintenance interface.
- It shall be possible to configure the RTU so that it blocks authentication requests, either temporarily
or permanently, from an account after a number of failed login attempts. The number of failed login
attempts and the time the account is blocked shall be configurable.
i. Security testing: The RTU shall comply with ACHILLE Level-1.
2.21.7 Power supply
 The RTU shall include a power supply which integrates a 12Vdc battery charger
 The battery charger shall be compensated in temperature and protected against deep discharge
and overvoltage. A single 12Vdc battery is mandatory in order to limit the maintenance
constraints.
 In case of absence of the battery, the power supply shall be able to supply at least the RMU-RTU.
 The power supply, from the battery voltage, provides the following:
- 48Vdc± 10% for the motorization. This voltage shall be connected only in execute phase.
- 12Vdc for the communicating devices.
- 12Vdc for the RTU modules.
 Power supply input
Input voltage: 230Vac ± 10%
The power supply shall be insulated to 10kV and surge protected up to 20kV, in compliance with
IEC60255-5.
 Battery
- The battery capacity shall maintain a backup time of 2 hours for all the voltage outputs and
shall permit 10 Open/Close cycles of the switchgear.
- The battery shall be able to withstand ambient temperature 50 C.
- The single 12Vdc battery shall be periodically checked, and a battery fault shall be transmitted
to the SCADA system.
- The maximum battery charging time shall be 24hours.
 Monitoring
- The power supply shall deliver the following statuses to the SCADA system.
- End of life detection
- Battery disconnected
Page 215 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
- Absence of power input
- Voltage output faults
- Battery fault
- Any other data should be available through a serial link communication.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Examine conditions under which switchgears are to be installed, and notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all L.V panels should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
D. Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed by the Engineer
for locally assembled equipment. Witness test shall include complete routine and function testing on
all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for approval prior to test
conduction by 14 days
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchgears as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of switchgears with other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts and equipment grounding
connections, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for
equipment connectors.
D. Provide properly wired electrical connections for switchgears within enclosures.

Page 216 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. Double lugging is not permitted.
F. Fill out switchgears circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.
G. Provide equipment earthing connections sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective
ground for switchgears.
A. Upon completion of installation of switchgear and after circuiting has been energized, demonstrate
capability and compliance of switchgear with requirements. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace
with new units and retest.
B. Prior to energization of switchgears circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's
tightening torque specifications.
C. Prior to energization of switchgears, check with earthing resistance tester phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
D. Prior to energization, check switchgears for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short circuits.
E. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F. After energization, check phase balancing and adjust accordingly.
G. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
H. switchboards shall be thoroughly checked for correct functioning in every respect and shall be
subjected to the following tests:
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted, the panels
shall be subjected to a voltage test across the following points:
(i) Phase to phase
(ii) Phase to neutral
(iii) Phase to earth
(iv) Neutral to earth
Page 217 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
The voltage levels and test direction shall be in accordance with the relevant National Standard for
the equipment provided.
This shall be followed by an insulation resistance test with an approved type of 500 V test
instrument. With all electronic components and time switches removed or isolated and with all min
isolators closed and power fuses fitted, an insulation resistance of not less than 20 Megohms shall
be obtained between each of the following points:
(i) Phase to phase
terminal blocks transducers to provide signalling and metering information for the central control system
Relevant signals are listed under controls, SCADA and motor control panels drawings and data schedules.
All circuit breakers on main distribution boards should be provided with Aux. contacts connected to SCADA
systems for status (ON/OFF) and trip monitoring.
The main incoming circuit breaker for each main distribution board shall be provided with Aux. contacts
connected to SCADA systems for status (ON/OFF), trip monitoring and controlling.
All signals to the SCADA system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @230 volts.
relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the SCADA should be coordinated with the SCADA supplier (either
4-20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
Page 218 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
C. Low voltage electrical power conductors and cables, section 260519.
D. Electricity metering, section 262713.
E. Grounding and bonding for electrical system, section 260526.
F. Surge protective devices, section 264313.
G. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems, section 260548.
complete and make ready for operation, all panel boards shall be in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of panel boards of the types and capacities
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 61439, IEC 60068-2-11, IEC
60068-2-30, IEC 60529,SASO 1269, SAS0 1609, SASO 1611 Standard pertaining to panel boards.
Page 219 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Standards Compliance for M.C.C.B’s , M.C.B’s and contactors: Comply with requirements of applicable local
codes, SASO 1349, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60898, IEC 60947, IEC 60947-2, IEC 60947-4, IEC 60947-4-1 and
Standards pertaining to moulded case circuit breakers solid state type (adjustable for long time , short time
and instantaneous protection features) , miniature circuit breakers and contactors.
D. Standards Compliance E.L.C.B’s: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60947, IEC 61009,
IEC 60068-2, SASO and Standards pertaining to residual current devices.
Page 220 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. Standards Compliance for miscellaneous control equipment: Comply with requirements of applicable local
codes, DIN/VDE, SASO, IEC 61439, EN and IEEE, Standards pertaining to miscellaneous control equipment.
Provide miscellaneous control equipment which have been listed and labelled.
F. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will govern.
G. In case of conflict among the specifications, drawings and BOQ, the more stringent provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for panel boards including size, enclosures, and electrical
ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background drawings.
D. Equipment Arrangement: Submit workshop drawings for all electrical substations and electrical
rooms indicating the actual dimensions for all panels based on the approved manufacturer’s
recommendations.
E. Relay Selectivity Coordination
Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study.
The Current-time characteristics must be plotted on a log-log papers and/or approved software
calculation showing that the choice of the C.B. settings are correct for coordination.
F. If selectivity coordination study is failed, contractor is responsible to change any number of

breakers, relays, such that the selectivity coordination is fully achieved with no extra cost to the
employer.
G. Short circuit and voltage drop calculation
Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculation based on the actual
impedance values of the electrical components such as supply short circuit level at the 13.8KV (shall
not be less than 500MVA), transformer, bus bars, cables ... etc.
Page 221 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.5 WARRANTY
Y. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
Z. Warranty shall include:

use.
AA. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The panel boards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:
1. Rated voltage : 1000 V three-phase.
2. Rated operating voltage : As shown on the drawings
3. Frequency : 60 Hz.
4. Insulated level : 2.5 kV- 60 Hz, 1min
8 kV-1,2/50µs.
5.
6. Busbar rated current
Short-circuit current : As shown on the drawings.
7. Degree of protection (IP) : IP 31/54 for indoor application and IP55
for
outdoor application.
8. Impact strength (IK) : IK08 fo r indoor application and IK10 for outdoor
application
B. All Panel boards shall be type-tested.
Page 222 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. All copper bus bars, switching devices and connections shall be sized with the same rating as the
main circuit breaker as a minimum and designed to limit the temperature rise to 25 C over an
average ambient temperature of 40 C outside the enclosure. The manufacturer shall make any
necessary derating required to achieve these conditions.
D. Panel boards shall be provided with miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) or Moulded case circuit
breaker as specified in the schedules or drawings.
E. Panel boards shall comply fully with the requirements of IEC 61439 standard.
F. All interior components shall be mounted on a rigid fabricated chassis capable of being removed
and/or reversed for ease of wiring.
G. Panel boards shall be provided with a suitable earth bar (1/2 of the life bar size) and neutral bar
(1/2 of the life bar size; except for panel boards feeding IT and data center loads where it shall be
equal to the life bar size), with adequate provision for the connection of a circuit protective
conductor for each outgoing way.
H. Terminals for the neutral conductor shall allow the individual connection of conductors having a
current carrying capacity equal to the full current carrying capacity of the phase conductor.
I. When the means of isolating the panel board from the incoming supply is not to be mounted
immediately adjacent to the board, means shall be provided in the panel board to indicate
whether or not the supply is "ON".
J. Unless otherwise specified on the schedules or drawings, panel board cases shall be fabricated
from zinc-coated or heavily rust-proofed heavy gauge sheet steel and be of all-welded
construction. They shall be adequately braced or stiffened, by folding or otherwise, to form a
completely rigid enclosure. Exterior corners and edges shall be rounded so as to give a smooth
overall appearance.
K. Panel boards shall have a side-hung hinged front cover, attached by means of lift-off hinges, and
fitted with cylinder type locking handles. Covers shall be braced or folded in such a manner as to
prevent distortion or whip, and shall be fitted with dust-proofing gaskets or edge seals.
L. The panel boards will have degree of protection as per IEC 60529 according to the following
 ‘’IP-31’’ for indoor dry areas.

 ‘’IP-54’’ for indoor wet areas.
 ‘’IP-55’’ for outdoor areas.
Page 223 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
M. The form of the Panel board shall be as follows:
 Form (2a) in case the main breaker and bus bars rating up to and including 400A.
 Form (2b) in case the main breaker and bus bars rating are 630A and above.
N. All panel boards’ enclosures thickness should not be less than 1 mm.
O. Panel board cases shall be of such dimensions that adequate space is available for manoeuvring
and connecting the incoming and outgoing cables.
P. Panel boards shall be arranged for top or bottom or top and bottom entry according to the
requirements specified on the drawings or in the schedules.
Q. Panel boards shall be provided with detachable end plates as specified in the schedules or
drawings.
R. Each panel board shall be provided with a durable circuit chart fixed to the inside of the cover or
immediately adjacent and bearing typewritten details, in plain language, of the circuits supplied by
each of the ways.
The chart shall be on heavy weight paper or thin card, and shall be protected by means of a rigid
transparent plastic cover, it shall be mounted in such a way that it can easily be removed for
correction or alteration, then replaced. The size of the chart shall be such that there is adequate
space of recording all of the required information and, in any case, shall not be less than A5 (210
mm x 148 mm).
S. Each way in the panel board shall be clearly numbered to correspond with the numbering on the
circuit chart.
T. Each panel board shall be provided with an engraved plastic label on the outside of the front cover,
bearing the designation of the board and its reference number, if any, as given on the drawings or
in the schedules. The label shall be fixed in position by chromium-plated set screws. Each such label
shall be not less in size than 100 mm x 30 mm, and shall bear the required inscription in white on
a black background, using letters and/or digits not less than 5 mm high.
U. Panel board covers shall incorporate locking facilities as specified in the schedules.
V. All panel boards shall contain 10% space capacity.
OUTDOOR PANEL BOARDS
Page 224 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. This work shall consist of supplying, installing upon prepared base, testing and putting into
satisfactory operation of outdoor Panel boards which shall generally be used to feed the approach
outdoor lighting installations as required. The outdoor Panel board shall be supplied at 400 V, 3
phase, 60 Hz. From the LV Panel board in the main building.
2. The outdoor Panel boards shall be totally enclosed fully self contained dustproof, weatherproof (IP-
55) and suitable for mounting outdoors exposed to dust, rain and direct sunlight.
3. All copper bus bars, switching devices and connections shall be sized with the same rating as the
main circuit breaker as a minimum and designed to limit the temperature rise to 25 C over an
average ambient temperature of 50 C outside the enclosure.
4. Outdoor Panel boards shall be provided with a suitable earth bar (1/2 of the life bar size) and neutral
bar (1/2 of the life bar size), with adequate provision for the connection of a circuit protective
conductor for each outgoing way.
Page 225 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
5. The cabinets shall be reinforced free standing structure, manufactured from 2.5 mm minimum
galvanized steel with bolted reinforcement corner construction with a bolting down root for
mounting or a pre-formed concrete base suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables from below
ground level in a duct system. Cabinets shall have two hinged lockable opening doors to provide full
front access to the cabinet which shall be sized according to the equipment being installed. The roof
of the cabinet shall be slanted and shall have water drip edges provided.
6. SCADA electric control as indicated on the drawing. The circuits serving the lighting installation shall
be supplied through triple pole contactors which shall be controlled. An override facility shall be
providing for maintenance.
7. All equipment, bus bars, conductors, etc., within the panel board shall be fully insulated such that
there are no live parts or connections exposed all to the complete satisfaction of the engineer.
Finish. The outdoor panel board shall be finished with the following process and treatments applied:
a) De-rust.
b) De-grease.
c) One coat of sprayed zinc chromate red oxide primer.
d) Two coats exterior paint, dark gray to BS 4800 shade 632.
The treatments and applications apply both internally and externally.
8. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The outdoor panel board shall be fixed square and true on its prepared foundation in the location
as shown on the drawings.
The contractor shall verify with the manufacturer of the outdoor panel board that the civil works as
detailed are fully compatible with the panel board. All sizes and details must be checked before
concrete is pured and revised with approval of the engineer where necessary. It is the contractor’s
sole responsibility to ensure compatibility of the civil and electrical work.
2.2 WORKS TESTS
A. All assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of DIN/VDE standards Part 1,
plus requirements of associated standards.
B. Works tests shall include inspection of all wiring and a complete electrical functioning test.
C. Protection relays shall be tested by primary current injection with currents equal to overload, short-
circuit and earth fault conditions.
D. Works tests shall be done in the presence of Employer consultant.
Page 226 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. Examine conditions under which switchgears are to be installed, and notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
F. The tests to be carried out in accordance to IET 17th. Edition, BS 7671, all other relevant international
standards.
G. Upon installation at site all L.V panels should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
3.1.1 The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to:-
a. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition including evidence of moisture or

corona.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required area clearances.
c. Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests, if required.
d. Clean the unit.
e. Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to drawings and
coordination study as well as to the circuit breaker's address for microprocessor-
communication packages.
f. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to drawings.
g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:

h. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.
1. Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
2. Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal positions.

Page 227 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
i. Lubrication requirements
j. Perform as-left tests.
k. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
l. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
m. Exercise all active components.
n. Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.
o. Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear.
p. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers.
q. Inspect control power transformers.
1. Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of

connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.
2. Verify that primary and secondary fuse ratings or circuit breakers match drawings.
3. Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding contacts and

interlocks.
2. Electrical Tests
a. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers.
b. Perform ground-resistance tests.
c. Perform resistance measurements through bolted electrical connections with a low-resistance

Page 228 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground,
for one minute.
e. Perform an overpotential test on each bus section, each phase to ground with phases not under
test grounded, in accordance with manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer has no
recommendation for this test. The test voltage shall be applied for one minute.
f. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential
shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test
duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components or control devices that
cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
g. Perform system function tests.
h. Control Power Transformers: -
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from

winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
2. Verify correct function of control transfer relays located in switchgear with

multiple power sources.
i. Voltage Transformers: -
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from

winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
2. Verify secondary voltages.
3. Test Values
a. Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections.
Page 229 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
investigate any values which deviate from similar bus by more than 50 percent of the lowest
value.
d. Insulation-resistance values for bus and control power transformers shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table
manufacturer's minimum should be investigated. Overpotential tests should not proceed until
insulation-resistance levels are raised above minimum values.
e. Bus insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
f. Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously

obtained results but not less than two mega ohms.
2.4 Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB’s):
2.4.0 DEFINITIONS
The definitions of terms and symbols used in this Specification are those used in IEC 60947.
2.4.1 STANDARDS
Moulded case circuit-breakers solid state type, all MCCB's shall comply with IEC 60947 plus any additional
requirements of this Specification.
All MCCB's shall be equipped with solid state release (adjustable for long time and short time and/or
instantaneous protection depends on the selectivity achievements features).
Breakers of 1000A rating and above shall be provided with ground fault protection as per NEC requirements.
2.4.2 GENERAL
Minimum short-circuit capacities of circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the drawings.
All MCCB's connected in one electrical circuit shall be selected to ensure full discrimination up to and
including the prospective short-circuit, and earth fault currents as specified on drawings and Schedules for
prospective earth fault currents the disconnection times shall not exceed 5s.
Page 230 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
All MCCB’s should be rated at service short circuit level.
All circuit breakers in one electrical circuit shall be fully selective and coordinated, if selectivity coordination
2.4.3 CONSTRUCTION
K. MANUFACTURE
MCCB's shall be manufactured with double insulation of the front face, insulating auxiliary
components from the main power poles thereby allowing as far as reasonable the fitting of auxiliary
units on site without full isolation of the unit.
L. CURRENT RATINGS
Rated currents, rated service short-circuit breaking capacities and trip release settings shall be as
specified in cable installation schedules and on drawings.
Current ratings as specified in the schedules and drawings are for interrupted duty at 230/400V in
the final installed location on site under full load operating conditions of the complete installation,
i.e. taking account of heat produced by other devices and the ambient temperature, physical
situation, enclosure, position and attitude of the MCCB.
The appropriate de-rating factors shall be applied to manufacturer's standard ratings when
selecting MCCB's to meet the specified ratings.
MCCB's shall be suitable for operation in both the horizontal and vertical mounting position without
detrimental effect on operation or rating.
M. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of MCCB. The details shall include
manufacturer's full current discrimination tables showing overload and short-circuit discrimination
and, additionally, a full set of overlay transparency discrimination curves or software program to
enable discrimination settings to be checked.
N. TEST CERTIFICATES
Page 231 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Complete certificates shall be provided for each type of MCCB, stating the service and ultimate
short-circuit capacities.
O. CONTACTS
The contact arrangement of current-limiting MCCB's where applicable shall be such that the
current-limiting contacts are in series with the main contacts and remain closed in normal
operation, including time delayed over current tripping.
Contacts shall be arranged so that normal current is carried by low-resistance silver alloy or other
non-welding material while arcing is handled by tungsten contacts.
Multi-set contact MCCB's shall be arranged using one set of contacts for thermal current and other
for arc interruption.
P. TERMINALS
Terminals shall be sized to accommodate the size and type of cable of incoming and outgoing
circuits as specified in the schedules or drawings. MCCB's shall be provided complete with terminal
shields.
Terminals shall be arranged for direct connection to busbars, front or rear as required by the
switchboard design.
All poles of multi-pole circuit-breakers shall be constructed so that contacts open, close and trip
simultaneously. It shall not be possible for one or more poles to be closed while another remains
open and vice-versa.
Q. OPERATING MECHANISMS
Operating mechanisms shall be over-center, quick-make, quick-break type having operation in

which speed of operation of the breaker is independent of the operator.
All hand-operated circuit breakers shall be fitted with rotary action handles only in the main
distribution boards (MDB'S & SMDB'S). The handles shall be lockable in open position.
Page 232 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Where motor operated MCCB's are specified in the schedules or drawings, the motors, the clutches
shall be as scheduled. Direct action operating handles shall be provided for local operation.
Where solenoid operated MCCBs are specified in the schedules or drawings, the operating voltage
shall be as scheduled. Separate solenoids shall be provided for opening and closing operations.
Built-in push buttons shall be provided for local operation.
Indication of the "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" conditions shall be provided not only by the position
of the handle but also by means of a colored band, or line which shall be visible when the circuit-
breaker is on but not when it is off or tripped.
The "TRIPPED" condition shall be indicated by the handle assuming a mid-point position between
"ON" and "OFF" It shall not be possible to manually place the handle in the tripped position.
Indication shall be provided to confirm that all main contacts have separated.
R. ENCLOSURES
Moulded case covers and non-interchangeable trip elements shall be permanently sealed at works
to prevent tampering, but the trip elements may be changed/Adjusted and re-sealed on site by
using suitable tools.
All internal components of MCCB's shall be replaceable on site.
MCCB's shall be certified as satisfying the leakage current testes called for in IEC 60947-2 with
regards to safety isolation.
MCCB's used for motor starting shall satisfy the Type 2 coordination requirements called for in IEC
60947-4-1. The MCCB and the starter shall preferably be of the same manufacture, and in all cases
shall be tested together and certified as satisfying the co-ordination requirements.
All MCCB's shall be of the same manufacture and those of like kind shall be of the same type. This
requirement applies to loose or individually mounted MCCB's as well as to those incorporated
within assemblies such as control panels, switchboards and panel boards.
S. PROTECTION MECHANISMS
Page 233 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Each pole shall provide inverse time over current protection and adjustable high set instantaneous
tripping and in accordance to item 2.1 (B) above. All poles shall be tripped simultaneously if one
detects a fault.
Trip units of ratings up to 160A shall be built in. Trip units above and including 160A shall be
replaceable.
Tripping mechanisms shall be selective limiting type to obtain discrimination or by interconnection

with other MCCB trip units.
All adjustable trips shall be visible and adjustable from the front with the breaker in position.
Adjustments to trip settings shall be made to all poles simultaneously by means of a common
adjustment mechanism.
T. OPERATING FACILITIES
Facilities shall be provided for the use of a hand-held tester for on-site testing of all operational
features.
Where specified in the schedules/drawings, earth leakage trips, shunt trips, under voltage trips and
remote operation shall be provided. These accessories shall all be factory assembled and tested.
Energy based limiting MCCB's which require replacement of the current limiters after operatic shall
not be re-settable until such replacement has been made.
B. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided where specified in the schedule or drawings, auxiliary contacts
shall operate simultaneously with the main breaker contacts.
D. Examine conditions under which residual current devices are to be installed and notify in writing of
Page 234 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. The tests to be carried out in accordance to IET 17th. Edition, BS 7671, all other relevant international
standards.
F. Upon installation at site all C.B’s should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
i. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
j. Inspect anchorage and alignment.
k. Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests, if required.
l. Clean the unit.
m. Operate the circuit breaker to insure smooth operation.
n. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:

o. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units.
p. Perform as-left tests.
2. Electrical Tests
l. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

m. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with

n. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test.
o. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied
Page 235 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
p. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests by passing 300 percent rated
primary current through each pole separately.
q. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
r. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection.
s. Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection using run-up or pulse

method.
t. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
u. Perform minimum pickup voltage test on shunt trip and close coils.
v. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone
interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.
3. Test Values
i. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
j. Bolt-torque levels.
k. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
l. Circuit breaker insulation resistance.
m. Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously

n. Trip characteristic of breakers shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current

characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. Circuit breakers exceeding
specified trip time at 300 percent of pickup shall be tagged defective.
o. Instantaneous pickup values of molded-case circuit breakers shall be within the tolerances.
p. Minimum pickup voltage on shunt trip and close coils should be comparable to previously
2.4.6 GENERAL INFORMATION
B. The following information shall be provided for each MCCB.
- Voltage and rated insulation voltage.

- Rated current
- Rated operational voltage and rated insulation voltage.
- Number of poles
- Rated service and ultimate short-circuit capacities.
- Method of mounting
Page 236 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
- Method of connection
- Protection against external influence
- Current time characteristic curves on log scale.
- The I²t tripping characteristic curves and the peak let-through currents at prospective fault levels,
- Rated short time withstand current
- Rated short-circuit making capacity
2.4.7 LABELLING
A. On the front of each MCCB a visible label shall be fitted and described as follows:
Labelling shall be marked as follows:
- Rated current and trip setting (for MCCB's with multiple current ratings the maximum value shall
be marked plus, without ambiguity, the value for which the MCCB has been adjusted)
- Rated voltage
- Manufacturer's name or trade mark
- Type designation, catalogue number or serial number
- Rated short-circuit capacity in amperes
- Reference ambient temperature if different from 30 oC
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker, on which the
final commissioned release setting for that circuit-breaker shall be displayed.
Page 237 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.5 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB’s):
H. Miniature circuit-breakers (MCB's) complying with Standards shall be acceptable, however, all MCB's
shall comply with the same standard and be from the same manufacturer's range. MCB's shall be rated
for uninterrupted duty at 230/400V.
I. MCBs shall have Type Tested. Manufacturer's tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of
MCB specified.
J. Service and ultimate short-circuit capacities shall be as specified in the switchboard details.
K. All MCB’s should be rated at service short circuit entrance level and shall comply with IEC 60947-2 for
all incoming and outgoing.
L. The joule integral (I² t) energy withstand let-through shall be specified for each MCB.
M. In multi-pole MCBs, including four-pole, all poles shall open, close and trip simultaneously.
N. All breakers in one electrical circuit should be fully selective and coordinated, if selectivity coordination
2.5.1 MECHANISMS
B. Mechanisms shall be quick-make, quick-break, over-center type which are trip-free. The contact
position shall be positively indicated by coloured bands and/or lettering to show whether the contacts
are open or closed.
2.5.2 SECURITY
B. MCBs shall be proved with effective means of locking in the "OFF" position.
2.5.3 CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT-BREAKERS
C. MCB current ratings and instantaneous tripping characteristics shall be as specified in the Cable and
Panel Board Schedules
Page 238 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. The manufacturer's standard range shall include all MCB ratings, characteristics and auxiliaries specified
in the schedule.
2.6 Earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB’s):
O. This section of the Specification covers residual current devices (RCD's) intended for protection of
final circuits rated at 125A or less. RCD's shall be installed on circuits as specified in the schedules and
single line diagrams.
P. RCD's shall comply with IEC 61009, IEC 60947-2, IEC 60068-2.
Q. Residual current shall be measured by a transformer which may be zero-sequence-connected or core

balance type.
R. RCD's shall have rated tripping carrying currents as specified in the schedules.
S. The Residual operating current should not be greater than 30mA unless otherwise as shown on the
drawings.
T. RCD's shall have the appropriate short-circuit strength for the location in the system at which they are
installed and shall be capable of making, carrying and breaking the full short-circuit current. This
requirement shall apply whether or not the RCD is the sole or main circuit breaker at that point in the
system.
U. Unless used as circuit-breakers RCD's shall be connected in series with the overload and short-circuit
devices in the system.
V. RCDs shall not be used as the sole means of protection against direct contact.
W. Every RCD shall be provided with a test button and an engraved, clearly legible label stating "TEST
FREQUENTLY"
X. RCD's shall be suitable for loads with high crest factors and shall operate correctly irrespective of the
harmonic or direct current content of the wave form.
Y. RCD's shall not trip out on loss of supply voltage.
Z. RCD's shall be provided with auxiliary contacts whenever operation and controls.
AA. The earth leakage circuit breaker shall be combined RCD/MCB 2-poles for 230V and 4-poles for 400V.
BB. All earth leakage circuit breaker should be rated at service short circuit entrance level and shall comply
with IEC 60947-2 for all incoming and outgoing.
Page 239 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.7 Contactors
D. Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase, four-wire, 400/230 V, 60 Hz. supplies with number
of poles as shown on drawing and fitted with 200-250 V a.c. coils, unless otherwise detailed.
Contactors shall comply with IEC-60947 Standards only contactors which have been type tested to
meet the requirements of the IEC – 60947 and Standards BS shall be used.
E. Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty as per IEC 60947. The
utilization category shall generally be AC-3 but category AC-1 may be used where the load is positively
identified as being non-inductive, but excluding tungsten filament lamps.
F. Only one manufacturers' interlocking relays shall be used on one project. Relay coils shall be for 200
- 250 V, 60 Hz, unless otherwise detailed elsewhere.
2.8 CONTACTORS AND REMOTE RELAY SWITCHES
D. GENERAL
1. Mechanically or magnetically held with contacts normally open or normally closed and/or
combination as indicated on drawings or required.
2. Rated for continuous operation with capacities and voltage at 60 Hz, as indicated on drawings
or required.
3. Spring loaded contacts to maintain contact pressure in closed position, readily replaceable,
self-aligning type.
4. Suitable for inductive or non-inductive loads, unless otherwise noted.
5. With arc shields and magnetic blow coils if interrupting duty exceeds 300 amperes.
6. Interrupting capability not less than six times rated full load current.
7. Operating coils voltage: 230 volts, unless otherwise noted.
8. Enclosure: Dead front, soundproof, with vibration isolation mounting.
E. MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
1. Single and/or dual coil operation.
2. Positive locking type without the use of latching hooks or magnets.
3. With a manual operator for hand operation giving positive indication of contactor position.
Page 240 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
4. Control Circuit: For 3-wire operation with momentary contact open/close stations as indicated.
F. MAGNETICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
1. Spring assisted gravity open on normally open contacts and spring loaded magnetically open in
normally closed contacts.
2. Control Circuit: For 2-wire operation with maintained contact open/closed stations as indicated
or required.
2.9 MULTIPLE POLE RELAYS
A. Electrically operated, mechanically held type, with 10 amperes minimum rated contacts.
B. Open and close coils rated 230 volts or 400 volts, 60 Hz, unless otherwise indicated or required.
C. Number of poles as indicated on drawings or schedules.
D. Enclosure: Industry Standards.
2.10 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS
C. Rated as required for voltage, momentary volt-ampere load, and continuous volt-ampere load and
suitable for the intended application.
D. With primary and secondary over current protection with fused switches in accordance with the
codes governing.
K. Refer to list of recommended Manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine conditions under which panel boards and enclosures are to be installed, and notify Engineer
in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until
Page 241 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all panel boards should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
D. Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed by the Engineer
for locally assembled equipment. Witness test shall include complete routine and function testing on
all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for approval prior to test
conduction by 14 days
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panel boards as indicated, in according with manufacturer's written instructions,

requirements of applicable Standards, and in according with recognized industry practices to ensure
that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of panel boards with other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts and equipment earthing connections,
in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
D. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and
mechanically anchored. Provide all angle units and accessories for proper mounting.
E. Provide properly wired electrical connections for panel boards within enclosures.
F. Double lugging is not permitted.
G. Fill out panel boards circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.
F. Provide equipment earthing connections sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective
ground for panel boards.
Page 242 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Upon completion of installation of panel boards and after circuiting has been energized,
demonstrate capability and compliance of panel-board with requirements. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace
with new units and retest.
B. Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's

tightening torque specifications.
C. Prior to energization of panel boards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
D. Prior to energization, check panel boards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short circuits.
E. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F. After energization, check phase balancing and adjust accordingly.
G. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
H. Panel boards shall be thoroughly checked for correct functioning in every respect and shall be
subjected to the following tests:
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted, the panels
shall be subjected to a voltage test across the following points:
(i) Phase to phase
The voltage levels and test direction shall be in accordance with the relevant National Standard for
the equipment provided.
This shall be followed by an insulation resistance test with an approved type of 500 V test
instrument. With all electronic components and time switches removed or isolated and with all min
isolators closed and power fuses fitted, an insulation resistance of not less than 20 Megohms shall
be obtained between each of the following points:
Page 243 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
(i) Phase to phase
All signals to the SCADA system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 230 Volt.
relays.
4-20 MA or 1-5 Volt or 10 Volt).
Page 244 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 262419
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B.Single line diagrams and general provisions of contract, including general supplementary Conditions
(General Requirements), apply to work of this section.
C. Raceways, boxes, and fittings section n, apply to work of this section.
D. Cable trays section, apply to work of this section.
E. Low voltage switchgears section; apply to work of this section.
F. Instruments and metering section, apply to work of this section.
G. Safety and motor isolators section, apply to work of this section
H. Wires and cable section; apply to work of this section.
I. Automatic transfer switches section, apply to work of this section.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services, and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation by the owner; all Motor Control Centers (MCCs) in
accordance with the drawings and specifications.
1.8 DEFENITIONS
A. Definitions pertaining to electric motors and motor controls are as follows:
1 "Motor Power Circuits" Any circuit, which operates nominally at

230/400Vor more, and which carries
electrical input energy to a motor.
Page 245 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2 "Motor Control Circuit" (used in Any circuit, (other than a motor power
conjunction with a motor for which circuit) which operates nominally at
a magnetic starter is supplied. 24V, and which carries current intended
for controlling or monitoring the
performance of a motor starter.
3 "Motor Control Circuit" in Any circuit containing a used extension

conjunction with a motor for which of power circuit wires other than those
a manual starter is supplied. constituting the direct connection
between sources of supply, starter and
motor.
4 "Motor control actuating" device. Any device which performs a switching

function in a motor control circuit
(Pushbuttons, automatic contacting
devices, etc.).
5 "Motor control actuated" device. Any device which operates in response

to voltage received from a motor control
circuit (pilot lights, solenoids, etc.).
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing of Motor Control Centers of the types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
1.10 INTERPRETATION
A. The process and automatic control systems called for elsewhere, on plans or in these specifications
as part of the mechanical work, shall be interpreted as being totally divorced from the motor
controls here in after described. These systems, however, do include devices of the motor control
actuating, dictating and actuated types which are connected into some motor control circuits as
accounted for in the drawings entitled "Motor Control Centers Details".
B. In case of any conflict between any parts of this specification or any other document elsewhere the
material with higher stated specifications must be used. Any conflict or technical misunderstanding
should be discussed during bidding phase. The consultant will be the only technical reference for
the intents and contents of this document and the contractors will have to follow consultant
technical interpretation in case of any conflict arising after bidding stage.
C. Where differences occur between the Motor Control Centers Panels Drawings and the Mechanical
Equipment Data Sheets, the Mechanical Equipment Data Sheets shall take precedence. As the
Page 246 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
contractor is totally responsible for the coordination with final approved mechanical equipment
ratings and quantities.
1.11 MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS, MOTOR CONTROL ACTUATING AND ACTUATED DEVICES FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT ASSIGNMENT TO TRADES
A. The purchase and delivery to the site of all motors required for mechanical equipment shall be
included as part of the mechanical work.
B. The setting of all motors required for mechanical equipment shall be included as part of the
mechanical work.
C. The purchase and delivery to the site of all motor starters required for mechanical equipment shall
be included as part of electrical work.
D. The mounting of all motor control actuating, dictating and actuated device required for mechanical
equipment shall be included as part of electrical work unless otherwise noted.
E. The purchase and delivery of motor starters called for as part of a motor control center shall include
the purchase and delivery of the entire motor control assembly.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. Wiring Diagrams
1.1. The supplying of electrical wiring diagrams of manufactured equipment, including terminal
to terminal point, integrated electrical wiring diagrams, for power, operating, safety and
interlocking/interlock controls shall be included as part of the work. This requirement shall
be met regardless of any assignment between trade of the responsibility for the purchase,
delivery, setting in place, connecting up of electrical motors, starters, controls and other
electrical devices.
1.2. The drawings describing the electrical and/or the mechanical work may include explanatory
wiring diagrams indicating the function intended for the motor controls circuits of certain
specific motors.
The "field instructions" wiring diagrams required as part of the work shall conform to these
intended functions.
2. Dimension layout
The supplying of electrical dimension layout of manufactured equipment shall be included as
part of the mechanical work.
Page 247 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. PRODUCT DATA
Manufacturer's printed data, catalogue cuts and illustrations.
C. SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS
Contractor shall submit a detailed short circuit calculations based on the final layouts, cable sizes,
motor ratings, etc. Motors contribution shall be included in the calculations.
D. VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS
Contractor shall submit a detailed voltage drop calculations based on the final layouts, cable sizes, and
motor ratings.
4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PANELS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Motor Control Centers to be manufactured in accordance with BS EN 60439. Provide the Motor
Control Centre Panels suitable for internal or external locations with the required degree of
protection and form of internal separation indicated. Protection to be as BS EN 60529.
B. The motor control centers panels shall be constructed as described here under and as shown on
the single line diagrams drawings.
C. Indoor located panels to be fully enclosed cubicle type assemblies, fully compartmented type Form
2b/IP54. In all instances the controls must be housed with dedicated and completely separate
section.
D. Outdoor located panels to be fully enclosed cubicle type assemblies, fully compartmented type
Form 2b/IP66. In all instances the controls must be housed within a dedicated and completely
separate section.
E. All outdoor panels must be shaded.
F. Panels to be modular form with modules not exceeding 1200mm wide, 2200mm high or a weight
of 0.5 tonnes. Provide removable lifting eyes at suitable locations for modules over 50kg.
Page 248 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Lifting eyes shall be provided at reinforced points on the top of all panels. Suitable plugs (steel or
PVC) shall be provided to cover the holes after the eyes have been removed to prevent the ingress
of dust and water to the specified IP rating.
G. Provide sufficient but at least one gland plate per each cubicle for cables to enter and leave the
panel. Gland plates to be suitable for the imposed loads of trunking, conduit and cables. Trunking
and conduit to be made off onto the gland plates.
H. Cable or trunking access shall be required for suitable entry on top or bottom of the panel as
dictated by the panel location. Removable bolt–on gland plates shall be provided at these entries
and the plate shall be adjacent to the appropriate terminal bar.
I. All accessories mounted through the panel skin shall be suitably rated and fully compliant with the
specified IP rating.
J. Provide panels of best quality folded zinc coated mild steel sheet minimum thickness 1.6mm,
braced and stiffened where necessary. Panels to be degreased and chromate etched, followed by
two coats of primer and stove enameling. Internal surfaces and component mounting plates shall
have a matt white finish.
K. Panels shall be of welded construction using zinc coated mild sheet steel, braced and stiffened
where necessary.
L. All external edges and corners shall be rounded (i.e. either formed or suitably dressed to prevent
sharp edges and corners). Any cutting of manufactured finished surfaces shall be de–burred and
left without sharp edges or protrusions.
M. Internal partitioning plates separating compartments shall be sheet steel.
N. Panels up to 1200mm x 1200mm may be wall mounted. Larger panels to be floor mounted on
100mm builders work in concrete or purpose made integral plinths. Rodent screens to be provided
to prevent rodent entry into panels.
O. All panels to incorporate the following: -
1. Main incoming MCCB

2. Circuit breakers for each item of plant
3. 1 Digital multi-meter
4. Hinged and lockable flush mounting access doors
5. 2 Identical keys for every lock and panel
6. 1 Mains incoming neutral link
Page 249 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
7. 1 Set Control of miniature circuit breaker for low voltage transformer
8. 1 Test switch for operating control voltages only with all power circuits de-energized
9. 1 Set numbered terminals
10. 1 Set engraved labels to BS5378 Part 1
11. BMS control outstation
12. 1 set indicating lamps (Run, trip and alarm)
13. 1 lamp test facility (common)
14. 1 Power ON lamp
15. Space for future expansion (20%)
16. Common and remote alarm terminals
17. Audible alarm and mute/test facility
18. Earth bar with test link
19. Terminal block to connect with fire alarm system
P. All motors to have three position Hand/Off/Auto switches with run and trip lights. In the hand
position no safety features or interlocks are to be overridden.
Q. Within the controls surface mounted single switched metal clad socket to BS 1362 shall be fixed
supplied from a 10A miniature circuit breaker fed through earth leakage circuit breaker. This is for
use by the controls specialist, for lap top computers, data logging equipment or test sets, in addition
to regular maintenance cleanups using blowers. This socket and associated 220volt supply cabling
shall be suitably segregated for from the control wiring and devices.
R. Each panel cubicle shall be provided with internal fluorescent lighting strip energized when door
switch is toggled.
S. Ventilation fans shall be incorporated as required to maintain the internal temperature below the
working temperature of the internal components.
2.2 WIRING AND TERMINATIONS
A. All low voltage wiring shall use PVC insulated cable, Power wiring (between MCC and each load)
shall be stranded with a minimum cross sectional area of 4 mm2 - phase colored XLPE/PVC insulated
multi-core or single core cables depending on design requirements and BOQ conditions. Control
wiring (24V) shall be of flexible type with a minimum cross sectional area of 1.5mm2 - red.
B.Maintenance load break switch shall be installed beside every motor to ensure safety while performing
regular maintenance operations for all equipment.
Page 250 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Provide control circuit transformer and use 24 Volt AC operating supply to suit control components.
Segregate control wiring from power wiring. Provide ventilated plastic trunking for control wiring.
Identify each end of the wire with a unique number using color coded 'O' ring markers. Fit lugs at
termination points. Use cabling of 1.5mm² minimum and of the LSF high temperature rating (Tri-
rated). Life safety control wiring and interfaces with fire alarm and fireman’s override shall be in fire
resistant cable e.g. Pirelli FP400 to BS 6387. See fire alarm and electrical specification for fuller
details.
D. All control circuits shall use the red phase and shall be wired in red cable.
E. All neutral wiring shall be in black cable.
F. The color coding shall be as follows:
1. Phase connections - red, yellow and blue.

2. Neutral connections - black.
3. Earth connections - green/yellow.
4. a.c. voltages below 50V - brown; if the return connection is earthed a green ferrule shall be fitted.
G. Wiring shall be carried on the front surface of the mounting plate, neatly strapped in plastic cable
trunking of the ventilated type, with clip-on covers. Cable sizes shall be rated taking into account all
grouping, bunching and enclosing factors.
H. All wiring to the switch section doors shall be wired in looms with mechanical protection. Any one
loom of control cables shall have a limit of 25 cables within the plastic trunking volume. Wiring
outside the trunking shall be neatly set for connection to terminals or equipment.
I. All control wiring shall be identified with numbered ferrules. These numbers shall be shown on the
schematic wiring diagrams. Control neutral wiring shall be of the ring main principle with no more
than 20 items on any one ring.
J. Panel wiring for DDC controls shall be in screened flexible cable. Extra low voltage wiring and
terminals shall be separated from wiring and terminals for higher voltages.
K. Each screened cable shall have its screen wired to its own terminal on the outgoing terminal strip.
L. The screen shall be earthed at the equipment and not at the terminal strip.
M. All control wiring shall be fitted with crimped terminal ends.
Page 251 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
N. All power wiring shall be fitted with crimped terminal ends where the terminal is of the 'pinch screw'
type.
O. Terminals shall be of the suitably rated, fully numbered and fitted so that extra units may be added.
P. They shall be suitably sized to cater for long runs of externally mounted cable where voltage drops
necessitate a larger size than standard for the connected load.
Q. 20% spare terminals shall be fitted to each control panel. Each terminal rail shall have sufficient
length for 10% additional terminals.
R.All wiring for DDC devices shall be via screw type terminals.
S. Entry to the panel terminals shall be via detachable, undrilled gland plates. Gland plates shall cover the
length of the terminal strip.
T. All panel mounted equipment shall be wired out to terminal strips.
U. Equipment earthing connections shall be provided, and sized according to the anticipated short
circuit current. Earthing connections shall be sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective
earthing for the MCC enclosure.
2.3 EQUIPMENT - ISOLATORS
A. The used main isolating load break switches and fuse switches where used, shall be capable of
opening and closing on-load. Isolating switches shall conform to utilization category AC-3. Isolating
switches and circuit breakers shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 60947. Isolating switches
and circuit breakers shall be suitable for 60 Hz, 3-phase, 4 wire connections.
B.Individual starter isolators installed indoor must be weather proof heavy duty and Nema-3R with gasket.
C. Outdoor isolators shall be heavy duty Nema-4X.
D. Isolators shall be equipped with earthling kit and Neutral kit.
E. A bolted neutral link shall be provided for termination of the incoming cable.
F. Maintenance disconnect switches shall be provided for all served mechanical loads, for star/delta starters
a 6-pole disconnect switch complete with auxiliary switch shall be utilized.
Page 252 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.4 SHORT TIME RATING & FAULT LEVELS
Short time ratings and fault levels are shown on the Electrical drawings and they should be calculated
by the contractor and submitted for approval.
2.5 STARTERS
A. Shall comply with BS EN 60947 Part 4 and be suitable for starting standard industrial cage or wound
rotor motors or as specified in the particular specification.
B.Starters shall be rated for continuous duty unless otherwise specified on drawings or schedules.
C. Utilization categories for contactors in all types of starter shall be IEC 60947 AC-3 unless otherwise
specified for particular applications.
D. Provide short circuit protective devices to each outgoing circuit. Protection to be circuit breaker
sized to suit the full load and starting effects of the connected device. Ensure type 2 co-ordination
to IEC 947.
E. Circuit breakers to be manufactured to BS EN 60947.
F. The used circuit breakers types shall be as follows:
1. Circuit breakers feeding loads up to 0.75kW shall be of the miniature type.

2. Circuit breakers feeding loads 1-7.5kW shall be of the Manual Motor Starter or Motor Circuit
Breaker type.
3. Circuit breakers feeding loads equal or greater than 7.5kW shall be of the magnetic only Moulded
case type.
G. Motor starters types shall be as follows:
1. Motors up to 0.75kW, 230V, D.O.L.

2. Motors 0.75kW – 7.5kW, 400V, D.O.L.
3. Motors 9 kW to 11 kW, 440 V, Star Delta
4. Motors ≥ 15kW Soft Start
H. All starters and speed control systems shall be provided with suitable protection for phase to phase,
phase to neutral and phase to earth faults, overloads, under voltage, over voltage, phase sequence,
and phase failure.
Page 253 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
I. All overload devices shall be arranged for hand resetting. A reset button shall not be provided on
the starter enclosure. All overload relays shall have load contacts of the single-pole changeover
type.
J. Motor starters shall be provided with bolt-free auxiliary contacts for local and remote signaling.
K. Soft starters do not apply for any life safety motor (i.e. smoke fans)
2.6 DIRECT ON LINE (DOL) STARTERS
DOL starters shall be rated for intermittent periodic duty or intermittent duty class 0.3 and comply
with the requirements of utilization category AC-3.
2.7 AUTOMATIC STAR-DELTA (ASD) STARTERS
A. In all types of star-delta starters the correct phase relationship between the star and delta
connections to minimize disturbance on changeover shall be maintained.
B. In all star-delta starters the star and delta contactors shall be electrically and mechanically
interlocked so that they cannot close or be closed at the same time.
C. Where overload relays are connected in the phase circuit the overload relay scales shall be clearly
marked to show whether they represent line current or whether the scale must be multiplied by
1.7 to represent line current.
D. Automatic changeover timers shall be adjustable from one second up to at least 20 seconds but the
transition from star to delta windings shall be achieved without any internal delay. Closed transition
timers shall have tamper-proof factory-set adjustment.
2.8 STARTERS FOR DUAL-WOUND AND POLE-CHANGE MOTORS
A. Shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked so that it is impossible for both high and low speed
contactors to close or be closed at the same time.
B. The parts of the composite starter shall comply with the relevant specification for individual
starters.
C. Adjustable timers shall be fitted into the control circuit so that there is a time delay between
switching off the high speed contactor and switching on the low speed contactor.
Page 254 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. When high speed is selected the motor shall run in low speed for a preset time before changing to
high speed.
2.9 SOFT-START/STOP STARTERS
A. Refer to section 26 24 20 Motor Soft starters.
B. Soft start/stop starters shall be supplied as a unit with an enclosure suitable for panel mounting.
C. The harmonic current spectrum of each soft-start/stop starter shall be provided by the
manufacturer for the calculation and provision of suitable filtration at the electrical switchboard.
D. A bypass contactor shall be provided which isolates the soft start/stop unit when the motor is not
required to run. The contactor shall be arranged to switch 'off-load'.
E. The control panel manufacturer shall calculate the maximum heat dissipation from all soft-start
devices and incorporate adequate ventilation/cooling methods to ensure that the internal
temperature within the panel does not exceed 35°C. The calculations shall be submitted for the
approval of the consultant.
2.10 BUSBARS
A. Provide suitably sized phase bars with full neutral and full earth, fully insulated, fully
compartmentalized primary and secondary busbars. All joints and interconnections to be
accessible for inspection and tightening.
B. Busbars shall be rated and constructed in accordance with BS 159. Neutral bars shall be the same
size as the phase conductor bars.
C. The busbar system shall be housed separately from the panel control sections.
D. The busbar system shall be clearly marked in red capital letters on a white background:
“WARNING – LIVE BUSBARS. SWITCH MAIN ISOLATOR OFF BEFORE REMOVING THIS PANEL” or a
similar wording approved by the CA.
E. Copper busbars shall be air insulated and the phases and neutral bars shall be color identified. The
minimum size of the bars shall be 25mm x 4mm.
F. Busbar chambers shall be arranged for ease of future extension to accommodate further sections.
G. All holes or apertures into the busbar chamber must be sealed to prevent access to live busbars by
operatives when working in the main panel or any panel compartment.
Page 255 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.11 CONTACTORS
A. Shall be of the same manufacturer as the starters. They shall be suitable for use on 3 phase, 4-wire
400/230V, and 60Hz supplies and fitted with 24V 60Hz coils.
B. Contactors shall comply with BS EN 60947 Part 4 and shall be rated for intermittent periodic or
intermittent duty Class 0.3.
C. The utilization category shall generally be AC-3 but category AC-1 may be used where the load is
positively identified as being non-inductive, but excluding tungsten filament lamps.
2.12 RELAYS
Relays shall be fitted with 24V, 60Hz coils. All relays shall have a clearance of 3mm between them.
2.13 TIMERS
Shall be electronic with adjustable ranges.
2.14 INDICATOR LAMPS
Use 24 volt LED type indicator lamps color coded as follows: -
Red - Trip/Alarms
Yellow - Duty
Green - Run
White - Supply Healthy
Lamps to be flush mounted with lamp changing from the front. Lamps to be mounted on access doors.
2.15 FUSES
A. Fuses shall comply with the requirements BS EN 60947
B.Where Applicable panels shall be provided with a spare set of fuses. When commissioning is complete
the panel is to be handed over with this complete set of spare fuses provided as part of the Controls
Sub-contract.
Page 256 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. HRC fuses are to feed all pilot lamps, while the control circuit of each starter and other 240/24V
circuits shall be fed through MCB.
2.16 DIGITAL MULTI-METER
A. Digital multi-meter complete with full voltage, current, frequency, harmonics & power factor
measurements to be connected to BMS station via MODBUS RS485 communication network.
B. The following readings must be provided and to be interfaced via Modbus communication: KWHR,
KVAR, current and phase current, voltage and phase voltage, harmonics, frequency and power
factor
C. Current to be used for ammeters greater than 40A.
2.17 SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND PADLOCKING
A. Where applicable provide padlocking facilities to each outgoing circuit to enable safe working
procedures.
B. Provide hard wired and mechanical interlocks for all safety devices or procedures (i.e. not software
generated).
2.18 EARTHING
A. Provide an earth busbar system across each compartment for ultimate connection to the Building
earthing system.
B. The unit earthing system shall be capable of carrying the full rated fault current for 1 second.
Comply with BS 7430.
2.19 DISCRIMINATION
Provide verification that final selection of protective devices ensures correct electrical discrimination.
2.20 GENERAL
A. Each starter/contactor shall be controlled from a Manual-Off-Auto switch on the panel facade. Each
starter/Contactor shall be provided with RUN/TRIP Indicating lamps as shown on the drawings.
B. The RUN position on all selector switches shall allow its associated plant to run out of normal
sequential control provided all safety interlocks are satisfied. This facility is primarily for
commissioning/maintenance purposes.
Page 257 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Wiring arrangements shall permit all starters/contactors to be de-energized from remotely
mounted lock-off stop buttons or local isolator auxiliary contacts.
D. Indicator lamps shall be provided for indicating the presence of each incoming phase to panels.
E. Indictor lamps shall be provided to indicate that the 230 V control circuit is healthy. A push button
connected to all lamps will be used as a lamp test method to check the functionality of the lamp.
F. A 13 Amp switched socket outlet shall be provided within each panel fed via an ELCB from the live
side of the main panel isolator.
G. Each section of the control panel shall have an internal long fluorescent strip light. They shall, in the
case of multiple section panels, be controlled by a single switch with an indicator lamp on the main
isolator section.
H. The panel shall be suitably wrapped for delivery to site with 500 grade anti-static polythene.
I. Each panel section shall be provided with a lifting eye in each corner.
J. Unless otherwise indicated, enclosures degree of protection will be IP 55 for indoor use, while it
should be IP-65 for outdoor use.
2.21 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The following CAD prepared drawings shall be provided for each panel:
1. Schematic internal and external wiring diagrams.

2. General arrangement drawings detailing internal and external equipment layouts.
3. Detailed label engraving drawings.
B. A file holder shall be provided in each control panel.
2.22 TESTING
A. All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to dispatch, for loose connections,
correct terminations and compliance with wiring diagrams. In addition, functional checks shall be
carried out in the works to ensure that all interlocking and sequencing is in accordance with the
performance requirements of the specification. The Owners Authorized Representative shall be
given seven days written notice of such tests so that he may attend if he so desires.
B. With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted, the panels
shall be subjected to a High Voltage test of 2.5kV for one minute, across the following points:
Page 258 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Phase to phase
2. Phase to neutral
3. Phase to earth
4. Neutral to earth
C. This shall be followed by an insulation resistance test with an approved type of 500V testing
instrument.
D. With all electronic components removed and with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted, an
insulation resistance of not less than 20 Mega ohms shall be obtained between each of the
following points:
1. Phase to Phase
2. Phase to neutral
3. Phase to earth
4. Neutral to earth
E. Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the Engineer within
fourteen days of the tests.
2.23 APPROVAL OF STANDARDS
The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the Engineer who shall carry out
periodic inspections of completed work and work in progress.
2.24 SCHEDULES
A. Details of the panels are included in the Motor Control Panel Drawings.
B. The BMS specialist should coordinate the motors and control equipment quantities and ratings with
the other trades and take any approved corrections at no cost to the contract.
2.25 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. The Contractor shall supply all related equipment detailed within this specification. Any items of
equipment or works not specifically mentioned in this specification but necessary for the correct or
safe operation of any item of Project shall be deemed included in the contract scope of works.
Page 259 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. The Contractor responsibilities shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Supply, manufacture and works testing of all motor control panels.

2. Supply and fit hardboard protection on all sections of above panels and enclosures, in such a
manner that allows free operation of doors, facade mounted switches, push buttons etc., to
protect the paint work during commissioning.
3. Storage as necessary, transportation and installation of all motor control panels and enclosures.
4. Supply and installation of all sub-main power cabling from the motor control panels and enclosures
to each item of plant.
5. Identification of all sub-mains power and controls cabling from the motor control panels at both
ends of each core, using the same numbering as its associated outgoing MCC/enclosure terminal.
6. Ensure all control devices are positioned such that maximum stability of control for each system
can be achieved.
7. Supply and fit an engraved 'Formica' label for all controls items, equipment and plant associated
with the control system, incorporating the appropriate identification reference number as detailed
on the Motor Control Panel Equipment Schedules.
8. All labels shall be fixed with bright finish instrument head screws or plastic flat headed push in
rivets of the same color as the label.
9. Warranty of the entire system for 12 months following Practical Completion.
10. When submitting his, the contractor shall tender clearly describe any work necessary for the
proper completion of his package which has not been included for in his tender and which he may
require to be executed and paid for by others; any such work not specifically stated and described
shall be deemed to have been included in his tender.
2.26 ELECTRICAL - GENERAL
A. The equipment supplied shall be suitable for operation on 400/230V, 60Hz supplies. Any special
tolerances, screening and earthing requirements shall be included in the contractor scope of work.
B. In order to avoid corruption of the BMS equipment operation by electrical interference, all wiring
shall be installed to minimize coupling of electromagnetic and electrostatic interference to low
bulldog signal and data wiring. The preferred method of achieving this shall be by ensuring a
physical separation of greater than 50 mm between the power supply cables and the signal and
data cables.
C. Where mixed wiring is unavoidable braided screen mains cable, dressed close to metalwork, is
preferred, but the Contractor shall clearly specify the methods by which he intends to eliminate any
such interference with his signal and data transmission.
Page 260 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. The contractor shall provide 10% of spare components referred to the total number of MCC
components of the whole project, taken for all types, sizes, and ratings of circuit breakers, load
break switches, maintenance disconnect switches, contactors, thermal overload relays, control
relays, selector switches, indication lamps, internal fluorescent lighting.
5 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply
circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and
configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
C. Push-Button Stations: In covers of magnetic controllers for manually started motors where
indicated, start contact connected in parallel with sealing auxiliary contact for low-voltage
protection.
D. Hand-off-automatic Selector Switches: In covers of manual and magnetic controllers of motors

started and stopped by automatic controls or interlocks with other equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor control centers/panels according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Anchor each motor control center/panel assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level and grout
sills flush with motor control center mounting surface.
C. Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch as indicated.
D. Power and Control Wiring: Run in separate conduits unless otherwise specified.
E. Rigid conduits shall not terminate in nor be fastened to a motor frame or base.
F. Flexible conduits to be used at motor connections. Allow sufficient slack to permit motor to slide
over adjustable length of motor base.
G. Flexible Conduits: Length and radius to be sufficient to permit bending of feeder cables without
damage to conductor or its insulation.
Page 261 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
H. Flexible Conduits: Do not use in place of rigid conduits except at motor connections, unless
otherwise specified.
I. Support conduit with conduit supports in an adequate approved manner.
J. Conduits shall not cross pipe or vent shafts, ducts or openings. They shall be run a minimum 100
mm away from pipes of non-electrical services.
K. Conduits: Install so that moisture can drain to lowest point. Provide screw plug at all low points for
draining.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs according to Division 26
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for motor control centers, including
control sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and
cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor control centers.
C. Starters: Fix detailed wiring diagram inside enclosure cover to clearly indicate circuits.
D. Starters: Identify control and power wires either by distinctive colored insulation, engraved tags or
other approved method.
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
B. Protect circuits with high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers. Auxiliary supply for controls
other than from main power circuit, to be effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on main isolator.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic control devices according to an indicated
wiring diagram or one that is manufacturer approved, where available.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices that have no
safety functions when switch is in the hand position Connect selector switches with motor control
circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-
pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
3.5 EARTHING
A. Earth motors by connecting green insulated conductor from earthing bushing in starter to motor
frame. Run earth conductor together with circuit wiring and terminate in motor terminal box,
provided earth terminal in box is connected to motor frame. If this is not feasible, extend earth
conductor through insulated bushed opening in terminal box and connect to motor base.
Page 262 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Earth equipment by connecting non-current carrying metal parts of system to earth source. Non-
currents carrying metal parts include conduits, cable trays, outlet boxes, cabinets, enclosures,
doors, grilles, and barriers protecting or shielding electrical equipment from direct access.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten motor control center bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
A. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on motor control
centers / panels after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and standards.
Inspect conditions within motor control centers / panels and verify insulation conditions by use of
a megger.
B. Advise Employer and Engineer in advance of dates and times tests shall be performed on cables.
C. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests required
by the Governing Regulations and Standards.
D. All tests must be witnessed by the Employer and Engineer and technical representatives.
E. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for tests
F. Energization to be accorded only after approved protection calculations have been accepted and
BMS & fire alarm connections set. Pre-testing of the MCPs shall be carried out by the contractor’s
own construction power supply
G. Testing: After installing motor control center and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements, as per approved method
statement.
1. Procedures: Perform recommended visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test, as listed
in NETA. Certify compliance with test parameters. Test method and test result recording formats
shall be to engineer’s approval.
2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
3. Submit settings along with justification to support them both at overload and short circuit.
H. Circuit Breakers: Co-ordinate earth fault detection and interruption with those of main upstream
incoming breaker on main distribution panel and submit settings.
I. Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation and correct setting.
J. Low Suction Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation and correct
setting.
K. Equipment and motors shall be tested for continuity, freedom from short circuits, and grounds and
meggered to assure adequate resistance.
Page 263 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
L. Correct malfunctioning installations at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
M. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship
and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of motor control centers. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally,
using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate solid-state and variable-speed

controllers and motor control centers, and train the Employer's maintenance personnel.
1. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance as specified in Division 1.

Include training relating to equipment operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.
3.10 BUILDERS WORK
A. The Contractor shall include for all cutting away, structural holes and foundations required for the
controls system, as detailed with marked up drawings, via or by the Controls Specialist, together
with all the necessary making good after such work.
B. The Contractor shall include for all scaffolding and working platforms required by the Controls
Specialist including the setting up and taking down of such items.
3.11 INTERCONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
A. The contractor is totally responsible to workshop drawings to assure provision and compatibility
with all required data points as per schedule of points and control schematics of the BMS and Fire
alarm packages.
Page 264 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 262500
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
PART 1: GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1
C. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The requirements
of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers, section 262816.
F. Switchboards, section 262413.
5.1.1 Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all busbar trunking in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of busbar trunking of the types and capacities
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60364, IEC 60439-2, IEC
61439, IEEE C37.2, NEC, IEEE, SASO 1610 Standards pertaining to busbar trunking. Provide busbar trunking
products and components which have been listed and labeled.
1.16 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for busbar trunking
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensions layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of busbar trunking
including, but not limited to, offsets and connections. Show accurately scaled busbar trunking with locations
of supports and fittings, including fire-stops and weather seals. Indicate spatial relationship of busbar
Page 265 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
trunking to other associated equipment.
D. Type Test Certificates: Submit type test certificates to verify compliance of the main equipment with the
1.17 WARRANTY
BB. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
CC. Warranty shall include:

use.
DD. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
6 PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 BUSBAR TRUNKING
2.1.1 General
2.1.1.1 Provide busbar trunking for use as Feeder and plug-in types in the building. The busbar trunking
shall comply with IEC 61439.
2.1.1.2 The busbar trunking Feeder/Plug-in type (feeding the IT/UPS loads and data center loads) shall
be designed and constructed for use on a 400V three-phase five conductors [L1, L2, L3 + N + E],
60 Hz system with earthed neutral and having a source fault level of (40 KA for 1000 KVA
transformers, 50 KA for 1600 KVA transformers, 60KA for transformers 2000 KVA, 70KA for
transformers 2500 KVA, 80 KA for transformers 3150 KVA) at 400 V for 1.0 second. The neutral
bar shall be equal to the life bar size, and the earth bar shall be half of the life bar size.
Page 266 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.1.1.3 The busbar trunking Feeder/Plug-in types (feeding the other loads) shall be designed and
constructed for use on a 400V three-phase five conductors [L1, L2, L3 + N + E] 60 Hz system with
earthed neutral and having a source fault level of (40 KA for 1000 KVA transformers, 50 KA for
1600 KVA transformers, 60KA for transformers 2000 KVA, 70KA for transformers 2500 KVA, 80
KA for transformers 3150 KVA) at 400 V for 1.0 second. The neutral bar and earth bar shall be
half of the life bar size.
2.1.1.4 The busbar trunking shall be of the totally enclosed sandwiched insulated type provided with
busbars.
2.1.1.5 The ratings of busbars of trunking shall be as detailed in the specification, schedules,
contract/tender documents and drawings.
2.1.1.6 The bus bar insulation and insulating supports will be made from insulation possessing flame
retardant and self-extinguishing, die-electric and non-hygroscopic properties.
2.1.1.7 The bus shall carry its rated current continuously, without exceeding the temperature rise of 55º
C over an outside ambient of 40 ºC.
2.1.1.8 The joints shall be of single bolt pressure design providing optimum electrical contact and
mechanical strength.
2.2 Busbars
2.2.1.1 Busbars shall be generally as specified in IEC 61439.
2.2.1.2 The busbars shall be of rectangular or circular section tinned hard drawn high conductivity
Bimetal.
2.2.1.3 Each busbar except the earth shall be totally enclosed in insulating material. Insulated and anti-
tracking supports for the busbar shall be provided at regular spaced intervals of 300/600 mm.
The supports shall be suitable for use of the busbar trunking in any position. In vertical positions
the supports shall be capable of holding the vertical thrust of the busbars.
2.2.1.4 Jointing of the busbars shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer,
using purpose-made links throughout.
2.2.1.5 Where straight length of busbar trunking are installed in excess of 40 meters expansion joints
shall be fitted in the busbar run.
2.2.1.6 Phase bus bars will be completely insulated with epoxy coating or mylar as per the manufacturer
recommendations.
2.2.1.7 The joints for splicing adjacent sections together will be silver plated and enclosed by either
molded insulation bolts or approved taped insulation system.
Page 267 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.2.1.8 The metal housing surfaces will be chemically cleaned and treated to provide a bond between
the primer light gray paint and the metal surface paint film.
2.2.1.9 The exterior surfaces will be cleaned and sprayed with a finishing coat of paint before assembly
of the equipment. The color of metal enclosed bus will be manufacturer's standard.
2.2.1.10 After assembly, all conductor joints shall be accessible by the removal of covers in the enclosure.
Such covers shall be weather-proof by neoprene gaskets or other suitable means.
2.2.1.11 The preliminary layout will be furnished as a part of the material requisition. And the complete
installation shall be coordinated throughout and shall consist of standard sections and special
sections and fittings provided to suit the installation. And all material and installation shall
comply with the applicable standards.
2.3 Trunking
2.3.1.1 The busbars shall be enclosed in metal trunking which shall be mechanically and electrically
continuous, and the metal thickness proposed for all trunking, accessories and connectors shall
be shown on the Manufacturer's Drawings.
2.3.1.2 The trunking shall be of the non-ventilated totally enclosed type to provide a degree of
protection not less than IP 54 as per IEC 60529.
2.3.1.3 All non-current-carrying metal associated with trunking for use in enclosed buildings shall be
finished in accordance with IEC 60364. Where trunking is used in open buildings, i.e. with at least
one side permanently or temporarily open to the atmosphere, protection shall be in accordance
with IEC 60529.
2.3.1.4 The busbar trunking shall be designed and constructed suitable for mounting in horizontal flat
or edgewise position and in the vertical plane. Fixing points shall be at any position in the run,
with unsupported spans not greater than 3 meters.
2.3.1.5 Fire resisting barriers shall be fitted in trunking where it passes through fire compartment walls
and floors. In vertical runs of trunking, irrespective of fire resisting barriers at floor levels, where
the floor to ceiling height exceeds 3 meters.
2.4 TAP-OFF POINTS
2.4.1.1 All lengths of trunking shall be provided with tapping positions at not greater than 600 mm
center.
2.4.1.2 Each tap-off position shall be provided with covers or shutters to screen entry to live busbars
when the position is not occupied with a tap-off unit.
2.4.1.3 The tap-off positions shall be arranged so that the plug- in contractors self-align with the busbars.
Page 268 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.4.1.4 Tap-off positions shall be suitable for tap-off units to be plugged in either below or above the
busbars.
2.5 TAP-OFF BOXES AND ACCESSORIES
2.5.1.1 Tap-off boxes shall be rated as detailed in the drawings attached to this Specification.
2.5.1.2 Tap-off boxes shall be constructed of metal sheet complete with key lock and shall be complete
with hinged lids and conduit entry gland. The boxes shall house MCCB (solid state type,
adjustable for L,S,I) with ground kit, neutral link and have polarity and rating as detailed in the
drawings.
2.5.1.3 Where tap-off boxes are to be inserted into live busbar trunking, they shall be designed and
constructed so that current carrying metal is not exposed during insertion or removal and that
the box in connected to earth before contact is made with live busbars. The box shall remain
earth during removal until all live connections are disconnected. The design shall ensure that
the tap-off can only be inserted to give the correct polarity.
2.5.1.4 Where change of direction or termination occurs in a busbar run, the manufacturer's purpose-
made bends, tees pieces, cross-overs, reducers, and end covers shall be used.
2.5.1.5 Where switches are connected to the busbars through tap-off points an interlock shall be
provided to prevent removal with the switch in the 'ON' position. These switches shall comply
with the requirement in the LV switchers section of the Specifications.
2.5.1.6 Each tap-off unit shall be fitted with terminal blocks in order to hook up the outgoing cables.
The size and rating of these terminal blocks shall be chosen according to the prospective
outgoing cable size as indicated in the drawings.
2.5.1.7 All tap-off units feeding the data center IT racks shall be provided with:
 Digital meters to measure (amp., voltage, power (in kw), THD for (I and V).
 Iindustrial sockets (3p+N+E or 1p+N+E) with the same rating as the tap-off units.
 Interfaced with DCIM system through mod-bus communication module.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
6.1.1 Where change of direction or termination occurs in a busbar run, the manufacturer's purpose-made
bends, tees pieces, cross-overs, reducers, and end covers shall be used.
Page 269 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
7 PART 3: EXECUTION
8
3.1 INSPECTION
8.1.1 Examine conditions under which busbar trunking are to be installed. Notify engineer in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
9
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 The busbars trunking shall be installed so that the maximum unsupported span does not exceed 3
meters. Any fixings used shall be contractor of mild steel angle or channel finished to the same standard
as the trunking and shall not cause any long term corrosion or electrolytic action.
3.2.2 Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the burrs and rough edges shall be removed
and the finish made good. Any corrosion which has occurred shall be removed and the area treated with
a rust -proof agent. The finish shall then be made good by the application of either a zinc rich epoxy
primer or equal alternative, and for class 2 finishes this shall be followed by coat of color matching paint.
3.2.3 Runs of trunking shall not be used to support other equipment or services nor shall any cables be
installed in the trunking unless the trunking is specially designed for these purposes.
3.2.4 Where busbar trunking passes through fire barriers, walls, floors and ceilings, fire resting barriers shall
be fitted in the trunking and the hole surrounding the trunking shall be made good to the full thickness
with fire resisting material to provide fire resistance equal to that of the structure through which the
trunking passes
3.2.5 In vertical runs of busbar trunking thrust supports shall be fitted either at each floor level or at 3 meters
spacing whichever is the lesser dimension.
3.2.6 Incoming cables and all out line shall be supported to avoid appreciable mechanical loads being imposed
on the busbar trunking.
10
3.3.1 Prior to installing, test for electrical continuity of bonding, and earthing connections, and to demonstrate
compliance with grounding requirements.
3.3.2 Electrically energize Bus Bar Trunking systems and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
Page 270 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 262713
ELECTRICITY METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, Section 260500, apply to work of this section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to instruments and metering specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
complete and make ready for operation. Instrument and metering shall be in accordance with
Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of instrument and metering of the types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years. Provide instruments and metering produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable
Manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, IEC 61554, IEC
62052, IEC 61869, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to instrument and metering.
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Page 271 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for instrument and metering.
B. Compliance Sheet: Submit compliance sheet with the specs item by item, duly signed by the
1.5 WARRANTY
EE. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
FF. Warranty shall include:

use.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may be required
installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not cancelled due to the
repair work.
GG. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
All electrical indicating instruments shall comply with IEC 61554, DIN/VDE standards and shall be digital
type.
2.2 INSTRUMENTS
Page 272 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
All electrical indicating instruments shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
All ammeters and voltmeters shall be digital type.
All instruments shall be flush mounted.
B. COMMON SPECIFICATIONS FOR DIGITAL POWER METERS
The digital power meters shall be in accordance with IEC 61557, IEC 62053 and IEC 61000.
The meters shall monitor the following functions:
Voltage (total, per phase L-L and L-N).
Current (per phase and neutral).
Frequency.
Real, reactive and apparent power (total and per phase).
True power factor (total and per phase).
Displacement power factor (total and per phase).
Percentage of unbalanced current, voltage per phase L-L and voltage per phase L-N.
THD and min/max readings.
The display shall be backlit LCD, multilingual, bar graphs, 6 lines and 4 lines concurrent values.
Page 273 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
All digital power meters shall be immune to radiated fields, fast transients, surge, magnetic fields
and voltage dips as per IEC 61000-4.
All digital power meters shall be provided with RS-485 Modbus RTU interface to communicate with
SCADA systems.
All meters shall operate at temperature -25°C to 70°C and humidity range 5-95% RH at 50°C (non-
condensing).
2.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTS)
All CTs shall comply with all relevant requirements of IEC 61869, DIN/VDE standards and shall have an
Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Page 274 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Tariff metering Accuracy Class Designation 0.5
Non-tariff metering Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Switchgear indicating instruments Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Motor starter ammeters Accuracy Class Designation 3.0
Protection (overcurrent, UEF) Accuracy Class Designation 10p
Protection (UEF) Accuracy Class Designation x
Unless otherwise specified in the schedules or drawings, the CTs are required for use under service
conditions not more onerous than those set out in IEC 61869, DIN/VDE standards.
CTS shall be designed either for measurement or for protection and shall not be used in a dual-purpose
role serving both instruments and protective gear.
Unless otherwise specified, all CTs shall have 5A secondary windings.
So far as it is practicable, all CTs shall be of the ring type. Wound primary CTs will only be accepted when
the rated primary current is so low as to make the ring type impracticable.
One side of the secondary of each CT shall be connected to earth at one point via a bolted removable
link
For mattering circuits, either, a proprietary front of panel CT test block or special "shorting" terminals
within the panel shall be provided for test purposes.
All CTs whether of the ring type or the wound primary type, for use at voltages exceeding 1000 V shall
be epoxy resin encapsulated.
Where dual-ratio CTs are specified, they shall be provided with two separate secondary windings
capable of being connected in series or in parallel to give the required ratio.
All CTs shall be provided with a rating plate bearing the information as stated in IEC 60051, DIN/VDE
standards. All CTs shall be installed in accessible location. The secondary connections shall be brought
out by means of insulated leads, and made off on a suitable terminal block-mounted in a readily
accessible position.
Magnetization curves and/or type Test Certificates shall be provided for all CTs associated with
protection devices.
Every CT shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the total burden of the instruments, relays,
and/or other apparatus which it is to serve.
Page 275 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.4 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall be of the type, rating, and voltage ratio specified in the schedules or
drawings.
All voltage transformers shall comply with all relevant requirements of IEC 61869 and shall have an
Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Metering Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Switchgear indicating instruments Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Motor starter voltmeters Accuracy Class Designation 3.0
Protection Accuracy Class Designation 3p
Unless other specified in the schedules or drawings, the voltage transformers are required for use under
service conditions not more than those set out in IEC 60051, DIN/VDE standards.
Voltage transformers designed for a primary voltage not exceeding 4000 V shall be the air insulated
type, with the windings encapsulated in epoxy resin or other suitable synthetic material.
Unless otherwise specified, all voltage transformers shall be designed for a secondary output voltage of
110 V.
Each voltage transformer shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the total burden of the
apparatus or instruments which it is to serve.
The insulation resistance of each voltage transformer shall be indelibly marked on the shipping/dispatch
label.
2.5 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
Page 276 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
The test to be carried out shall include but not necessarily to: -
3. Clean the unit.
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method

in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
c. Perform thermographic survey
d. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide contact.
e. Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation.
f. Verify correct primary and secondary fuse sizes for voltage transformers.
g. Lubrication requirements
h. Perform as-left tests.
B. Electrical Tests - Current Transformers
Page 277 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter, if
applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and wiring-to-ground at 1000 volts
dc. For units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer.
4. Perform a ratio-verification test using the voltage or current method in accordance with ANSI/IEEE
C57.13.1. 1 (IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Relaying Current Transformers).
5. Perform an excitation test on transformers used for relaying applications in accordance with
ANSI/IEEE C57.13.1. (IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Relaying Current Transformers).
6. Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals.
7. When applicable, perform insulation-resistance and dielectric withstand tests on the primary
winding with the secondary grounded.
8. Verify that current circuits are grounded and have only one grounding point in accordance with
ANSI/IEEE C57.13.3 (IEEE Guide for the Grounding of Instrument Transformer Secondary Circuits
and Cases).
C. Electrical Tests - Voltage Transformers
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter, if

applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Test voltages

shall be applied for one minute. For units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Perform a polarity test on each transformer to verify the polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as
applicable.
Page 278 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
4. Perform a turns ratio test on all tap positions, if applicable.
5. Measure voltage circuit burdens at transformer terminals.
6. Perform a dielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the secondary windings connected
to ground. The test voltage shall be applied for one minute.
D. Electrical Tests - Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformers
1. Perform all tests indicated in item 2.5.C (Electrical Tests - Voltage Transformers).
2. Measure capacitance of capacitor sections.
3. Measure power-factor or dissipation-factor in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s

published data.
E. Test Values
2. Bolt-torque levels
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated
in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available, investigate any values
which deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
4. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings.
5. Compare measured burdens to instrument transformer ratings.
6. Ratio accuracies shall be within 0.5 percent of nameplate or manufacturer's published data.
7. The insulation shall withstand the over potential test voltage applied.
Page 279 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
8. Capacitance of capacitor sections of coupling-capacitance voltage transformers shall be in
9. Power-factor or dissipation-factor shall be in accordance with test equipment manufacturer’s

published data.
F. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
2. Verify tightness of electrical connections.
3. Inspect cover gasket, cover glass, condition of spiral spring, disk clearance, contacts, and case-
shorting contacts, as applicable.
5. Clean the unit.
6. Verify freedom of movement, end play and alignment of rotating disk (s)
G. Electrical Tests
1. Verify accuracy of meters at all cardinal points.
2. Calibrate meters in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
3. Verify all instrument multipliers.
Page 280 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examine conditions under which instrument and metering are to be installed and notify in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
The tests to be carried out in accordance to IET 17th. Edition, BS 7671, all other relevant international
standards.
Upon installation at site all instruments and metering should be subjected to testing as performed in the
factory to ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install instrument and metering as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry pact to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves infection.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of instrument and metering.
A. Prior to energization of instrument and metering devices test devices for intended function Replace
malfunctioning units with new units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements
Page 281 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION - 262726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL

C. Raceways and boxes for electrical systems, section 260533.
D. The requirements of this section apply to wiring devices specified elsewhere in these specifications.
complete and make ready for operation by the Employer, all wiring devices in accordance with
drawings and specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring devices, of types, sizes,
than 3 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, BS 1363, IEC
60309, IEC 90884, SASO, and IEEE Standards pertaining to wiring devices. Provide wiring devices
which are DIN listed and labelled. Provide device plates which are DIN listed.
govern.
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on wiring devices.
B. Samples: Submit samples of all wiring devices included in the contract.
1.5 WARRANTY
HH. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
II. Warranty shall include:

Page 282 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
use.
JJ. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for five years for dual technology passive
movement detector and at least twelve months for all other items starting from the date of
substantial completion of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Switch plates, socket-outlet plates and similar items shall be of brushed stainless steel as
approved by the Engineer.
B. Decorative finishes of metal plates shall comply with appropriate standards, as mentioned
elsewhere. The finish and/or color shall be standard throughout the installation unless
otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer.
C. Switches shall comply with reference standards and be suitable for use on inductive and
resistive loads. They shall be single pole for 1-phase and neutral supply and double pole for
2-phase supply, unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer. W here switches are
mounted adjacent one to another, they shall be grouped in a single enclosure and share a
common switch plate.
D. Where indicated, switches with pilot lamps shall be provided. This lamp shall be a 6 Watt
neon lamp with resistor and red colored lens unless otherwise indicated.
E. Plugs from the same manufacturer as that of the socket outlets shall be provided with all types
of socket-outlets, and handed over to Engineer.
F. All sockets, switches and disconnect switches marked weather-proof shall be as follow:
 “IP-55” in all mechanical rooms, underground parking areas, kitchen and all similar
areas.
 “IP-65” in all garbage rooms, workshops, wet areas and all similar areas.
 “IP-67” for all outdoor installation.
G. All switches, sockets and disconnect switches marked explosion proof shall be classified
(Zone 1 II 2G, Zone 21 II 2D) and temperature class (T6).
2.2 INDOOR LIGHTING SWITCHES
A. Lighting switches shall be UL listed for the current and voltages indicated and shall comply
with SASO, BS.
B. Lighting switches for interior use shall be heavy duty, AC, single or double pole, minimum 10A with
number of ways as shown on the Drawings and mounted on adjustable grid enclosed in metal box.
Page 283 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Where switches are to be flush type they shall be supplied with overlapping cover plates finished
flush with the sides of the metal box.
D. Remote lighting control panel for contactor control: Multiple two ways momentary on/off push
switch assembly, with an “ON” pilot light for each circuit controlled (remote contactor). Panel and
box are to be sheet steel construction, with see. - through steel-frame acrylic door and trim, handle
and lock, enclosure protection IP42 to IEC 144 for indoor installation and IP55/IP65/IP67 for outdoor
installation.
2.3 OUTDOOR LIGHTING SWITCHES
A. All outdoor lighting switches shall have the characteristics as described above for indoor lighting
switches, but be complete with a gasket forming splash proof and dustproof enclosures.
B. Outdoor weather proof switches shall comprise cast brass or epoxy coated cast iron or copper
free aluminum, NEMA type 4 gasketted enclosure or (IP-55). These shall be listed for wet locations
as per NEC.
C. A suitable drain hole shall be provided.
2.4 DOOR AND CEILING SWITCHES

A. The door and ceiling switches shall be complying with SASO, BS and other applicable standards
and suitable for the intended application on site.
B. The door switches shall be plunger operated, rated for a minimum of 3 Amperes at 230 volts and
suitable for mounting on all types of wooden and metal doors of the project.
C. Each door switch shall have both normally close and normally open switch contacts which shall
give facilities to open or close the supply circuit whenever door is opened. Appropriate switch
contact shall be used according to the site requirements and intended application.
D. The door switches shall be furnished complete with the back box and front plate, suitable to be
mounted on the required doors. The finish of the front plate shall match with the finish of other
door hardware or as directed by the Engineer.
Page 284 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. The ceiling switches shall be single pole or double pole, one way or two ways, rated 6 amperes
or more at 230 Volts, as required for the intended application and as directed by the Engineer.
F. The ceiling switches shall operate on pull to make or pull to break principle, in accordance with
the site requirements. These shall be provided with a minimum of 1500 mm long nylon
switch/pull card to operate the switch. The length of pull cord shall be made suitable for the
accessibility of users in all situations of operations.
G. The ceiling or door switches in wet locations shall be weather proof, NEMA type-4 or (IP-55).
2.5 RECEPTACLES
A. All 230/400 V receptacles shall meet SASO or IEC or BS requirements. shall be according SASO or
as approved by Engineer.
B. Isolated ground receptacles shall have an insulating barrier to isolate the ground contacts from
the mounting strap. The receptacles shall be clearly marked.
C. All indoor use 230/400 V receptacles shall be single or duplex, two-pole, 3- wire, grounding type.
Rating as indicated on the drawings.
D. Blades for all receptacles shall be straight, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Back wiring shall be suitable for feed-through wiring and side wiring shall be by means of captive
type terminal screws with extra-large slotted heads.
F. A grounding terminal shall be provided in addition to the safety grounding clip.
G. Copper alloy U- ground contacts with double-wipe design and power contacts shall meet SASO
plug retention requirements.
H. Wrap around mounting strap shall be locked to Bakelite base.
I. Male plug caps for 230/400 V receptacles shall be of the cord grip armored type with heavy
phenolic housing. These shall be from the same manufacturer as that of the receptacles.
J. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles shall be provided for all such locations where required
as per NEC or shown on the Drawings. Units shall trip at 30 or 300 milli-Amperes of ground
current as required and shall comply with SASO or BS. GFI receptacles shall be capable of
individual as well as “downstream” operation. A push-to-test mechanism shall be provided to
ensure proper operation.
Page 285 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
K. All receptacles in damp and/or wet locations or where indicated to be weatherproof, shall
incorporate a face plate and cover constructed from die cast copper-free aluminum with a baked-
on powder epoxy finish, cover hinge with stainless steel spring and screws and an ethylene-
propylene gasket. These receptacles shall be listed for wet locations as per NEC.
2.6 INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS

A. Industrial socket outlets shall be single or multi-phase, of the types and ratings as indicated on
the Drawings and schedules.
B. Socket outlets shall have an enclosure of IP44 for indoor installation or IP67 (where marked
weather proof type), integrated with switch or without it, as shown on the Drawings and required
on site.
C. Single phase socket outlets shall be with two poles and earthing pin and three phase socket
outlets shall be with three poles and earthing pin, with or without neutral pin, as shown on the
Drawings and required on site.
D. The industrial socket outlets shall be designed so that the grounding pole is permanently
connected to the housing. The grounding pole shall make contact before the line poles are
engaged, when the plug is inserted into the socket.
E. The plug sleeve shall also make contact with the housing of socket outlet, before the line and
load poles make contact.
F. The industrial socket outlets shall include cast back box, angle adapter, gaskets and a screw type
gasketted watertight cap with chain fastener.
G. Each industrial socket outlet shall be provided with plug from the same manufacturer as that of
the socket outlet.
H. All industrial sockets shall be supplied complete with matching plugs.
2.7 COOKER CONNECTION UNITS

A. Cooker connection units shall be double pole type with required current ratings complying with
SASO or BS standards and other codes of practice mentioned elsewhere in the Specifications
and/or on the Drawings.
B. All units shall be fitted with pilot light.
C. Finishes shall be as described elsewhere in this Specification and as indicated on the Drawings
or as directed by the Engineer.
D. All units shall be of flush type with an overlapping front cover.
E. Where surface mounted installations are required on site, a suitable adaptor box shall be
provided.
Page 286 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
F. These connection units can also be utilized for other indoor fixed appliances such as window
type air-conditioners, washer, dryers, etc., but without 13 A switch socket outlet.
2.8 FUSED CLOCK CONNECTORS
A. Fused clock connections shall comprise a socket with fused plug. The plug shall be secured to
the socket by means of a screw. The connector shall be mounted on a metal box set flush into
the wall.
B. The front plate of the fused clock connector shall have same finish as that of other wiring devices.
C. The fused plug shall be fitted with 3 A cartridge fuse link on one pole and shall have facilities for
earthing the metal work of the clock.
2.9 OUTLETS for low current systems

A. The outlets for all low current systems such as telephone, data, television, etc. shall conform to
the requirements given in respective sections of low current systems contained elsewhere in
these Specifications.
B. The cover or face plates of the outlets for all low current systems shall be of similar style and
finish to that specified for the associated lighting switches and socket outlets and shall be
suitable for mounting recessed or surface as required on site.
2.10 DUAL TECHNOLOGY PASSIVE MOVEMENT DETECTOR (PD)

A. Dual Technology passive movement detector (PD) shall be located in appropriate locations to
minimize energy consumption, through daylight harvesting and occupancy detection control. The
sensor shall contain a photoelectric sensor, a motion detector (PIR and ultrasonic) in the same
package. The sensor shall be available in ceiling or wall mount packages.
B. Each PD shall be provided with No. one or two silent contactors each 16A/230V (rating to be
confirmed by the contractor based on the final approved selection of the lighting fixtures) to control
one or two power circuits as indicated on the drawings, and the silent contactor shall be installed
in a ventilated metallic box above the false ceiling.
C. Dual Technology passive movement detector (PD) shall be easily configurable to achieve daylight
control. The sensor shall be capable of acting like a conventional motion detector, with a user-
definable timer. Sensors shall incorporate 8 preset control modes for motion detection and 8 preset
control modes for illuminance control, to provide effective occupancy and daylight harvesting
control. The sensor should also be capable of providing PID illuminance control for applications
where continues regulation is preferred. It shall be possible to dynamically enable and disable the
sensor by sending a network message. Sensors shall incorporate manual adjustments such as
potentiometers to set luminance thresholds levels. All configuration data required for normal
operation including area, illuminance thresholds, motion detect actions etc. should reside in the
sensor’s non-volatile memory.
The sensors also incorporate a segmented click-up bezel surrounding the PIR motion sensor
element, which enables a portion of the sensing field to be readily masked to prevent nuisance
detection from adjacent doorways or corridors.
D. UL and CUL listed, 5 years warranty shall be provided.
Page 287 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. The sensors shall have the following characteristics: -
 Coverage:
a. For PIR detection at 3 mt. height & very high sensitivity:
1) Diameter (Ø): 11.5 mt.
2) Surface area: 100 mt2.
b. For US detection at 3 mt. height & very high sensitivity:

1) Diameter (Ø): 8 mt.
2) Surface area: 50 mt2.
 Time delay: 0-59 min.

 Sensitivity: 0-1275 Lux adjustable.
 Operating frequency: 32 KHz
 Operating voltage 230V, AC, 50Hz.
 Self-adaptive sensors automatically adjust sensitivity and timing.
 Non-volatile memory.
 8 sec. test mode to easily confirm proper operation.
 Field of view: 360˚for ceiling mounted passive movement detector (PD).
: 180˚for wall mounted passive movement detector (PD).
 Operating temperature: -5 to 45 C̊.
 Relative humidity: 95% non-condensing.
 Installation: Wall mounted or ceiling mounted.
The contractor is fully responsible to choose the proper type (ceiling or wall) and the location for
each occupancy sensor based on the approved supplier recommendations & taking into his
consideration the ceiling height, A/C grills distribution, …etc. and to add any no. of occupancy
sensors to give proper operation without no extra cost to the employer.
Page 288 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.11 FLOOR BOXES
A. All floor boxes shall be as per NFC 61-314 and EN 60670-1&-23.
B. Floor box shall be made of zinc die-cast, cover to be made of nickel galvanized to withstand 300 kg with
non-permanent deformation.
C. The floor box should have hinged lid without recess, lid offset for used position (cable outlet).
D. The floor box must suite the No. of approved outlets as indicated on the drawings.
E. The floor box should have a degree of protection ‘IP65’ and ‘IK-07’.
F. The floor box should be suitable to the used tiles (carpet or marble) floor and to be approved by Arch.
Consultant.
2.12 DISCONNECTING SWITCHES FOR (1-Φ) DEVICE / EQUIPMENT

All single phase disconnect switches shall be as per IEC 60669.
All recessed mounted disconnect switches shall be double pole with pilot lamp and Flex, outlets.
All surface mounted disconnect switches shall be double pole with pilot lamp.
All disconnect switches provided for the heaters shall be engraved “WATER HEATER”.
2.13 ELECTRIC OUTLET UNITS
Outlet plates for cables or flexible cords shall be similar to switch plates and complete with not less than
two fixing screws. Terminals shall be provided to accommodate incoming wiring and outgoing cables or
flexible cord. The unit shall be double pole fused/non-fused, switched/non-switched, with/without neon
lamp as indicated on the drawings and shall incorporate an outgoing cable clamp or cord grip. The cover
plate of white moulded plastic shall have a smooth aperture for the cable/flexible exit.
The unit shall be according to BS 5733.
2.14 ALUMINUM CABLE TRUNKING
A. The trunking made of Aluminium with dimension 20x10 cm and 1.5mm minimum thickness complete
with all accessories and consist of two (2) compartments system with two snap-on cover types as
indicated on the drawings.
B. The trunking shall be supplied complete with vertical riser up to the floor.
C. The installed sockets, switches and disconnect switched in the trunking system shall be compatible with
the trunking system.
D. The Trunking shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of DIN EN 50085-1&-2.
E. Suitable accessories shall be used wherever required, like couplers, internal, external corners, cable
dividers, cable retainers, flat tees, flat angles, stop ends etc. to give a neat and strong system.
F. Suitable back boxes shall be used as 1 Gang, 2 Gang etc. according to the requirements to fix the wiring
accessories flush with the trunking system.
G. The trunking color and the finish of the Wiring Accessories shall be with color to the Engineer’s
selection.
Page 289 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
H. Samples of accessories shall be provided for approval by the Engineer prior to ordering.
PART 3 –EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed and correct any
unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
B. Coordinate the exact location and mounting heights of all wiring devices with architectural, interior
design and plant / equipment layouts, location of doors, loose and fixed furniture, equipment
and accessories, other services, piping, etc. Any discrepancy between electrical drawings and
other disciplines/details shall be brought to the attention of Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES
A. Install wiring devices where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of SASO, NEC, and in accordance with recognized industry p r a c t i c e s
to ensure that products serve their intended function.
Program installation of devices after wiring is completed and tested for satisfactory insulation
resistance.
B. Install devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from any external building
materials, debris, etc.
Page 290 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. In walls or ceilings of concrete, tile or other non-combustible material, boxes and fittings install
boxes and fittings so that the front edge of the box or fitting will not be set back from the finished
surface more than 5 mm. In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other combustible material,
outlet boxes and fittings shall be flush with the finished surface or project therefrom.
D. Plaster surfaces around the back boxes of the wiring devices that are broken or incomplete, shall
be repaired so that there will be no gaps or open spaces at the edge of the box or fittings.
E. In making an exposed surface extension from an existing outlet of concealed wiring, a box or an
extension ring shall be mounted over the original box and electrically & mechanically secured to
it.
F. All wiring devices shall be fixed independently of the system of wiring. All fixing screws or bolts
shall be of steel and where the appropriate apparatus has a protective coating of zinc or is mounted
outside, an electro-galvanized finish shall be used complying with relevant standards and codes of
practice.

A. Check operation of all switches and wiring devices with power supply connected.
B. Check polarity of all the outlets and receptacles with polarity tester.
Page 291 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, Section 260500, apply to work of this Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to all listed products in this section specified elsewhere in
these specifications.
complete and make ready for operation, air circuit breakers with solid state trip units as shown in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of air circuit breaker of the types and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years. Provide air circuit breakers produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, SASO, IEC 60947-1, IEC
60947-2, IEC 60898, IEC-61439-1&2, and Standards pertaining to safety and motor disconnects.
Provide disconnect switches which have been listed and labelled.
govern.
govern.
Page 292 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for all types of circuit breakers and all indicated
products.
C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to verify compliance of the main equipment with the
1.5 WARRANTY
KK. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
LL. Warranty shall include:

use.
MM. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from
the date of substantial completion of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SWITCH INTERIOR
A. Switchblades fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open.
Page 293 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Removable arc suppressor where necessary to permit easy access to line side lugs.
C. Industry listed lugs suitable for aluminium and/or copper cable and front removable.
D. Plate all current carrying parts.
E. Provision for field installed fuse pullers.
2.2 SWITCH MECHANISM
A. Heavy duty or (AC-23) load break switches type 3 poles, 4 poles or 6 poles complete with auxiliary
contacts for star delta starters.
B. Rating: Voltage, poles, amperes, horsepower, and maximum available fault current as required or
shown on drawings.
C. Quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism integral with the box, not the cover.
D. Defeatable dual cover interlock to prevent inadvertent opening of the switch door in the ON position
or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open.
E. Handle position to indicate if switch is ON or OFF.
F. Provision for padlocking handle.
G. All disconnect switches shall be equipped with ground kit.
2.3 ENCLOSURE
A. Industry sheet steel standard type except as otherwise noted or required, with multiple knockouts on
all sides and back.
B. Hinged door and cover.
C. Industry Standard for exterior installation.
D. Industry Standard type most suitable for the environmental condition of the area.
E. The enclosures shall be made of sheet steel or stainless steel (for the outdoor installation).
F. All disconnect switches shall be (IP23) except those marked weather proof type should be:
 For indoor installation: “IP54”.
 For outdoor installation: “IP-67” stainless steel.
Page 294 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily limited to: -
3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required area clearances.
5. Clean the unit.
6. Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.
7. Verify that fuse sizes and types are in accordance with drawings, short-circuit studies, and
coordination study.
8. Verify that each fuse holder has adequate mechanical support.
3. a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
4. b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-

5. c. Perform thermographic survey.
10. Test all interlocking systems for correct operation and sequencing.
11. Inspect insulating assemblies for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
12. Verify all indicating and control devices.
13. Lubrication requirements
6. a. Use appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
7. b. Use appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

2. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase - to - phase and phase - to - ground
with switch closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's published data.
Page 295 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. Measure contact-resistance across each switchblade and fuse holder.
4. Measure fuse resistance.
5. Verify heater operation.
6. Perform ground-fault test.
C. Test Values
investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
5. Minimum insulation resistance shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
6. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine conditions under which all products listed in this section are to be installed and notify in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all listed products in this section should be subjected to testing as performed
in the factory to ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be
energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
Page 296 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Install all listed products in this section as indicated in the contract documents, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with
intended function.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of all listed products in this section.
C. Provide carriage for with drawable circuit breaker.
D. Protect disconnect switches from dirt, moisture and construction debris, subsequent and during
installation until project is accepted by Employer.
E. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws bolts and equipment grounding connections in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
F. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances and motors and controllers within sight
of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide nameplate on switch, indicating equipment served.
H. Protect miscellaneous control equipment systems from dirt, moisture and construction debris
subsequent to and during installation until project is accepted by Owner.
I. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective
ground, for electrical disconnect switches.
J. Mount all equipment in cabinets suitable for installation with all necessary bus bars and terminal
strips. Separate low and high voltage sections with barriers.
K. Provide all wiring, conduit and accessories including but not limited to terminal strips, rectifiers,
switches, and fuses for systems to perform intended function.
L. Provide emergency shut-down facilities at mechanical equipment rooms and other locations
indicated on drawings and as required.
A. Prior to energization of all products listed in this section, test devices for continuity of circuitry and
for short circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new unites and then demonstrate compliance
with requirements.
B. Upon completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches and after circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Close all switches to check for
proper energization of all loads. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
Page 297 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Electrically energize all listed products in this section and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
compliance. Replace ay product which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
Page 298 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 263213
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
"General requirements", apply to work of this Section.
C. Medium-voltage transformers, section 261200.
D. Medium-voltage switchgear, section 261300.
E. Switch boards, section 262413.
F. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems, section 260548.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete
and make ready for operation, a diesel engine generator set complete with radiator, concrete base,
engine generator batteries, charger, silencer, daily tank, complete fuel system and cooling system, air
filters, generator control panel, power command parallel system, master control and all required
appurtenances and accessories. Refer to appropriate section of Specifications and drawings for
additional requirements.
B. The contractor should check the existing building and all civil works, opening, louvers required, ancillary
works and material required for complete installation and should be included in his offer.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of diesel engine generator sets of the types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
10 years. Provide diesel engine generator set produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60034, IEC 60085, ISO
3046, ISO 8528,DIN, VDE, IES, EN, DEMA, EIA RS-282, TEMA, and IEEE Standards pertaining to diesel
generator set.
D. In case of conflict among the specifications, drawings and BOQ, the more stringent provision will govern.
E. Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse located within 100 Km of the job site, at which
spare parts are stocked and where a field service engineer who is a full-time employee of the
manufacturer permanently resides, and is a factory trained and qualified individual whose primary duty
is field service.
F. Equipment Rating: 230/400 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60HZ, 1800 rpm, Kw rating as indicated on the
drawings. At temperature 50C, altitude 300 meter and humidity 90%. at 0.8 power factor and capable
of continuous operation at rated output for the duration of any utility power failure up to 24 hours.
Ratings of diesel electric set based on operation of the set at rated generator RPM when equipped with
all necessary operating accessories, such as radiator, air cleaners, radiator fan, lubricating oil pump, fuel
transfer pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, governor alternating current generator and
exciter. All ratings must be factory certified.
Page 299 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
G. The same manufacturer is to build, test, and ship the whole system (the engine, generator, radiators and
all major items of auxiliary equipment).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for diesel engine driven generator sets and components,
including:
1. Drawing of the diesel generator set.
2. The following data in tabulated form:
a. Make of engine.
b. Number of cylinders.
c. Bore, inches (millimeters).
d. Stroke, inches (millimeters).
e. Piston displacement, cubic inches (liters).
f. Piston speed, feet per minute (liters/min.), at rated RPM.
g. BMEP at rated KW output.
h. Make and type of generator.
i. Generator electrical rating, KVA or KW at .8 power factor.
j. Number and type of bearings.
k. Exciter type.
l. Generator insulation class and temperature rise.
m. Parts and service support.
n. Engine manufacturer's certified engine BHP curve and certified generator set fuel consumption
curve.
3. Batteries and battery charger.
4. Silencer.
5. Day tank.
6. Fuel system, including fuel pipes from generators set to main fuel tank, construction and fuel tank
details.
7. Cooling system complete (radiator).
8. Exhaust system complete.
9. All auxiliaries.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of diesel engine
generator sets in addition to operation instructions, wiring diagrams, schematics & interconnection wiring
diagrams and location of cable connection point.
Page 300 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Compliance Sheet: Submit compliance sheet with the specs item by item, duly signed by the manufacturer
D. Submit a certified test report showing serial number of the engine, generator and all accessories
furnished, and actual readings taken during a factory-conducted full load test including the following:
1. Cold start acceleration to rated voltage and frequency within 8 seconds.
2. Full and partial load applications and rejections during the test (at least 2 per hour). Frequency and
voltage stability and transients not to exceed the limits specified herein.
3. 15 minutes 1/4 load, or function warm up, 1/2 hour 1/2 load, 1/2 hour 3/4 load, and 2 hours full load;
plus 1 hours overload at 110%. Test shall be conducted at .8 power factor.
4. Demonstrate that all applicable safety shutdowns function along with their respective audio and
visual alarms.
E. A complete set of tools and portable instruments for the operation and equipment shall be provided,
together with suitable means of identification, storage and securing.
F. Supply with each engine-generator set, a soldered galvanized steel drip pan to be placed beneath the
engine to catch any leakage from the set.
G. Sound pressure levels for the engine-generator sets must be submitted to the Consultant for review and
accepted by him prior to the units being shipped to the site.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Obtain all necessary permits prior to delivery.
B. Delivery and rigging shall be fully coordinated with, and approved by the consultant.
C. Upon delivery, inspects for physical damage and compare nameplate rating of unit with this specification.
Page 301 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Prior to installation, engine-generator controls and all associated electrical equipment shall be stored
indoors, fully protected from weather, dust and dirt.
E. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent bumping or dropping. All rigging and handling shall be in full
accordance with engine-generator manufacturers' requirements.
Avoid the use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment
contained therein.
F. Do not install damaged equipment, remove from site and replace with new equipment.
G. Extreme care shall be taken to assure that all equipment is properly secured and braced for any overland
and vertical travel.
1.6 WARRANTY
NN. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
OO. Warranty shall include:

use.
PP. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
1.7 SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT
Page 302 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. The supplier of the diesel engine generator set to provide a service contract for a period of five years after
guarantee period and include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Engine manufacturer's recommended procedures for weekly (biweekly) inspection and

maintenance to be done by user.
2. Quarterly inspection by the supplier personnel to review the weekly maintenance records
being kept by user and train any new Employer operating personnel. Inspection to include
scheduled oil sampling for lube oil contaminants as outlined below. Also include a 100%
load test run on the generator set.
3. Annual inspections to include all of items in above paragraph except run the generator set under
system load.
4. Emergency call-back service, available 24 hour per day, 7 days per week.
B. Scheduled Oil Sampling
1. In order to forecast and minimize engine downtime, the supplier of the equipment must provide an
oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel can utilize for Schedule Oil Sampling.
2. Scheduled Oil Sampling of the atomic absorption spectrophotometry method and accurate to within
a fraction of one part per million for the following elements:
a. Iron
b. Chromium
c. Copper
d. Aluminum
e. Silicon
f. Lead
3. In addition, test the sample for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and antifreeze.
4. Provide all equipment needed to take oil samples in a kit at the time of acceptance and include the
following:
a. Sample extraction gun (1).

b. Bottle (10).
c. Postage-paid mailers (10).
d. Written instructions (1).
5. Provide immediate notification to the consultant when analysis shows any critical reading. If readings
are normal, provide a report showing that the equipment is operating within established parameters.
Page 303 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission the automatic start diesel generating sets with all
necessary switchgear, control panel, radiators and accessories all as either herein specified or shown on the
Drawings.
The size of the set shall be prime rating to the rating shown of the Drawings, when operating at the specified
frequency, voltage, altitude, maximum temperature and humidity.
The Contractor shall be guided by the emergency power room layout details shown on the drawings, but a
final detailed and dimensioned layout suitable for construction shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval, prior to ordering of equipment.
The Contractor shall indicate the nearest location from which service facilities and spare parts may be
obtained.
The design of the plant and its installation including all ancillary equipment, shall be such as to minimize noise
and vibration.
Materials and workmanship - All materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units specified herein, shall
be new and unused, of current manufacture and highest grade.
Manufacturer - The unit shall be factory assembled, and tested as complete unit by the engine manufacturer.
It shall be inspected and started at the job site by his authorized dealer having a parts and service facility in
the area.
Tests - The generator set shall receive the manufacturer's standard factory load testing. Prior to acceptance
of the installation, equipment shall be tested to show it is free of any defects and be subjected to full load
test.
Start-up and Instructions - On completion of the installation, start-up shall be performed by a factory-trained
dealer service representative. Operating and maintenance instruction books shall be supplied upon delivery
of the unit and procedures explained to operating personnel.
Page 304 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Specifications and Drawings - The bidders shall furnish information showing manufacturer's model numbers,
dimensions and weights for the generator set and major auxiliary equipment. Proposed deviations from the
specifications shall be stated in the bid. The successful bidder shall submit copies of pertinent drawings. and
wiring diagrams for approval.
The diesel generator set should have performance class G2 according to ISO 8528; except for the data center
which should have performance class G3 capable of carrying data center tier-3 continuous loads according to
ISO 8528 and should be Uptime certified.
2.2 OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
The loss of normal power from the utility shall automatically cause the generating set to start.
The Diesel generating set shall have an automatic start facility.
The emergency generating set shall be designed so that it will come up to steady full speed from cold condition
within 10 seconds of the "start" impulse. It shall then be capable of accepting 100% of its power rating load
under power factor variations of 0.8 to unity lagging with maximum transient voltage over or under 5-7 % and
maximum transient frequency variation of ± 5% with steady frequency + 1/2% of nominal (within 5 sec's).
Should the Diesel engine fail to start in 10 seconds following the "start" impulse, it shall come to rest for 10
seconds. Two further attempts shall be automatically performed with intermediate periods of rest. Should
the set not start after three attempts, an alarm shall sound and signal "start failure" shall illuminate.
It shall be possible to operate the set manually for testing and normal operation purposes. For this purpose,
the set shall be provided with a duty selector switch arranged for OFF/TEST/MANUAL/AUTO. It shall be
possible to run the engine with or without operation of the Emergency circuit breakers.
The Diesel generator set must still be running a 3-5 minutes after transfer and after removal of all load to
ensure that a change-over in the event of a repeated mains failure can rapidly be realized and to obtain a
cooling effect to avoid an accumulation of heat.
Page 305 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
The engine-generator sets shall be a complete package unit mounted on rigid base suitable for skidding
as indicated in the drawings.
The design of the set shall allow the easy replacement of major items subject to wear.
A flexible coupling shall be fitted between the engine and generator to provide the drive and absorb the
transmission of shock loads, and shall be completely shielded by a coupling ring and adequate steel
guards.
Complete protection from machine vibration is required for the building and all instrumentation and
control equipment, including engine-mounted instruments. This may be achieved either by mounting the
combined engine/generator unit to a separate sub- frame resiliently mounted on the main frame, or by
mounting the entire main frame on anti-vibration mountings, and securing the machine instrument panel
by its own resilient mounting. The machine instrument panel by its own resilient mounting. The
mountings employed, method of mounting and floor structure and thickness shall be approved by the
manufacturer and the Engineer.
2.4 DIESEL ENGINE
The engine shall be of the direct injection four stroke, even number of cylinders dual turbo-charged and after
cooled and not series turbocharged. It shall operate on diesel fuel oil at 1800 R.P.M. including the capacity to
withstand 10% overload for one hour in any period of twelve hours. The net power rating of the engine under
worst site conditions shall be such as to deliver the net electric power indicated on the generator taking into
consideration generator efficiency.
The engine shall be of the water-cooled driven shaft mounted radiator, Coolant temperature shall be
measured and controlled by means of one or more thermostats.
The lubricating oil system shall be of the full pressure circulating type, complete with full flow lubricating oil
filters with replaceable elements and a lubricating oil heat exchanger. Filter system shall be equipped with a
spring loaded by-pass valve as an insurance against stoppage of lubricating oil circulation in the event the
filters become clogged.
Page 306 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Adequate inspection openings per cylinder to provide quick access and inspection of camshafts and
connecting rod.
The fuel system shall be complete and shall be capable of supplying the engine by gravity from a day fuel tank.
It shall be equipped with easily replaceable fuel filter elements. The fuel system shall be equipped with a
built in, gear type, engine driven fuel transfer pump, capable of lifting fuel against a head of 250 cms. for
supplying fuel through the filters to the injection pump at constant pressure.
The exhaust system shall be insulated complete with dry type exhaust manifold with flanges, flexible exhaust
expansion connections, exhaust pipes and a residential exhaust silencer which shall be fitted with a drain plug
at its lower end to permit evacuation of condensed humidity. The exhaust piping shall be insulated with
calcium cilecate tape with a total thickness not below 50 mm. The size of exhaust pipe should be calculated
and determined according to the back pressure limitations as specified by the manufacturer.
The electric starting of the engine shall be possible either manually by means of push button or automatically
by means of the automatic control panel. The starting system shall consist of a 24 volts d.c. Starter motor,
heavy duty 24 volts long life lead - acid battery and a suitable automatic trickle battery charger.
Batteries shall be enclosed in enameled steel, corrosion resistant. ventilated, totally enclosed enclosure
complete with drip shield. Enclosure shall also be complete with hydrometer, syringe, jumper cables and
mounting bracket for accessories. Enclosure shall be free standing, floor mounted.
An isochronous electronic type engine governor with speed control and droop adjustments shall be provided
and shall be capable of providing accurate speed control within 1% of the rated speed.
An automatic shut-down protective system with signaling lights shall be provided to shut down the engine in
the event of engine overs peed, low lubricating oil pressure, over cranking and high cooling water
temperature.
All auxiliaries (battery charger, jacket water heaters, space heaters,.) shall be powered by the external
emergency power source.
Complete shutdown system shall be arranged to energize an alarm system located within the plant room and
to trip the respective generator circuit-breaker.
The following engine mounted instruments shall be provided:
Page 307 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Water temperature gauge calibrated inC
2. Lubricating oil temperature gauge calibrated inC
3. Lubricating oil pressure gauge.
4. Tachometer.
5. Operating time meter.
6. Oil filter differential.
7. Jacket water temperature.
8. Fuel pressure.
Page 308 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.5 GENERATOR
The generator shall be of drip VDE 0530 proof construction, in accordance with screen protected, revolving
field, brush less type with adaptor and flexible coupling for direct connection to the engine at the flywheel
end.
Required Generator Characteristics
a. Type Brushless with salient pole field system incorporating rotating exciter and
three phase rectifier system.
b. No. of phases Three with 4 terminals
c. Voltage 400 Y/230
d. Winding connection Star with grounded neutral
e. Net rated output As indicated on the drawings @ 50 C ambient temperature.
f. Power factor 0.8 lagging.
g. Frequency 60Hz.
h. Enclosure IP IP-23
i. Maintained short circuit 300% of rated current for 3 seconds.
j. Voltage regulator Automatic, readily accessible controls for voltage level.
k. Overload 10% of name plate rating for one hour every 12 hours.
l. Insulation Class "H" stator, class "H" rotor with temperature rise according to class F 105 C over
40C ambient temperature.
The exciter shall be of the solid state type with a digital voltage regulator forming an integral part of the
alternator.
Overall voltage regulation from no load to full load, including hot to cold, variations and load power factor
between 0.8 lagging and unity shall be within + 0.5% of nominal voltage.
Voltage buildup shall be in a positive and rapid manner even when the machine is connected to its load circuit.
Page 309 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
The line to line voltage wave form shall be at least to the requirements of VDE 0530 (less than 5% deviation.
The total harmonics content shall not exceed 3%.
Radio interference suppression shall be at least according to degree "N" of VDE 0875 or equivalent.
Engine-Generator Set Control: The control shall have automatic remote start capability. A panel mounted
switch shall stop the engine in the STOP position, start and run the engine in the RUN position and allow the
engine to start and run by closing remote contact, and stop by opening the remote contact when in the
REMOTE position.
a. The control shall include a cycle cranking function. The cranking cycle, nonadjustable, shall consist
of an automatic crank period of approximately 15 seconds duration followed by a rest period of
approximately 15 seconds duration as per NFPA 110. Cranking shall cease upon engine starting and
running. Two means of cranking termination shall be provided, one as backup to the other. Failure
to start after three cranking cycles shall shut down and lockout the engine, and visually indicate an
over crank shutdown on the panel.
b. The control shall shut down and lock out the engine upon: failing to start after the specified time
(over crank), over speed, low lubricating oil pressure, high engine temperature, or operation of a
remote manual stop station.
c. The generator control panel shall have degree of protection IP 44.
d. The control shall provide a light engine monitor on the control panel; one red light for each of the
four shut downs (except the remote manual stop), and one yellow light each for the high engine
temperature and low engine oil pressure pre-alarms, and one green run light. The control panel
monitor shall include; a flashing red light to indicate the generator set is not in automatic start
mode, a yellow light to indicate low coolant temperature, a yellow light to indicate low fuel, and
two red lights for auxiliary use.
A panel mounted switch shall reset the engine monitor and test all the lamps. The engine-generator
set starting battery(ies) shall power the monitor. Operation of shut down circuits shall be
independent of indication and pre-alarm circuits. Individual relay signals shall be provided for each
indication for external circuit connections (not to exceed 1/2 amp draw) to a remote annunciator.
A common alarm contact for external connection to an audible alarm shall be provided.
e. Provide condensation heater.
f. Provide battery charger, on/off pilot lights.
Page 310 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
g. Provide a low coolant level shutdown, which shall be indicated as a high engine temperature fault.
h. Provide the supervised points as indicated in fire alarm system section 283111.
i. Control panel shall be mounted on the generator set with vibration isolators or wall mounted type
as indicated on the drawings. The control shall include surge suppression for protection of solid
state components. A front control panel illumination lamp with On/Off switch shall be provided.
Control panel mounted indicating meters and devices shall include: Engine Oil Pressure Gauge,
Generator Running, Automatic Mode, Cool Down Mode, Fail to Synchronize (where applicable), Not
in Auto Mode, Generator Overload, Reverse Power, Coolant Temperature Gauge, DC Voltmeter, and
Running Time Meter (hours); Voltage adjusting rheostat, locking screwdriver type, to adjust voltage
+/- 5% from rated value; Analog AC Voltmeter scale 0-500 V dual range, 90 degree scale, 2%
accuracy; Analog AC Ammeter, dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy; Analog Frequency meter,
45-65 Hz, 90 degree scale, +/- 0.6 Hz accuracy; Seven position phase selector switch with OFF
position to allow meter display of current and voltage in each generator phase.
j. Provide exerciser clock (2-week type) to automatically start the generator for 30 minutes.
2.6 FUEL SYSTEM
The diesel generator shall be provided with a fuel system (daily tank & main tank) as indicated in mechanical
specification section 23113.
2.7 BATTERY TRICKLE CHARGER
A battery trickle charger mounted on the wall and shall be supplied with the generator in order to maintain
the two battery sets in good condition. It shall be fitted with on-off switch indicator light, input and output
fuses and reverse current protection. Upon operation of the standby plant the charger shall be disconnected
from the battery and from the mains. An ammeter to indicate rate of charger and battery voltmeter shall be
fitted for each set of batteries.
2.8 ENGINE GENERATOR SUPPORT AND ISOLATION SYSTEM
A. Equip the engine and generator set with a suitable common steel base for mounting the engine-generator
unit on a concrete foundation.
B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding and laterally stable rated for seismic areas with housings that include
vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed; the isolators complete
with neoprene acoustical friction pads between the baseplate and supports.
Page 311 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. All mounting levelling bolts rigidly bolted to the equipment; spring diameters no less than 0.8 of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs to have a minimum additional travel to solid equal
to 50% of the rated deflection.
D. Provide a minimum of (six spring mounted and six "all-directional seismic snubber") as per the
manufacturer recommendations. Prior to installation, approved manufacturer shall submit installation
drawing for approval.
2.9 SUPER SILENCED SOUND PROOF ENCLOSURE FOR DIESEL GENERATOR SET
A. General
1. The generator set is silenced by an acoustic enclosure built to the specification generally meeting 70dB
at one (1) meter, measured from all enclosure sides.
2. The exhaust pipes design shall be made to fulfil the site conditions requirements to give proper
operation.
3. The enclosure shall be robust / highly corrosion resistant construction suitable for salty condition, and
shall be made of high grade steel protected by painting suitable to withstand the salty condition.
4. All doors, fasteners, locks, hinges … etc shall be made of stainless steel grade suitable for salty condition.
5. Doors shall be on both sides of enclosure opening at 180°.
6. The enclosure shall be provided with:
 Emergency stop push button mounted on the enclosure’s exterior.

 Lighting fixtures inside the enclosure.
 Large viewing window in the door.
 Lifting points on ba3se frame facilitating handling from both sides.
7. A prepared concrete platform with a smooth surface is necessary to accommodate the generating set
initially, normally a 'packaged' unit with its own base fuel tank, prior to the acoustic enclosure being
'dropped over'. Allowance for cable runs and, The underside of the enclosures bodywork should be
provided with a suitable sealant before installation to ensure a totally airtight bonding.
8. Full height doors are provided at each side of the enclosure to permit personnel to enter and walk inside
the facility for maintenance and operating purposes. Chromium plated slam locks are provided on each
lockable door, with panic buttons on the inside to release the door-locking mechanism.
9. The Enclosure should be painted with marine paintings to avoid any type of rust due to bad weather &
high moisture and the painting steps should include but not limited to:
a) Surface preparation,
b) Painting system: The painting cycles of the enclosure structure to be (Primary coat – intermediate
coat – finish coat) to be done with epoxy materials according to marine painting specs and to
achieve Total D.F.T not less than 300 Micron,
Page 312 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
c) Inspection & repair painting in case of damage
B. Installation of enclosed / silenced stets
1. The contractor shall visit the site before submitting his offer to ensure that the available space is enough
to install the super silenced sound proof enclosure.
2. Select a position for the enclosure generator which is as close as possible to the load to be supplied,
ensuring that the following conditions are met.
3. The ground must be dry, level and firm enough to support the weight of the enclosure without any
sinking with time.
4. The positioning of the enclosure generator should be such that generator exhaust and cooling air flows
do not create a nuisance, or potential source of danger to personnel, or building etc.
5. There must be adequate access for installation and commissioning of the generator. Also allowance
must be made for maintenance including:
I. Inspection of door seals and door hinges door handles, locks, and internal panic-release
mechanisms for correct operation.
II. Inspection of air inlet and outlet ventilation grilles for clogging by debris, and obstruction by objects.
III. Inspection of exhaust system for leaks and damage, and that no materials or debris can come into
contact with the hot exhaust system.
IV. Inspection of exhaust pipe exit for obstruction.
V. Inspection of external surfaces for damage periodically, with periodic cleaning where required.
C. REPARING FOR INSTALLATIONL:
 Position the enclosure in the required place.
 Open the enclosure doors and carry out the full installation procedure as described in the generator
manual.
 Carry out generator commissioning as described in the control system manual.
 All non-current Carrying metalwork associated with the equipment must be bonded to a suitable earth
connection.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS
The Contractor shall calculate the reinforced concrete foundation block to support the generating set.
Calculation and detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Page 313 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A water pipes shall be installed between the radiator and the engine.
The Contractor shall supply and install all piping cabling and other required accessories and items for a
complete emergency generating set.
The Contractor shall supply all the required standard and special tools for routine maintenance and normal
over hauls, in suitable cupboard.
The spare parts required for normal operation during 1500 operation shall be supplied with the set, and
placed in a suitable cupboard. Priced spare part list, complete with all relevant part number, shall be supplied
with the Tender.
Manuals and Technical literature required for operation maintenance and overhaul shall be supplied in English
in 3 copies.
Page 314 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION and TESTING
A. Examine conditions under which diesel engine-driven generator sets and parallel panel are to be installed
and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all generators should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to ensure
that no damages have occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diesel engine-driven generator set and parallel panel as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended
function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of engine-generator equipment work with other work.
C. Lift generator using eyes and other devices provided by the manufacturer.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
E. Align shafts of engine and generator within tolerances recommended by engine - generator unit
manufacturer.
F. Provide equipment grounding connections for diesel engine-driven generator units as required.
G. Install diesel fuel piping from diesel engine to daily tank.
Page 315 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
H. Install concrete bases of dimension indicated on drawings or as otherwise required for packaged engine
generators according to the manufacturer recommendations.
I. Slope of Engine exhaust piping should be specified to avoid any condensate return back to engine.
A. Upon completion of installation of diesel engine generator set, test and inspect system to ensure
compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B. At the construction site, provide the services of a competent, factory trained engineer or technician
employed by the manufacturer of the diesel engine generator set to technically supervise and participate
during all of the adjustments and tests for the set and major auxiliaries.
Make adjustments and test in the presence of the Employer.
C. Provide start-up and load test in accordance with NFPA 110 and include the following:
1. A minimum of 3800 liters of fuel oil for testing.
2. Record room temperature and time of beginning of test.
3. Start the units and record the number of seconds it takes each unit to get it started.
4. Record voltage readings on all phases and also running hour meter reading RPM and frequency
meter reading. Use a hand tachometer to check RPM against frequency meter reading.
5. Provide load banks for full load rating of generator to test all systems on generator for minimum of
4 hours.
D. Mechanical Examination
1. Check engine fuel system and water cooling system for possible leaks during the load test. If any
fuel or water leaks are observed, stop the unit and tighten or replace the leaking item as required,
and restart the load test. It is necessary that each unit run for 2 hours at full load without any leaks
or excessive water temperature, low oil pressure, etc., before acceptance.
Page 316 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. Deliberately speed up the engine by misadjusting the governor and record the speed at which the
engine automatically shuts down.
3. Simulate low oil pressure by shorting the contacts of the oil pressure relay, to test for automatic
engine shutdown on low oil pressure.
4. Simulate high water temperature by shorting the contacts of the water temperature relay to test
for automatic engine shutdown on high water temperature.
5. With engine running under load, during the last half hour of the 2-hour test, measure room and
outdoor ambient temperatures. Room temperature not to exceed the motor - generator
manufacturer's limit for room temperature with outdoor air temperatures at 50oC design day.
The Contractor to submit this data to the motor - generator manufacturer for computation of
equivalent room temperature based upon 50oC day operation. Manufacturer to certify that room
temperature data is consistent with manufacturer's recommended operating limits for a 50oC
design day.
Page 317 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3.4 INSTRUCTION AND FINAL INSPECTIONS
A. Laminate or mount under plexiglass a set of operating instructions for the system and install instructions
within a frame mounted on the wall near the diesel engine-generator set.
B. Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for five 4-hour periods for
instructing personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment, on the dates requested by the
Employer.
C. Contractor to furnish 5 copies of operating, maintenance and diagnostic instructions and parts list, and
illustrated parts books covering the engine-generator and auxiliary equipment which will require operating
instructions and periodic maintenance.
D. Supply one complete set of spare oil, fuel and air filters plus one set of lamps and fuses with each set.
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Employer's building personnel in procedures for starting up,
testing and operating stand-by generators and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three operator's manual
providing installation and operating instructions for each generator.
3.6 DIESEL GENERATOR: SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL TESTING/COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the acceptance and type of tests carried out at the manufacturer's works, the following
testing/commissioning procedures shall be carried out:
1.0 At the manufacturers works
All testing to the satisfaction of the Employer's consultant shall be carried out as follows:
Heat Run:
- 50% for ½ hour + 75% for ½ hour.
- 2 hours full load + 1 hour 10% overload.
a. Recorded ½ hourly readings of speed, oil pressure, oil temperature, water temperature, fuel
consumption, battery charge rate and voltage, generator voltage, load current, kilowatt
Page 318 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
output, frequency and power factor, generator temperature rise when connected to a
resistive/reactive load to produce 0.8 power factor.
b. Demonstration of voltage regulations at set point of 385V from full load to no load to full load,
including transient variation and response time.
c. Demonstration of speed/frequency regulation under conditions of 2 above.
d. Cold start, 3 attempts and lockout on set fail.
e. Cold start, run up and on full load time.
f. Demonstration of accuracy of all metering using standard test meters.
g. Demonstration of operation and setting of all protective relays and timing devices.
h. Demonstration of full sequential operation.
i. Demonstration of all alarm and indication.
j. Temperature rises on generator starter/rotor.
k. Installation resistance of generator bed plate wiring and controls.
Battery Tests:
- Measure charging voltage & voltages between available battery terminals for full charging and float
charging conditions.
- Test for contact integrity of all connectors.
- Check electrolyte level & specific gravity under both conditions.
- Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.
- Verify acceptance of charge for each element of battery after discharge.
- Verify measurements are within manufacturer’s specification.
Page 319 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Battery Charger Test:
- Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and floating conditions.
Records of all tests shall be made in appropriate test folders and initialled by the Contractor and
Employer's Consultant. These shall be photocopied and 3 No sets provided under the contract.
The Contractor shall provide 14 days notice of tests to the Employer's consultant and shall allow
witnessing of tests by the Employer's consultant.
2. On Site After Installation
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, instruments, tools, fuel, lubricating oil and test
loads for commissioning tests.
The tests specified below shall be carried out by Contractor in the present of the Employer's
consultant.
The Contractor shall carry out the following:
a. Check that the base is levelled in all directions, that engine and generator shafts are in proper
alignment and that the vibration absorbing devices are properly installed and located.
b. Check water and sum oil levels.
c. Check the battery and terminal connections.
d. Check that the types and grades of fuel and oil are as recommended for the unit.
e. Fill the main and daily service tank with the correct amount and grade of diesel fuel oil.
f. Check that all radiator and engine block water drain points are free from sludge and other
blockages.
g. Check engine bolts, main drive couplings, valve clearances, fuel pump settings, governor
settings, pipeline connections, water hose, exhaust coupling, flexible pipe work, etc.
Page 320 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
h. Check all connections on the alternator and at the control panel. All lugs for principal
connections shall have clean and bright contact surfaces. A suitable abrasive material shall be
used where necessary.
i. Check access panels and doors for proper opening and closing and for the functioning of any
interlocks fitted.
j. Check all signal and control circuits for correct operation.
k. Measure the resistance of stator, rotor, and exciter windings and ensure that this is not less
than the Specialist Supplier's figures.
l. Start the engine by means of the 'start' push button and allow it to run up to normal speed.
Check that during the time the engine starter motor is in operation, the mains battery charger
is automatically switched off
m. Check instruments and gauges for normal operation and response and check that the
generator voltage is being maintained within the prescribed limits, making due allowance for
no-load conditions. Compare the reading of the frequency meter with that of the engine
tachometer.
n. Stop engine after 30 minutes. Check water and oil levels.
o. Restart set and run at various loads for periods totalling at least 3 hours. Check the voltage and
current in each phase in turn and that the voltage and frequency are being maintained with
the required limits with large alterations of load. Note the rate of charge on the alternator
ammeter with the engine stopped. Check against specialist rates in necessary.
p. Check the operation of the turbo-charger unit and the colour of the exhaust gas at various
loads.
q. Check that all the engine safeguards operate satisfactorily.
r. Check the vibration absorbing devices for proper operation and that the performance of all
flexible connections, both mechanical and electrical are satisfactory.
s. Check the effectiveness of the radio suppression.
t. Check the temperature rise in the alternator.
u. Check the operation of all auxiliary fans, motors, pumps, float switches etc, and their
associated switching control gear.
Page 321 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
v. Check the slop of engine exhaust piping to avoid any condensate return back to the engine.
When all tests are satisfactory and agreed with the Employer's consultant, the lubricating oil be
finally checked, the fuel oil tank replenished and the set left in normal operating order.
When installation of the set and control panel is complete and the installation has been
commissioned, they shall be subjected to load tests as follows:
i) 50% load for ½ hour.

ii) 75% load for ½ hour.
iii) 100% load for 2 hours.
iv) 110% load for 1 hour.
Sound level readings in the following areas to establish compliance with 70 dB at:
a. 1m from generator set room.

b. 1m from exhaust outlet pipe.
The contractor is fully responsible to determine exactly what type of silencers, air - inlet louvers and
air - outlet louvers, and acoustical treatment for the generator room will be used to reach the above
mentioned sound level readings.
The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, wiring, terminal
blocks transducers to provide signalling and metering information for the central control system and to accept
START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, SCADA and motor control panels drawings and data schedules.]
Diesel generator sets will be provided with Modbus interface card to be communicating with SCADA systems
for monitoring.
All signals to the SCADA system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 230 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should add interposing relays.
Page 322 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
All analogue measures coming or going to the SCADA should be coordinated with the SCADA supplier (either
4-20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
Generator should be started via ATS system interface is required with the power monitoring system.
Page 323 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 263353
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500, applies to work of this section.
C. Surge protective devices, section 264313.
complete and make ready for operation by the Employer, an Uninterruptible Power System, in
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of UPS Systems, of

types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five years.
B. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC / EN 62040, IEC
62040-1-1, IEC 62040-1-2, IEC 62040-3, IEEE 59, IEEE 446, BS EN 62040.
C. Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse at which spare parts are stocked and where
a field service engineer who is a permanent, full-time employee of the manufacturer, factory
trained and qualified individual whose primary duty is field service resides.
Page 324 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Factory Testing: Before shipment, manufacturer to fully and completely test the system to assure
compliance with the specification including operational discharge and recharge tests on at least a
one-minute battery plant to assure guaranteed rated performance.
E. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
F. In case of conflict among the specifications, drawings and BOQ, the more stringent provision will
govern.
Page 325 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for UPS System.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
1.5 WARRANTY
QQ. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
RR. Warranty shall include:

use.
SS. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from the
Page 326 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UPS SYSTEM
A. System Description
1. UPS classification and efficiency shall be VFI-SS-111 in accordance with IEC 62040.
2. On-line Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system shall be provided to supply clean, regulated
three-phase power for designated electrical and electrical equipment even when the incoming
utility power is interrupted. The system shall consist of a rectifier/charger, inverter, static bypass
switch plus internal by-pass switch and sealed, maintenance free battery plant.
3. UPS rating as indicated on the drawings.
4. UPS shall comprise of energy saving feature ensuring transfer rate less than 5 ms.
5. There are no. of UPS's working in parallel system and the other UPS'S are working as standalone
system.
6. Input Voltage: 400/230 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire plus earth (ground).
7. Output Voltage: 400/230 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire plus earth (ground) as indicated on the drawings.
8. Output Load Capacity: Specified output load capacity of the UPS at 0.8 lagging power factor as
indicated on the drawings.
9. Internal Battery Plant: Battery cells type; sealed, lead-acid, maintenance-free with reserve time
of 15 minutes; 0.8 power factor, with ambient temperature 25 C.
The Batteries are installed in separate open rack cubicles.
10. Input isolation Transformer (applicable when it is indicated on the dwg’s.) and shall be in
accordance with IEC : Dry type AC input to the rectifier/charger & bypass, (copper wiring
exclusively); transformer's hottest spot winding temperature not to exceed the temperature limit
of the transformer insulation class “H” when operating at full load at maximum ambient
temperature to isolate input neutral.
The degree of protection of the isolation transformer shall IP20 minimum.
Page 327 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
11. Diesel Generator Interface: The UPS should include an interface to the diesel generator set. the
Gen-set shall include a potential free contact which closes on operation, the UPS system should
receive this signal and accommodate its operation as follows:
a. Rectifier produces its output voltage in an appropriate value to maintain inverter full load
operation without battery recharge, reducing overall input a/c power consumption from
the Gen-set to the minimum.
b. Setting the inverter to free running frequency
B. Rectifier/Charger
1. General: Incoming AC power converted to a regulated DC output by the rectifier/charger for

supplying DC power to the inverter and battery; PFC rectifier with IGBT modules shall be used.
2. Input Current Walk-in: Rectifier/charger to contain a timed walk-in circuit that causes the unit to
gradually assume the load over a 30 second time interval after input voltage is applied.
Page 328 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. AC Input Current Limit: Rectifier/charger unit with AC input current limiting whereby the
maximum input current is limited to 125% of the full input current rating; rectifier/charger to
operate at a reduced current limit mode whenever the critical load is powered from the UPS static
bypass circuit such that the maximum UPS input current will not exceed 125% of full load input
current.
4. Battery Recharge: In addition to supplying power for the inverter load, the rectifier/charger to be
capable of recharging the battery from discharge to 90% charge as per recommendation of
battery manufacturer.
5. Automatic Restart: Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage and prior
to a UPS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the rectifier/charger to automatically restart,
walk-in and gradually assume the inverter and battery recharge loads.
6. Fuse Failure Protection: Fuse power semi-conductors in the rectifier/charger with fast-acting
fuses, so that loss of any one power semi-conductor will not cause cascading failures; all fuses
with blown fuse indicator with alarm indication on the control panel.
7. Rectifier/booster, booster/rectifier.
8. Overvoltage Protection: UPS to automatically shut down and the load to be transferred to the
static bypass line uninterrupted if the DC voltage rises to the pre-set limit.
9. Line current THD not to exceed 3% to the mains for all UPS load current from 25% to 100%.
C. Inverter
1. General: Inverter to convert DC power from the rectifier/charger output or the battery, into
regulated AC power for supporting the critical AC load; inverter, IGBT transistorized technology
(Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor, phase-controlled, pulse width modulated (PWM) design
capable of providing the specified AC output.
Inverter should compromise 3 single phase bridges without paralleling of transistors.
2. Overload: Capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding 100% and up to
150% of full load current for 60 seconds with status indicator and audible alarm to indicate
overload operation; UPS to transfer the load to bypass when overload capacity is exceeded.
Page 329 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. Fault Clearing and Current Limit: Capable of supplying an overload current of 150% of its full load
rating for sixty seconds; for greater currents or longer time duration, electronic current-limiting
protection of the inverter to prevent damage to components; with self-protecting against any
magnitude of connected output overload; inverter control logic to sense and disconnect the
inverter from the critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective fuses.
4. Inverter Shutdown: For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load, the inverter control
electronics to instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors; simultaneously, the static transfer
switch to turn on to maintain continuous power to the critical load.
5. Inverter DC Protection: Protect by the following disconnect levels, independently adjustable for
UPS application flexible;
- DC Overvoltage Disconnect
- DC Under Voltage Warning (Low Battery Reserve)
- DC Under Voltage Disconnect (End of Discharge)
6. Over-discharge Protection: To prevent battery damage from over-discharging, the UPS control
logic to automatically raise the shutdown voltage set point as discharge time increases beyond 15
minutes.
7. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: A manual control to adjust the output voltage from +5% of
the nominal value.
8. Output Frequency: Controlled by an oscillator, temperature compensated to hold the inverter

output frequency to +0.1% for steady state and transient conditions; drift not to exceed 0.1%
during a 24-hour period; total frequency deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift, not
to exceed 0.1% from the rated frequency.
9. Phase Balance: Electronic controls to regulate each phase so that an unbalance loading will not
cause the output voltage to go outside the specified voltage unbalance or phase displacement.
10. Fuse Failure Protection: Fuse power semi-conductors in the inverter unit with fast-acting fuses,
so that loss of any one power semi-conductor will not cause cascading failures; all fuses with a
blown fuse indicator with alarm indication on the control panel.
Page 330 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
11. Bypass circuit shall be provided with backfeed protection to IEC 62040-1 through internal
backfeed contactor to prevent feedback to the mains from the inverter in case of mains failure
and a fault in bypass circuit.
D. Static Transfer Switch
1. General: A static transfer switch and bypass circuit furnished as an integral part of the UPS; a
naturally commutated high-speed static (SCR-type) device rated to conduct full load current
continuously; overload rating of 200% rated load for five minutes and 1000% rated load for one
cycles; static transfer switch control logic to contain an automatic transfer control circuit that
senses the status of the inverter logic signals, and operating and alarm conditions; control circuits
to provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate bypass source, without exceeding
the transient limits specified herein, when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS, or
for bypassing the UPS for maintenance.
Page 331 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. Uninterrupted Bypass Transfers:
a. Automatic Transfer: Transfer control logic to automatically turn on the static transfer switch,
transferring the critical AC load to the bypass source, after the transfer logic senses one of
the following conditions:
- Inverter overload capacity exceeded.
- Critical AC load overvoltage or under voltage.
- Battery protection period expired.
- UPS fault condition.
b. Transfer control logic to inhibit a transfer (manual or automatic) of the critical load to the
bypass source if one of the following conditions exists:
- Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits.
- Bypass frequency out of limits.
- Bypass out-of-synchronization range with inverter output.
3. Uninterrupted Retransfer: Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass source to the inverter
output to be automatically initiated unless inhibited by manual control; transfer control logic to
inhibit a retransfer (manual or automatic) of the critical load to the inverter if one of the following
conditions exists:
- Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output.
- Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits.
- Overload condition exists in excess of inverter full load rating.
- UPS fault condition present.
E. Internal Maintenance Bypass Switch
Page 332 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Description: A manually operated maintenance bypass switch, incorporated into the UPS cabinet
to directly connect the critical load to the input AC power source, bypassing the rectifier/charger,
inverter, and static transfer switch.
2. Isolation: Shield all energized terminals to ensure that maintenance personnel do not
inadvertently come in contact with energized parts or terminals and provide a means to
de-energize the static switch when the UPS is in the maintenance bypass mode of operation.
3. Maintenance Capability: With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, the
operation of the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static transfer switch, and battery operation to be
capable of maintenance and check-up.
F. Monitoring and Control
1. Provide with a microprocessor based unit status display and controls section designed for
convenient and reliable operator interfacing, system power flow diagram as part of the
monitoring and controls section which depicts a single-line diagram of the UPS and
electrically-illuminated visual indicators (long-life light-emitting diode (LED) type); locate all of the
operator controls and monitors on the front of the Ups cabinet; display monitoring functions such
as metering, status and alarms on an alpha-numeric digital display.
a. The UPS system must be equipped with LCD display (Man machine dialogue) to
perform the following :
- Full operation and control of the UPS system.
- Full measurements of all parameters of, input supply, output power & loads
voltages, currents and frequency as well as battery real autonomy Tim
charging/discharging voltages and currents.
- Full diagnostics of fault including history of last events with date and time.
- Facility of making adjustments of rectifier output voltage and inverter output

voltages as well as setting the parameters of the UPS system.
b. Metering: Display the Following Parameters:
- Input AC voltage line-to-line and/or line-to-neutral for each phase

- Input AC current for each phase.
- Rectifier output DC current.
- Battery voltage.
Page 333 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
- Battery charge/discharge current.
- Output AC voltage line-to-line and/or line-to-neutral for each phase.
- Output AC current for each phase.
- Percent of rated load being supplied by the UPS.
- Battery time left during battery operation.
- Inverter O/P current.
- Frequency of rectifier input.
- Apparent power of rectifier input.
- Output power factor.
- Frequency of UPS output.
c. Alarms: Display the Following Alarms:
- Input power failure.

- Battery discharging.
- Low battery.
- Overload.
- Overload shutdown.
- Load on bypass.
- Equipment over-temperature.
- Over-temperature shutdown.
- Fan failure.
- DC overvoltage.
- Control power failure.
- Output overvoltage.
- Output under voltage.
- Fuse cleared.
- Rectifier/charger failure.
- Static transfer switch failure.
Provide an audible alarm and activate by any of the above alarm conditions.
The following additional alarms to be displayed but not to activate the audible alarm:
- On maintenance bypass.
- On static bypass line.
- Sync with bypass line.
- Not in sync with bypass line.
- Out of frequency range.
- Rectifier/charger in current limit mode.
- Battery circuit breaker open.
d. Controls: UPS start-up, shutdown and maintenance bypass operations accomplished

by a single rotary control switch; provide pushbuttons to test and reset visual and
audible alarms.
Page 334 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
e. Mimic Panel: Provide to depict a single line diagram of the UPS; Integrate Indicating
lights, within the single line diagram to illustrate the status of the UPS power paths;
parameters to be displayed include, but not limited to, the following:
- Input power available.

- Output power available.
- Normal operation.
- Bypass operation.
The mimic panel for the ups shall be installed in the ups room.
f. Interface board: - Interface to IT management system for computer networks and to

include, but not limited to, SNMP adaptor
2. Emergency Load off Switch to isolate the UPS immediately from the load to be installed near the
UPS.
Page 335 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
G. Electrical Specifications
1. AC Input to UPS:
a. Voltage Configuration: 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground.
b. Voltage Range: ± 15% of nominal.
c. Frequency: Nominal frequency 60Hz ± 10%.
d. Power Factor: 0.99 lagging minimum at nominal input voltage and full rated UPS output
load.
e. Inrush Current: 700% of full load current maximum for transformer magnetization surge.
f. Current Limit: 125% of nominal AC input current maximum.
g. Input Current Walk-in: 30 seconds to full rated input current.
h. Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage as per IEC 61643.
i. Current Distortion: 3% THD maximum at full load.
2. AC Output, UPS Inverter:
a. Voltage Configuration: 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground.
b. Voltage Regulation:
± 1%, 3 phase RMS average for a balanced 3 phase load for the combined variation effects of
input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient temperature and load power factor.
 2%, 3 phase RMS average for a 100% unbalanced load for the combined variation effects of
input voltage, connected load, battery voltage, ambient temperature and load power factor.
a. Frequency: Nominal frequency ± 0.01%.
b. Phase Displacement: ± 1 degree for balanced load. ± 3 deg for 50% unbalanced load.
Page 336 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
c. Bypass Line Sync Range:  0.5,  1.0,  2.0 hertz. Selectable from LCD display.
d. Voltage Distortion: 3% total harmonic distortion (THD) for 100% Non linear loads and 1%
for linear loads.
e. Load Power Factor Range: 0.9 leading to 0.5 lagging.
f. Output Power Rating: Rated KVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.
g. Overload Capability: 125% for 10 minutes, 150% for 60 seconds, 1000% for 5 cycles, for 50-
250kVA; and 125% for 10 minutes,150% for 30 seconds for 250-500kVA, 1000% for 5 cycles;
100% continuous for all UPS’s ratings.
h. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment:  5% manual adjustment from LCD display.
i. Voltage Transient Response:
j. -  3% of 100% load step.
k. Transient Recovery Time: To within 2% of output voltage within 20 milliseconds.
l. Voltage Unbalance: Balanced load  1%; 20% unbalanced load 1%; 50% unbalanced load
 2%; 100% unbalanced load  5%.
m. Fault Clearing: Sub-cycle current of at least 300%.
H. General Mechanical Requirements:
1. Cabinet: Comprised of rectifier/charger, inverter, static transfer switch, and doors/covers

requiring a tool for gaining access, with casters and levelling feet.
Front access only required for expedient servicing, adjustments and installation; UPS cabinet
structurally adequate with provisions for hoisting, jacking and forklift handling.
The degree of protection of the UPS cabinet shall be IP20 minimum.
2. Material: All materials and components making up the UPS to be new, of current manufacture,
and have not been in prior service except as required during factory test.
Page 337 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. Cooling: (Forced Air). Use redundant low velocity fans to minimize audible noise output; fans
power by the UPS output.
4. Thermal Design: All thermal and ambient sensors, coordinated with the protective devices for the
forced-air cooled power circuit components so that internal or external fault conditions will be
cleared by the protective devices before excessive component or internal cabinet temperatures
are exceeded.
5. Cable Entry: Power cables to enter or leave from the top or bottom of the UPS cabinet as
required.
6. Serviceability: UPS constructed of replaceable sub-assemblies; printed circuit assemblies to be

plug-in; like sub-assemblies and like components interchangeable.
7. Finish: UPS cabinet cleaned, primed and painted with the manufacturer's standard color.
I. Environmental Ratings:
1. Ambient Temperature Range:

Operating: UPS: 0C to +40C; Battery: 25C; Storage: -20C to 70 C.
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing.
3. Altitude: Operating: 0 to 2,000 meters. Derated for higher altitudes. Storage: 0 to 12,000 meters.
4. Audible Noise: Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of normal operation not to
exceed a sound pressure level of 70 dB measured at 1 meter from the surface of the UPS.
J. Power Warning Signal: An isolated signal, normally closed when utility power fails and the UPS battery
is discharging, provided for user connection to computer power warning interface.
K. Remote Contact Board: Isolated Form C contacts provided to indicate a change of status of each of
the following conditions:
- UPS on battery alarm.

- Low battery reserve alarm.
- Load on bypass alarm.
- Summary alarm.
The remote status panel is located in the central control room.

Page 338 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
L. Batteries: Batteries to be valve regulated lead acid batteries, with cyclic life time to be not less than
1200 cycle at minimum discharge cell voltage of 1.8 volts.
The batteries to be minimum (10-12) years design floating life time (high performance according to
Eurobatt).
Output power of the batteries to be calculated at minimum VPC of 1.8 volts and working temperature
of 25 deg C.
The UPS should include battery charging temperature compensation feature to adapt charging
characteristic with temperature.
The contractor should provide full batteries specifications, back up time calculations tables based on
discharge current and watts per cell with respect to time.
Only for data center UPS’s there should be two separate batteries monitoring systems (primary +
back-up) to monitor the entire UPS’s batteries.
Page 339 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
The battery monitoring system shall be used to monitor the following parameters for every single
battery:
 Temperature.
 Internal Resistance.
 Voltage.
The battery monitoring system shall provide the following features:
 Regulate charging.
 Individual voltage regulation.
 Avoid overcharging & undercharging.
 Detect imminent battery issues.
 Avoid sulfation.
 Detect stratification.
 Protect batteries.
 Advance warning system.
 Prevent thermal runaways.
 Increase battery capacity.
 Identifying when battery replacement is required.
 Extension of service life.
 Alert system.
 Maintenance.
 UPS/SNMP & Modbus manager.
 Free viewer analysis software.
The battery monitoring system shall be using active charge equalization technique to maintain
equal cell or monoblock charge conditions and thus increasing the overall performance.
Each battery monitoring system shall be interfaced with DCIM through Modbus
communication module
1) Each UPS shall be supplied with Network Management Card which provides the following
functions:
 Connecting the UPS to the Network.

 Protecting the computers powered by UPS.
 Monitoring the UPS over the network
 Redirecting UPS alarms to an e-mail server, the format of these mails is compatible with
mobile transfer systems using text messages (SMS).
 Protection by encrypted password.
Page 340 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2) All UPS'S shall be monitored and controlled through central PC unit.
 The central PC unit shall be supplied complete with WINDOWS (8) and Norton 360 virus check
software.
 The central PC unit shall be installed in the central control room
3) The UPS system software shall be capable of giving instant access to the essential information
about the UPS status, showing the following:
 Communication: indicates the status of the communication between the card and the UPS.
 Power Source: indicates whether the power comes from the utility or from the UPS battery.
 Batteries: indicates whether the battery is being charged or discharged.
 Output load level: indicates the power percentage used at UPS output.
 Output: indicates if the UPS output is protected, powered or not powered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which UPS is to be installed and notify Architect in writing of
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all UPS’s should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to ensure
that no damages have occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install complete UPS System, including associated control devices as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
intended function.
B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of UPS System with other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
Page 341 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to floors. To ensure enclosures are permanently and
mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper mounting.
E. Provide equipment earthing (grounding) connections for UPS System as required.
A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and
compliance of UPS System with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site
then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest.
B. Provide site testing by the manufacturer's field service personnel. Site testing to consist of a
complete test of the UPS System under load and the associated accessories supplied by the
manufacturer. Document the test results, sign and date for future reference.
Page 342 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Employer's building personnel in procedures for
starting up, bypassing and operating UPS System. Furnish three operator's manuals providing
installation and operation instructions for each UPS System.
3.5 EQUIPMENT DATA/SHOP DRAWINGS
a) Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not limited to the
following:
i) Construction and installation details for the U.P.S.
ii) Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of connections.
iii) Details of connection of cables to U.P.S.
iv) Wiring and schematic diagrams of power, control, relay, metering and similar circuits. The
separate schematic diagrams shall include complete three line diagrams of all instruments,
switches, any other devices in the U.P.S.
v) Handling, installation and assembly drawings.
b) The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by this section shall
include but not limited to the following:
Complete technical data on U.P.S. and other equipment including manufacturer's catalogues, data
on operating characteristics compliance with standards, dimensions and weights, detailed
description ...etc.
Page 343 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3.6 INTERCONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
The UPS’s shall be provided with Modbus interface card to be communicating with SCADA/DCIM (for data
center application) system for monitoring.
All signals to the SCADA system should be potential free all signals from the SCADA will be potential free to
actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 230 volt.
relays.
4-20 MA or 1-5 volt or 0-10 volt).

11
Page 344 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 263533
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and Division-1
B.The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The requirements of
all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
C. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500, apply to work of this section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete,
make ready and set to work for operation by the Employer, power factor capacitors correction shall be in
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchboards of the types and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years as approved by Architect.
B.Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and DIN/VDE, IEC 60062, IEC
61071, IEC 61642, IEC 61921, BS, EN, AND IEEE Standards pertaining to centralized automatic power factor
capacitor assemblies. Provide centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies and components
conforming to one or more of the foregoing codes and standards.
Page 345 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data for centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies
including sizes, enclosures, electrical ratings and characteristics and wiring diagrams.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of centralized automatic
power factor capacitor assemblies with related low tension, single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
D. Test Certificates: Submit type test certificates to verify compliance of the main equipment with the
1.5 WARRANTY
TT. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
UU. Warranty shall include:

use.
VV. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for five years for individual capacitor cells
and at least twelve months for all other items starting from the date of substantial completion of the
project.
Page 346 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide fully automatic capacitor assemblies for low tension applications as indicated on the plans and
single line diagram.
B. Assemblies shall be fabricated as extensions of the low tension centralized automatic power factor
capacitor assemblies when indicated.
C. Each assembly (unit) shall provide 95% power factor correction with built in safe guards to prevent over
capacitance.
Page 347 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.2 RATINGS
A. The voltage rating of the power factor correction equipment shall be 400 volts between phases.
B.The total KVAR capacity of the assembly units shall be as indicated on drawings.
C. The total KVAR shall be automatically switched in steps of 25/50 KVAR as indicated on the drawings.
2.3 CAPACITOR CELLS - DRY TYPE
A. Individual capacitors shall be self-healing utilizing polypropylene as a dielectric with vacuum deposited
conductors on the polypropylene as electrodes.
B. Each three phase capacitor shall be furnished with an approved pressure sensitive interrupter. The
interrupter shall disconnect all three phases at the same time to maintain a balanced circuit.
C. Capacitors shall be contained in hermetically sealed metal cans to prevent atmospheric contaminants from
shortening the useful life.
D. Dielectric material shall be low loss, less than 0.5 watts per KVAR as per IEC 61071.
E. Dry cells encapsulation medium shall be a thermoplastic material which allows out gassing to engage the
pressure interrupter.
F. Terminal bushings shall withstand 10KV AC to ground and be rated 30 KV BIl or greater.
G. Nominal design life of individual capacitor cells shall be 20 years.
I. All capacitor cells shall have threaded terminals for wire connection.
J. To reduce line transients on system no stage shall switch more than 120 KVAR and no capacitor cell shall
exceed 25.0 KVAR.
Page 348 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.4 CONTROLS
A. All controls shall be mounted on enclosure door for easy inspection and service.
B. A door interlock shall be provided to disconnect control power when enclosure door is opened.
C. A personnel ground fault breaker shall be provided to disconnect control power upon accidental contact
with control power and earth (ground).
D. Reactive Power Controller/Power Factor Meter
1. Controller shall measure the reactive current on every passage of the voltage through zero.
2. A LED display shall be provided to indicate the stages that are on.
3. To prevent leading power factor the controller shall be provided with a programmable target cosine
selector.
4. The time delay between switching of capacitors must be field programmable and have a range of 10
seconds to 10 minutes to reduce hunting and allow voltage decay as noted in par. 2.7.
5. All output contacts shall be disabled within 15 milliseconds of main power interruption. The controller
shall retain its programming after the restoration of supply voltage. The controller shall bring the
capacitor bank back on line in a step, phased, normal sequence.
6. Controller shall be able to select 1:1:1, 1:1:2, and 1:2:2 switching sequence of capacitor steps.
7. Controller shall be able to display power factor with indication for an inductive or capacitive power
factor.
E. On-Off Switch
1. On/Off switch shall control power to all door mounted controls.
Page 349 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. On/Off switch shall contain pilot light to indicate "on" mode.
F. Blown Fuse Lights
1. Three "Push-To-Test" blown fuse pilot lights, one per phase-door mounted, to indicate a blown fuse
condition.
2. Each fused phase, of each 50 KVAR step, shall have its own blown fuse indicating light mounted in
close proximity to the fuse for easy identification.
2.5 ENCLOSURE
A. The enclosure shall be fabricated from 2.65 mm minimum thick, cold rolled steel with degree of protection
IP31 as per IEC 60529.
B.An internal grounding lug shall be provided.
C. A baked enamel finish in matching switchgear grey color shall be used.
D. Capacitor cells shall be accessible for visual inspection and replacement from the front of the cabinet.
E. Removable lifting eyes shall be provided.
F. The enclosure door shall have a three-point latch with key locking handle.
Page 350 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.6 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A. All power wiring shall have a thermoplastic insulation rated for 105 degrees C at 500 volts.
B.System wiring connections shall be made to copper bus bars braced for 65,000 amps or greater as per IEC
61921.
C. Contactors shall be rated for switching of reactive current by the contactor manufacturer.
D. The automatic power factor correction equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer of the
capacitor cells.
E. Air core transient suppression coils shall be provided in series between the contactors and capacitor cells.
F. All wiring connections shall be mechanically fixed with nut or screw.
G. The automatic power factor correction shall be an expandable modular design.
2.7 DISCHARGE RESISTORS
A. Capacitor "cells" shall be provided with discharge resistors to reduce residual voltage to less than 50 volts
within one minute of de-energization, unless local codes govern otherwise.
B. Resistors shall be chosen to insure a 20 year minimum life.
2.8 FUSES
A. To provide for major fault protection, line fuses shall be provided on all three phases of each switched
stage and fixed bank.
B. Line fuses shall be current limiting, U.L., recognized Class T type. Minimum interrupting ratings shall be
200,000 amps for fuses of 30 amps and above.
Page 351 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Fuses shall be designed for capacitor applications and shall be rated not less than 200% capacitor current
rating.
2.9 PERFORMANCE FEATURES
A. The capacitor shall be rated for continuous duty at 40-degree C ambient at 1,000 meters and below.
B. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 5% on either the voltage or current wave-forms shall not affect the life
of capacitors, contactors or controllers.
C. A + 10% variation in line voltage shall not affect the life of the capacitor.
D. All capacitors should be rated at 400 volts and can withstand 440-480 volt.
E. Anti-harmonic reactors shall be provided in series with capacitors & properly tuned to limit harmonic
current in order to avoid overloading of the capacitors.
2.10 SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY
A. Provide in each assembly, space and connection such that if in the future, chokes and filters will be
required, the installation can be accomplished in the field with minimum down time.
2.11 TESTING
A. All capacitor cells shall be traceable through construction and testing.
B. The automatic capacitor bank shall be tested for proper operation prior to leaving the factory. The
following checks, measurements, and operations must be confirmed and recorded for each stage.
C. The certified record of these tests shall become part of the permanent documentation package that
travels with the automatic capacitor bank.
- WIRE CONNECTIONS
- TORQUE CONNECTIONS
- PHASE TO PHASE, RESISTANCE CHECKS
- CONTROLLER OPERATION, MANUAL OPERATION
- CONTROLLER OPERATION, AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Page 352 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine conditions under which centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies are to be
installed. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all automatic reactive power compensation unites should be subjected to testing
as performed in the factory to ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to
be energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies as indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's written instruction, requirements of applicable standards, NECA's "Standard of
Installation," or equal and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation
complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of centralized automatic power factor capacitor

assemblies with other work.
C. Mount the switchboard assembly on flush steel aligning channels elevated above floor level by a concrete
pad and as noted on drawings. Provide aligning shims to achieve level installation where channels cannot
be provided.
D. Insure that centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies are shipped in sections which can be
fitted through the structures and openings available.
E. Bond together the centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies structure, sections and all
conduits terminating at same with a 120 mm² bare copper earth (ground) cable and connect to the
switchboard earth (ground) bus and to the earthing (grounding) grid as required. Provide conduits
terminating at centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies with Earthing (Grounding)
Wedges of the required size.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
G. Provide 6.35 mm minimum thick x 60 cm wide insulation mat in front of centralized automatic power
factor capacitor assemblies and rear of free standing equipment and extend 30 cm beyond ends.
Page 353 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
H. Provide protective covering during construction.
I. Touch up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish.
J. Provide control fuses, with five spare fuses for each rating.
K. Adjust operating mechanism for free mechanical movement.
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been energized, test equipment to
demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field-correct malfunctioning units, then
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new equipment and retest.
B. Prior to energization of switchboards and centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies:
1. Perform insulating resistance test on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth for (1) minute.
Minimum test voltage to be 1,000 volts D.C. with a minimum resistance of 100 mega-ohms.
2. Check centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies for continuity and for short circuits.
3. Notify Architect of any abnormalities.
C. After assemblies are energized, demonstrate functioning in accordance with manufacturers

requirements.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. All maintenance and inspection on the capacitor assembly shall be done with the system disconnect
device in the open position.
B. Maintenance and inspections should be limited to 15 minutes or less so not to affect utility billing.
C. An annual inspection of the capacitor cell shall be done to identify failing capacitor cells (a bulged cover
is the symptom to watch for).
Page 354 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 263600
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and Division-1
B.The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The requirements of all
related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
C. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500.
D. Packaged engine generators, section 263213.

E. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems, section 260548.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete,
make ready and set to work for operation by the Employer, transfer switches complete with bypass and
isolating switches shall be in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of transfer switches, of types,
ratings, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years. Provide transfer switch produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in
this section. Interlocking circuit breaker type transfer switches are not acceptable.
B. The automatic transfer switches and controls shall conform to the requirements of:
1- IEC 60947-6-1, utilization category 33A Low –voltage Switchgear and Controlgear; Multifunction
equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment.
2- IEEE Standard 446 – IEEE Recommended practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for
Commercial and Industrial Applications.
Page 355 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for transfer switch.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
D. Product Certificates.
1.5 WARRANTY
severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of the warranted item. Warranty
shall include both, materials and workmanship.

e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.
g. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may be required
installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not cancelled due to the
repair work.
C. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least 2 years starts from the date of
Page 356 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Rating: As indicated on drawings, 4 pole for a normal and emergency source of 230/400 volts, 3 phase,
4 wire, 60 hertz of required ampere ratings and RMS amperes interrupting capacity; rate of 4th pole is
identical to the main poles and rate neutral bus for full switch ampere rating unless otherwise noted.
B. The Degree of protection should be type (NEMA-4X) secure Double door for outdoor installation and
(NEMA-4) secure double door for indoor installation.
C. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator shall be
a momentarily energized, single-solenoid mechanism. Main operators which include over current
disconnect devices, linear motors or gears shall not be acceptable. The switch shall be mechanically
interlocked to ensure only two possible positions, normal or emergency.
D. All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of maintenance and community
of parts.
E. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages, so that contact pressure is
maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and
operating life.
F. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes and above shall have
segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and close-on capability and be protected by
separate arcing contacts.
G. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly of operating
linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches shall have front removable and
replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing
power conductors and/or bus bars.
H. Designs utilizing components of moulded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof, which are
not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two active power sources,
are not acceptable.
I. The ATS shall be provided with fully rated switched neutral transfer contacts. The neutral contact is on
the same shaft as the associated main contacts. This ensures positive operation and avoids any
Page 357 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
possibility that the neutral contact will fail to open or close, which is possible in the case when the
neutral pole is an add-on necessary. The neutral contacts are identical to the main contacts, having the
same current carrying and high withstand/closing ratings as the mains. They are designed to break the
last and make first to reduce the possibility of transients while switching the neutral.
J. Contacts shall be Silver alloy wiping action type protected by arcing contacts. Transfer shall be in 1/6th
of a second or less for main contacts, make-before-break switch and relay contacts. Coils, springs and
control elements shall be removable from the front of the transfer switch without removal of the switch
panels from the enclosure and without disconnection of drive linkage or power conductors.
K. Withstand Rating: Minimum long-time short circuit withstand rating per UL Standards 1008 as follows,
unless higher withstand ratings are indicated on drawings:
Switch Ampere Rating Withstand Rating
40-150 22.000A
250-400 42.000A
600-1200 65.000A
1600-2000 100.000A
L. Voltage, Frequency and Phase Rotation Sensing Shall be Provided as Follows: -
1. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be
continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout and trip setting capabilities (values
shown as % of nominal unless otherwise specified):
Parameter Sources Dropout / Trip Pickup / Reset

Under voltage N&E,3 70 to 98% 85 to 100%
Over voltage N&E,3 102 to 115% 2% below trip
Under frequency N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100%
Over frequency N&E 102 to 110% 2% below trip
Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1% below dropout
2. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an operating temperature range of -
20C to 60C.
3. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the
display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access.
Page 358 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
4. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port) of sensing
the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered
unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA).
5. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to pro-vide digital readout of
voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation.
M. Time Delays shall be provided as Follows: -
1. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source
outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to extend
this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 24 VDC power supply.
2. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for
controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
3.. Two-time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on re-transfer to
normal. One-time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and the other for the test mode
function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be
automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable.
4. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable from 0
to 60 minutes.
5. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external relay(s) for selective
load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability to activate an adjustable 0 to 5-minute
time delay in any of the following modes:
- Prior to transfer only.

- Prior to and after transfer.
- Normal to emergency only.
- Emergency to normal only.
- Normal to emergency and emergency to normal.
- All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available.
6. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments, except the extended time, which shall
be adjustable in .01 second increments.
7. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a remote device
connected to the serial communications port.
Page 359 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
N. Additional Features shall be provided as Follows: -
1. A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test / automatic / reset
modes. The test position will simulate a normal source failure. The reset position shall bypass the
time delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal.
2. A set of DPDT gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps, 32 VDC shall be provided for a low-voltage
engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the
generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless
of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred.
3. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one contact, closed when
the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact closed, when the ATS is connected to
the emergency source.
4. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided; one to indicate when the
ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to
the emergency source (red).
5. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and energized by controller
outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and emergency sources, as
determined by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source.
O. Engine Exerciser shall be provided as Follows: -
The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to
program up to seven different exercise routines. For each routine, the user shall be able to:
1. Enable or disable the routine.

2. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine.
3. Set the start time,
- Time of day
- Day of week
- Week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every)

4. Set the duration of the run.
At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and
run the generator for the specified cool down period. A 10-year life battery that supplies
power to the real time clock in the event of a power loss will maintain all time and date
information.
Page 360 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
P. Control Panel: Shall be provided with protective cover and an isolation plug in the wiring harness to
disconnect all control wires between control panel and main transfer panel.
Q. All ATS's should equipped with connectivity module with Ethernet port (TCP/IP) for monitoring all ATS's
from two locations security control room and fire command center the contractor should supply two
computers with the latest edition at these location.
This module will provide the following information on the screen.
 One line diagram showing transfer switch and load status.

 Voltage and frequency of both power sources.
 Time delay settings.
 Voltage and frequency pickup and dropout settings.
 Switch name tags and installation locations.
 Event log details, including data and time stamp.
 Engine start signal annunciation.
R. Some automatic transfer switches should supplied complete with moulded case circuit breakers for
feeding more than one outgoing as indicated on the drawings.
2.3 BYPASS SWITCH
The bypass switch is the same basic design as that of the transfer switch and therefore has the identical
electrical ratings. It is operated manually by means of the bypass handle, with a quick-make/quick-break
action. The handle has three positions: Automatic, Bypass to Normal, and Bypass to Emergency.
In the Automatic position, the bypass-to-normal and the bypass-to-emergency contacts remain open and
therefore are not exposed to the destructive effects of fault currents or wear during normal operation.
When the isolation switch is in the "Isolate" position, the bypass switch can also serve as a manual transfer
switch, allowing the load to be switched from one source to the other as desired, thus providing a redundant
backup to the transfer switch. Regenerative voltage from the load is prevented from feeding back into the
transfer switch during the source-to-source manual transfer.
Page 361 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.4 ISOLATION SWITCH
The isolation switch is integrated with the transfer switch in a drawout design. Power connections and
disconnections are accomplished with drawout type contacts. The fault current with stand ability is consistent
with that of the transfer switch.
These contacts are not subject to wear since they never make or break the power connections.
Correct alignment and positive connection and disconnection are accomplished through the operation of the
isolation handle. All power connections are made with silver-plated copper. Means are provided to padlock
the isolation handle in the open position.
The functions of bypass and isolation are performed manually by means of two handles:
A. Bypass Handle
This handle permits load bypass to either source. There are three positions:
1. Automatic.
2. Bypass to normal.
3. Bypass to emergency.
B. Isolation Handle
This handle is interlocked with the bypass function and can be operated only when the bypass handle is
in the bypass position. The isolation handle allows three positions:
1. Closed: The automatic transfer switch is connected to both power sources and the load in the normal
operating mode.
2. Test: In this position, the automatic transfer switch is withdrawn from the load circuits. However,
both sources are still connected to allow electrical functional testing without disturbing the load
which has been bypassed directly to a source.
Page 362 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. Open: All power to the transfer switch is disconnected, and it is completely isolated. Maintenance
technicians can perform hands-on inspection and maintenance procedures. The transfer switch can
be completely physically removed through a drawout mechanism if so desired.
Both handles extend through plate, accessible from outside the enclosure. Handle positions and
operating instructions are clearly indicated. Also supplied are indicators showing:
a. Normal source available.

b. Emergency source available.
c. Bypassed to emergency.
d. Bypassed to normal.
e. Transfer switch closed on normal.
f. Transfer switch closed on emergency.
Page 363 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND CONTROL
Any additional connections and control configurations of the automatic transfer switch (ATS) not specified
under this section shall be as shown on the drawings and specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which transfer switches are to be installed and notify Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all transfer switches should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances.
c. Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests.
d. Clean the unit.
e. Lubrication requirements
Page 364 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
f. Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible.
g. Verify tightness of all control connections.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
2. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench

method in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
i. Perform manual transfer operation.
j. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate sources.
k. Perform as-left tests.
2. Electrical Tests
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter, if

applicable.
b. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential
shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration
shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components or for control devices that cannot
tolerate the applied voltage, follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
d. Verify settings and operation of control devices.
e. Calibrate and set all relays and timers in accordance with selectivity coordination requirements.
f. Perform automatic transfer tests:
1. Simulate loss of normal power.

3. Return to normal power.
4. Simulate loss of emergency power.
5. Simulate all forms of single-phase conditions.
Page 365 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
g. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions:
1. Normal source voltage-sensing relays.

2. Engine start sequence.
3. Time delay upon transfer.
4. Alternate source voltage-sensing relays.
5. Automatic transfer operation.
6. Interlocks and limit switch function.
7. Time delay and retransfer upon normal power restoration.
8. Engine cool down and shutdown feature.
h. Test Values
investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
4. Insulation-resistance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install transfer switches, including associated control devices and cables for load shedding system as
indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards,
and in accordance with local authority requirements to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serves intended function.
B.Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of transfer switch work with other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
manufacturer’s criteria for tightening torques.
D. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors to ensure enclosures are permanently and mechanically
secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper mounting.
Page 366 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. Provide equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as required.
A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and
compliance of transfer switches with specifications. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site
then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest at no
additional cost to the Employer.
B. Test transfer switches, by means of simulated power outage; automatic start-up by remote-automatic
starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to these tests, adjust transfer switch timers for
proper system coordination.
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Employer and Operator's building personnel in procedures
for starting up, testing and operating transfer switches and auxiliary equipment. Furnish operator's
manual providing installation and operating instructions for each transfer switch.
The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, wiring, terminal
blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information for the central control system and to accept
START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with Modbus interface card to be communicating with SCADA
system for monitoring.
All signals to the SCADA system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 230 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should add interposing relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the SCADA should be coordinated with the SCADA supplier (either 4-
20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
Page 367 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 264113
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special conditions, and
Division-1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
requirements of all related sections, elsewhere also apply to this section unless specified to the
contrary.
C. Basic electrical materials and methods, Section 260500, apply to work of this Section.
D. Identification for electrical system, section 260553.
E. Grounding and bonding for electrical system 260526.
complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the Owner in accordance with drawings and
specifications of the lightning protection system.
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment required for this
installation, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10
years. Provide equipment produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in
this Section and as approved by the Architect.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, SASO 1614/1999, IEC
62561, BS EN 62305-1,2,3&4, BS 6651 , BS 2870 ,LPI 175, LPI 176, LPI 177 all applicable federal,
state, municipal laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to lightning protection systems.
C. Lightning Protection System: System shall be installed by trades specializing in lightning protection
systems.
D. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
E. In case of conflict among the specifications, drawings and BOQ, the more stringent provision will
govern.
Page 368 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation
instructions, catalog cuts, and descriptive data on all equipment, air terminations, down
conductors, joints and bonds, test joints, earth terminations, earth electrodes, earthing pits, cables
and test links with all necessary mounting details.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned drawing of lightning protection system layout with conductor
routings.
C. Submit factory certified test for all lightning protection system components.
1.6 WARRANTY
WW. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
XX. Warranty shall include:

use.
YY. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for 5 years starts from the date of
1.7 INSPECTIONS
A. Annual system inspections are recommended. Manufacturer shall be selected from the approved
manufacturer’s list, their nearest representative to contact for this service.
Page 369 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 COMPONENT PARTS
The principal components of lightning protection system shall be as follows:
a. Air terminations (Tinned copper).

b. Down conductors.
c. Joints and bonds.
d. Test joints.
e. Earth terminations.
f. Earth electrodes.
g. Earthing pits.
h. Test links.
i. Rod clamps, splicers, conductor straps, roof conductors & other system components required for
a complete system that meets the standards specified in this section.
2.3 AIR TERMINATIONS
Air terminations shall consist of horizontal conductors (Tinned bare copper tape “30x10”mm2) in the form
of networks as per British standard BS EN 62305-1,2,3&4.
No part of the roof should be more than 7.5 meters from the nearest horizontal conductor, this will be
achieved typically by an air termination network mesh of size 15m X 15m,
2.4 DOWN CONDUCTORS
The BS EN 62305 code covers the use of down conductors of various types including the use of strips,
reinforcing bars and structural steel stanchions. Any good conductor which may from part of the building
structure can be included, appropriately joined to the air and earth terminations and in general the higher
the number of down conductors used, the lower the risk of side-flashing and any other undesirable risks.
Likewise, large conductors reduce the risk of side-flashing.

Page 370 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
The down conductors system should, where practicable, be directly routed from the air termination to the
earth termination network and be symmetrically placed around the outside walls of the structure starting
from the corners.
Pattern and number of down conductors, joints, bonds and test joints shall be as per BS EN 62305.
2.5 EARTH TERMINATION NETWORK
An earth electrode should be connected to each down conductor.
The whole of the earth termination network should have a combined resistance to earth not exceeding 10
(ten) ohms without taking account of any bonding to other services, the earth termination network shall be
arranged to form a closed ring around the building.
2.6 EARTH ELECTRODES
The earth electrodes should be driven into the ground beneath, or as close as practicable to, the structure
and down conductor where ground conditions are favorable for the use of rods in parallel, the reduction in
earth resistance is small when the separation between the rods becomes less than their driven length.
Earthing electrodes shall be copper clad steel 20mm minimum diameter, 3m (meter) length.
See section 260526 for additional earthing electrodes.
2.7 CONNECTORS/FITTINGS/FASTENERS AND HARDWARE
A. Provide all connectors, fittings, fasteners, hardware, clamps, guards, lugs, etc., as required to
connect, interconnect and install all parts of the system (maximum cable fasteners spacing - 1
meter).
B. Fabricated from copper metal and approved for use intended.
C. Provide connections rated and approved for application between dissimilar metals.
Page 371 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions where lightning protection system is to be installed. Notify Architect in writing
of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lightning protection system as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, and in accordance with local authority requirements to ensure that installation
complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of the lightning protection system with the building
architecture, roof equipment and earthing.
C. Install conductors with more than one direct path from air termination to earth connections
avoiding sharp bends and narrow loops. Conceal all conductor drops to earth within building
structure as indicated. Provide flush cable support boxes with gasketed and bolted cast covers,
finish as directed by Architect.
D. Properly guard and protect all work installed in accessible locations.
E. Install all materials in a manner to prevent electrolytic action under the presence of moisture.
F. Make all roof, wall or other penetration in a manner to prevent the ingress of water or moisture.
G. Install lightning protection system so that completed work is unobtrusive and does not detract from
the building's appearance.
H. Make installation in a manner to eliminate possibility of displacement and subsequent

maintenance.
Page 372 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
I. Make all connections mechanically and electrically sound and clean all bonding surfaces just prior
to attachment.
J. Conductors
1. Install down conductors within 50mm Schedule 40, PVC conduit.
2. Cables on flat roof areas shall be run exposed. Adhesive type fasteners 1-meter maximum
on center.
3. Use conductors with protective coating where corrosion of conductors is expected due to
surrounding conditions.
K. Earthing (ground) Rod:
1. Drive to full depth in soil undisturbed by building excavation; do not drive into excavation
backfill area.
2. Provide connection between grid and water service and equipment earth grid.
3. Provide grid resistance of 10 ohms or less as a final value
4. Install top of (earthing) ground rods at least 80cm below finished grade complete with
access.
A. Upon completion of lightning protection system, test system to demonstrate compliance with
specifications. When possible, field-correct defective equipment, then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected at no additional cost to
Owner.
B. Check continuity of entire system.
Page 373 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. Inspect all connections prior to concealing same and ensure compliance with all applicable sections
of this specification, such as, but not limited to; 260533, 260553, 260526.
D. Perform an earth resistance test immediately after driving earthing (ground) rods and furnish test
results to Architect.
E. Install equipment under direct supervision of the equipment manufacturer's factory representative.
F. Fully test the complete lightning protection system in the presence of the Architect to demonstrate
continuity of all conductors. Submit a written test report in format approved by Architect.
Page 374 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 264313
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
C. Switchboards, section 262413.
A. Work includes providing surge protective devices (SPD’s) for low voltage power panels, control and
communication equipment,
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of cables, and connections of types, sizes
than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 61643-11, IEC
61643-12, IEC 61643-21, IEC 61643-22, BS 7671 (IET Wiring Regulations – Latest Edition), IEC 61000-
6-3, IEC 61000-4-5.
govern.
govern.
E. Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source form a single manufacturer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data for SPD’s, drawings indicating size and dimensional
requirements. The electrical performance of SPD’s shall be based on the specific system used in.
C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to verify compliance of the SPD’s with the relevant IEC
Standards.
1.5 WARRANTY
Page 375 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
ZZ. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
AAA. Warranty shall include:

use.
BBB. Warranty period on plant, equipment… etc., shall be valid for at least twelve months starts from
the date of substantial completion of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMBINED CLASS I + II SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Combined class I + II surge protective devices shall be installed in switchboards
B. Combined surge protective devices shall utilize MOV (metal-oxide varistor) and GDT (gas discharge
tube) technologies and shall provide common mode and differential mode protection to eliminate
overvoltage between each phase and neutral and between neutral and earth.
C. Surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the drawings.
D. Surge protective devices shall be as per IEC 61643-11.
Page 376 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. Surge protective devices shall be tested for impulse current simulated with 10/350 microseconds
waveform, with the following parameters for common mode: impulse current 100 kA within 50
micro seconds, charge (Q) 50 As within 5 ms and energy (W/R) 2500 kJ/Ohm within 5 ms, unless
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the consultant.
F. Surge protective devices shall be tested for impulse current simulated with 10/350 microseconds
waveform, with the following parameters for differential mode: impulse current 25 kA within 50
micro seconds, charge (Q) 12.5 As within 5 ms and energy (W/R) 156 kJ/Ohm within 5 ms, unless
G. Voltage protection level shall not exceed 1500 V.
H. All surge protective devices shall be equipped with auxiliary dry contacts for interface with SCADA.
I. Short circuit withstand capability shall match the switchboard short circuit level as a minimum.
J. Common mode nominal discharge current shall be 100 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform unless
K. Differential mode nominal discharge current shall be 25 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform
unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the consultant.
L. Maximum discharge current shall be 100 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform.
M. Surge protective devices’ temporary overvoltage withstand shall be as per IEC 61643-11.
2.2 CLASS III SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Class III surge protective devices shall be installed in power distribution units (PDU’s) for data center.
B. Combined surge protective devices shall utilize MOV (metal-oxide varistor) and GDT (gas discharge
tube) technologies and shall provide common mode and differential mode protection to eliminate
overvoltage between each phase and neutral and between neutral and earth.
C. Surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the drawings.
Page 377 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
D. Surge protective devices shall be as per IEC 61643-11.
E. SPD shall be tested with a simulated combination wave 8/20 microseconds wave form for short circuit
current and 1.2/50 microseconds wave form for open circuit,
F. Voltage protection level shall not exceed 1500 V.
G. All surge protective devices shall be equipped with auxiliary dry contacts for interface with SCADA.
H. Short circuit withstand capability shall match protected device short circuit level as a minimum.
I. Common mode nominal discharge current shall be 3 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform unless
J. Maximum discharge current shall be 8 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform.
K. Surge protective devices’ temporary overvoltage withstand shall be as per IEC 61643-11.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with IEC 61643-11, IEC 61643-21 and BS 7671.
B. For equipment install all SPD’s according to the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer.
C. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.
D. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between SPD’s and
points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed Manufacturer’s
recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground
E. Do not energize or connect panelboards to their sources until surge protection devices are Installed
and connected.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report
results in writing.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation
requirements.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and
prepare test reports
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Page 378 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
complete and make ready for operation all lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps in accordance with
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, SASO 182, SASO 203,
SASO 254, SASO 255, SASO 444, SASO 608, SASO 691, SASO 692, SASO 979, SASO 981, SASO 1131,
SASO 1132, SASO 1350, SASO 1351, SASO 1596, SASO 1612, IEC 228, ASTM B 3, DIN/VDE, IEC 60598,
IEC 62504, IEC 62717, IEC 62031 and IEEE Standards pertaining to lighting fixtures, ballasts, and
lamps. Provide lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps products and components which have been
labelled by approved authorities.
govern.
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Page 379 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps; include the
following:
1. Details of construction and finishes
2. Electrical ratings
3. Mounting
4. Photometric data
5. Submit samples as directed by the Engineer.
6. Drawings to scale
7. Lighting track (where applicable).
B. Samples: Submit sample for each type of lighting fixture specified in the lighting fixtures schedule
for review and approval.
C. Test: Submit type test certificates indicating the electrical ratings, photometric data, thermal
performance, and lifetime and energy efficiency data for the specified lighting fixtures as per IEC
62717.
1.5 WARRANTY
CCC. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
DDD. Warranty shall include:

use.
Page 380 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
EEE. The warranty Period shall be: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion for the whole luminaire
components life time (LED Chip, Driver, etc.) and 5 years for the whole luminaire lighting
performance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All luminaires shall be manufactured to IEC 60598-1 and 60598-2.
B. All luminaires supplied by the contractor shall be photometrically tested.
C. The contractors shall produce upon request, the photometric data for any luminaire specified or
supplied.
D. All luminaires shall be provided with a lamp compatible with the control gear used.
E. Luminaires shall not be suspended by their flexible cord. A separate means of suspension shall be
provided.
F. All flexible cords shall be anchored at both ends such that the cord is free from strain.
G. Any plastics used in the luminaire shall be light and UV stable and shall be suitable for their
application.
H. All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated and electrostatically spray-painted using
acrylic polyester or epoxy powders.
I. Non-compatible materials shall not be used in contact with each other.
J. Louvers shall be restrained to prevent them from failing out of the body of the luminaires under
normal conditions and when re-lamping. Metal louvers shall be earthed to the body of the luminaire
or the earth terminal.
Page 381 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
K. Diffusers shall be restrained to prevent them from falling out of the body of the luminaires under
normal conditions and when re-lamping.
L. Luminaires fitted with high frequency or electronic control gear shall be disconnected before the
circuit is tested for insulation resistance.
M. All luminaires designed for internal use shall be constructed to IP 20 and be Class 1 unless otherwise
stated.
N. A minimum life time of L80B50 50,000 hrs can be accepted at designated ambient temperature of
40 ºC in accordance to IES TM-21-11 for Indoor LED lighting luminaires.
O. All luminaires shall be manufactured to IEC 60598-1 and 60598-2.
P. All LED lighting luminaires shall be provided with LED chip compatible with the control gear used.
Q. All Indoor LED lighting luminaires shall work at 40 ºC ambient temperature and 90 ºC relative
humidity and storage temperature of 80 ºC.
R. The manufacturer/Supplier shall verify number of switching cycles before failure at least 15,000
times for all LED luminaires.
S. The contractor should stick to the specified lighting fixture manufacturer for each type of lighting
fixture, if the contractor is intended to use any other manufacturer he is fully responsible to re-
calculate the Lux level in all areas and to be submitted to the consultant for approval before
submitting his offer.
T. Lighting fixtures used for temporary lighting service shall not be used in the final handing over to
the owner.
2.2 LED LUMINAIRES
2.2-1 General:
A. The manufacturer/supplier shall provide photo-biological test reports from accredited laboratories
to prove that the fixture is classed as “Exempt” or “Low Risk” in accordance to IEC/EN 62471.
B. The LEDs shall only be from MacAdam Ellipse Steps ''1-3 Bins'' for Indoor LED lighting luminaires.
C. IESNA LM-79 Test report shall be submitted for each type of luminaire used with the selected driver
current, it will not be permitted to use any driver current except the current rated with the test
reports.
D. The Whole luminaire minimum efficacy shall be ≥ 100 lm/cctW at designated ambient temperature
of 40 ºC for Indoor LED lighting luminaires in accordance to LM-82 Test Report.
Page 382 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
E. Thermal Management Test report must be provided preferred in Situ Temperature Management
Test Report (ISTMT) under UL 1958 or equivalent.
F. IES LM-80 lumen maintenance test to be carried out for 10,000 hrs confirming Tsp used in (coming
from Thermal Management Test report at elevated ambient temperature 40ºC) for Indoor LED
lighting luminaires.
G. TM-21 (reported life time) shall be used to extrapolate the LM-80 lumen maintenance data to reach
60,000 hrs confirming Tsp (coming from Thermal Management Test report at elevated ambient
temperature 40ºC for Indoor LED lighting luminaires).
H. All LED luminaires shall be supplied complete with LED driver/controller as per the manufacturer
recommendations.
I. All cables shall be secured within the luminaire body to prevent loose lengths from touching hot
surfaces or becoming trapped beneath cover plates. Cable clips or cleats shall be captive and if
secured by adhesive, shall not loosen with age.
J. Wiring within the fixture shall be 125ºC, 500V and to be as per manufacturer recommendations.
K. LED modules shall be of 4000ºk color temperatures and the CRI shall be greater than 80 for Indoor
LED lighting luminaires unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Page 383 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.2-2 LED Drivers Technical Requirements
A. Drivers shall be RoHS Compliant.
B. Drivers shall have a total individual Luminaire Harmonic Distortion (THD) of ≤20% in accordance
with ANSI C82.77 (2002). However, the Contractor shall measure the harmonic at the supply point
(L.V side of the distribution substation) after the installation of all the LED luminaires and adopt
harmonic compensation methods to limit the total harmonics distortion in the supply voltage to
maximum 5% as per IEEE 519 regulations.
C. The Driver and driver output current shall be fully tested and compatible with the exact LED
chips/engine of the luminaire.
D. Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L: ≥0.95.
E. Driver shall be capable to operate at nominal supply phase voltage with accepted tolerance of +/-
10%.
F. LED driver shall be provided with constant light output function in order to maintain the light output
of the LED by increasing the LED driving current over the lifetime.
G. Control gear shall comply with IEC 61347-1, IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC 62384 and shall meet the limits
of main harmonic content as defined in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with radio interference
suppression limits defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of IEC 61547.
H. Power supplies can be UL Class 1 or II output or similar European CE or International equivalent.
I. Drivers shall be IP 21 for Indoor LED lighting luminaires.
J. Surge protection of 10 KV.
K. All drivers shall have protection features (short circuit, overload & thermal protection).
L. Driver/Fixture shall have some means of built-in overheat thermal protection in the form of
automatic dimming or stepping/holding down of the driver where temperature exceeds operational
limits.
2.3 Central Battery and Monitoring System:
2.3.1 System Description
A. Central battery system shall be provided to supply clean, regulated power supply for designated
lighting system when the incoming utility power is failed.
B. System shall compile of individual Static Inverters sited at various locations as indicated on the
drawings.
Page 384 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
C. The system shall be compatible with all types of connected luminaires (Metal halide, halogen, LED,
.... etc.)
2.3.2 Electrical Construction
A. The system shall be a network of individual Static Inverters sited in approved locations with the
following specification:
13 230 V.A.C, 60 Hz Sine Wave, 1-Phase, 2 wire plus earth.
 Input Voltage 12 :
14 400 V.A.C, 60 Hz Sine Wave, 3-Phase, 4 wire plus earth.
16 230 V.A.C. 60 Hz Sine Wave, 1-Phase, 2 wire plus earth.
 Output Voltage 15 :
17 400 V.A.C, 60 Hz Sine Wave, 3-Phase, 4 wire plus earth
For the purpose of monitoring, an addressable interface relay shall be installed within each lighting
fixture.
B. Rectifier
 Full Wave Controlled Thyristor/ Diode Bridge

 Input Power 19 0.9-
18 :
Factor 1
 Charge 21 C
20 :
Current Factor 10
C. Charger and Controls

230 + 10% V.A.C single phase, 60Hz.
 Mains Supply 22 :
400 + 10% V.A.C, three phase, 60 Hz.
 Input Control 23 : 24 MCB to BS3871 Pt. 1.

26 Double Wound With Earth Screen To
 Transformer 25 :
BS171.
28 Standard contactors comply with the
 Contactor 27 :
requirements of BS 5424
30 Constant voltage, current-limited type
with electronic solid state controller. Voltage is
 Charger 29 :
controlled to within 2% of setting at up to 10%
mains supply variations.
32 Fitted as standard on all units with lead
acid cells. The charger voltage is automatically
 Temperature
31 : adjusted with reference to ambient
Compensation
temperature to optimise charging and battery
life.
34 A key-operated manual
 Boost Control 33 : boost/commissioning switch is fitted to units
with vented batteries.
 Test Push-button 35 : 36 Simulates mains failure.
D. Inverter
Page 385 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
 Output voltage 37 230V.A.C.
: Or 400 V.A.C.
60Hz. + 0.01%. Standard setting

 Frequency 38 :
60Hz. Waveform: Sinusoidal.
 Voltage Regulation 39 Static: 2%, dynamic 6%.
 Isolation 40 2kv rms

: between input and output terminals.
 Total Harmonic Distortion 41 Less

: than 3% into a linear load.
 Power Factor 42 Will

: supply load in the 0.3 lag-0.3 lead range.
200% for 10 seconds, 125% for 20 minutes without
 Overload 43 reduction
: in output voltage.
Standard 30mS. Soft start up to 10 seconds if

 Start-up Time 44 required.
:
 Noise Level 45 Less

: than 55dBA at 1 metre.
 Efficiency : 85-89%.
DC input and AC output MCBs
DC input reverse polarity protection.
 Protection 46 Short
: circuit protection.
Pre-charge protection fuse.
Reverse-fed mains proof.
The inverter module(s) automatically shut down

when the battery discharges to a pre-set level. Re-
set is following a combination of the restoration of
the mains supply and an increase in battery
 Low voltage shut down 47 :
voltage above the disconnect threshold level.
Residual current drain when the disconnect circuit

has operated is less than 1mA per module.
An inhibit switch to control the inverter is fitted on

 Inhibit 48 a user
: control PCB in the cubicle.
Pulse width modulation with high frequency

 Technology 49 switching.
:
2.3.3 Environmental Conditions
A. Ambient Temperature (Nominal) : 15 – 300C
Page 386 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Manufacture Standard : BS 5266 and EN 50171
2.3.4 Mechanical Construction

The Central Battery Inverter cabinet shall be 1.6 mm. Zinc coated sheet steel, powder coated
paintwork RAL 9002, Grey in colour. The cabinet shall be IP 21 with hinged front door for complete
access. The display panel shall be mounted flush in the cabinet facia. If the batteries cannot be
accommodated in the inverter enclosure, then they shall be installed in a separate adjacent
enclosure to the same specification at the inverter cabinet.
Page 387 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.3.5 Batteries
The Batteries shall be maintenance free, valve regulated lead acid type with a minimum design life
of 10 years and to be rated at 100% at the end of this period. This requires the batteries to be rated
at 120% when first installed.
The Batteries shall be sized to power the complete system for 3 hours following mains failure at
100% light output of all emergency lamps.
 Full recharge within 24 hours of a rated discharge.

 Recharge to 80% capacity within 12 hours, complying with BSEN 5017:2001.
2.3.6 Metering & Display Panel
A. Simple and easy to read status display.
B. LCD meter indicating battery voltage, battery current or battery compartment temperature.
Voltage is default, others are displayed using push buttons.
1. Display mode indicated by LED’s for the following: -

 Volt.
 AMP.
 Temp. for batteries.
2. Charger indication LED’s for the following: -

 Power on.
 Maintained lights.
 Float mode.
 Boost mode.
3. Alarm indication LED’s for the following: -

 Mains fail.
 Charge fail.
 Battery high volts.
 Battery low volts.
 DC earth fault.
 Deep discharge protection.
4. Inverter indication LED’s for the following: -

 Inverter running.
 Inverter overload.
 Inverter High volts.
 Inverter low volts.
5. Audible alarm fitted internally, with mute button on display plus common volt free contacts for
remote signalling at a fault condition and terminals for remote alarm unit.
Page 388 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.3.7 Static Inverter Conversions (ACM Module)
Static inverter control module used with all emergency luminaire, in low profile case complete with
changeover form mains supply to emergency supply comply with EN 60598-2-22 for controlling
individual luminaries similar to copper model No. ACM1 or approved equal. It could be installed in
the luminaire itself or in a remote ventilated metallic box.
2.3.8 Easicheck Panel:
A. The easicheck Panel shall address each exit and emergency fitting safety light and label each fitting
with details in English text as follows:
1. Location details
2. Lamp type and Number
3. Failure information
4. Isolate / De-Isolate
5. Automatic test / Manual test
The facility of constant monitoring shall be available. Any exit sign or sub-circuit failure shall be
immediately reported to the local monitoring panel and onward to all network panels. This facility
enables immediate response to fitting or / and area failures. This facility should not rely on
automatic or manual tests for failure indication.
It shall be possible to programme automatic testing of fittings individually, by group or complete

system. All failures shall be indicated globally on the secure network. Each panel shall hold its own
programme in a non-volatile memory and act as a stand-alone system in the event of network
failure.
B. Panel is constructed from flame retardant polycarbonate. 2-line x 40-character LCD display and soft
touch 5 button keypad.
C. Panel is used to facilitate the following functions: -
 Set up test types and times.

 Set up testing groups.
 Initiate manual tests.
 Display real time current / volt of single luminaire.
 Print test result via a remote printer.
D. Panel indicates the following status: -

Page 389 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
 Power on.
 Emergency mode.
 General fault.
 System fault.
 Test in progress.
 Disable luminaire groups.
 Fault indication.
2.3.9 Easicheck Luminaire Interface Module:
A. Compact module fitted into all emergency luminaries.
B. Each interface module requires addressing during installation using a hand held programmer or via
the central PC.
C. Interfaces are connected to the Easicheck Panel by means of (fire resistant shielded twisted pair
control cables) and to be (as per the manufacture’s recommendations).
2.3.10 Monitoring and Control:

The system shall be monitored and controlled from central PC unit and global network printer
located at the main control room at level (01).
2.3.11 Slave Exit Signs:
A. The slave exit signs shall operate in the maintained mode as programmed and to be complete with
its own addressable interface module.
B. All exit signs shall be manufactured to meet the appropriate requirements of IEC standards signs.
C. Sizes of lettering shall comply with IEC standards.
24 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
A. GENERAL
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the design and installation of all lighting
complies with the current CIBSE lighting code and with this specification.
All layouts shall be developed in conjunction with the Employer's Authorized Representative.
B. PLANT AREAS
The contractor shall ensure luminaires are positioned such that lighting levels are not significantly
affected by adjacent services such as pipe work or ductwork where necessary luminaires shall be
installed on chains.
The contractor shall consider the use of plant rooms (i.e. lift motor room, electrical switch room,
water tank room) before determining the lighting design criteria.
Page 390 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed. Notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
standards.
C. Upon installation at site the central battery system should be subjected to testing as performed in
the factory to ensure that no damages have occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be
energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures as indicated, in accordance with lighting fixture manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to insure that installation complies with requirements and fulfils intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other works.
C. Install each fixture properly and safely. Furnish and erect hangers, rods, mounting brackets,
supports, bases, cables, canopies, channels, frames, and other equipment required.
D. Furnish lighting fixtures complete with appurtenances required for the proper, safe and
distortion-free installation in the various surfaces in which they appear.
E. Obtain each lighting fixture packaged with complete instructions and illustrations showing how to
install. Install lighting fixtures in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
Page 391 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
F. Install lighting fixtures plumb and at a height from the floor as specified. In cases where conditions
make this impractical, refer to the consultant for a decision. Use ball aligners, hang straights and
canopies on pendant fixtures.
G. Do not install fixtures and/or parts such as finishing plates and trims for recessed fixtures until all
plastering and painting that may mark fixtures finish has been completed.
H. Lighting fixture locations in mechanical and technical rooms is approximate. Coordinate mounting
height and location of lighting fixtures to clear equipment and to illuminate equipment adequately.
I. Support all lighting fixtures independently.
J. Whenever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a surface mounted outlet box, utilize a
finishing ring to conceal the outlet box.
K. Make splices in internal wiring with approved insulated "wire nut" type mechanical connectors,
suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to which they are subjected.
L. Use wire suitable for temperature, current, and voltage conditions to which it is subjected where
utilized for connections to or between individual lamp sockets and lamp auxiliaries (i.e., wires which
do not constitute "through circuit" wiring).
M. Replace blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed.
N. Install all lighting units set true and free of light leaks, warps, dents, and other irregularities.
O. Install all lighting units free of dust and dirt.
P. Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. In general, the approved
coordinated reflected ceiling workshop plans shall indicate the proper locations of lighting fixtures.
Q. Rigidly align continuous rows of lighting fixtures for true in-line appearance.
R. Do not install recessed fluorescent fixtures weighing more than 18 kilograms directly on a concealed
or exposed ceiling spline of a lightweight acoustical ceiling system. Support such fixtures from the
building structure.
Page 392 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
S. Do not mount surface or pendant type fluorescent fixtures regardless of their weight directly on the
concealed or exposed ceiling spline of a lightweight, acoustical ceiling system. Support such fixtures
from the building structure.
T. Install reflector cones, baffles, aperture plates, light controlling element for air handling fixtures,
visible trim, and decorative elements after completion of ceiling tiles, painting and general cleanup.
Carefully handle to avoid scratching or fingerprinting and provide completely clean to the Employer
at the time of acceptance.
A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and after building circuitry has been energized;
apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When
possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
B. Certify that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
Page 393 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 265600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
C. Basic electrical materials and methods, Section 260500, applies to work of this section.
D. Surge protective devices, section 264313.
complete and make ready for operation all lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps in accordance with
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, SASO 182, SASO 203,
SASO 254, SASO 255, SASO 444, SASO 608, SASO 691, SASO 692, SASO 979, SASO 981, SASO 1131,
SASO 1132, SASO 1350, SASO 1351, SASO 1596, SASO 1612, IEC 228, ASTM B 3, DIN/VDE, IEC 60598,
IEC 62504, IEC 62717, IEC 62031 and IEEE Standards pertaining to lighting fixtures, ballasts, and
lamps. Provide lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps products and components which have been
labelled by approved authorities.
govern.
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps; include the
following:
Page 394 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Details of construction and finishes
2. Electrical ratings
3. Mounting
4. Photometric data
5. Submit samples as directed by the Engineer.
6. Drawings to scale
7. Lighting track (where applicable).
B. Samples: Submit sample for each type of lighting fixture specified in the lighting fixtures schedule
for review and approval.
C. Test: Submit type test certificates indicating the electrical ratings, photometric data, thermal
performance, lifetime and energy efficiency data for the specified lighting fixtures as per IEC 62717.
1.5 WARRANTY
FFF.Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
GGG. Warranty shall include:

use.
HHH. The warranty Period shall be: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion of the project for the
whole luminaire components life time (LED Chip, Driver, etc.) and 5 years for the whole luminaire
lighting performance.
Page 395 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
U. All luminaires shall be manufactured to IEC 60598-1 and 60598-2.
V. All luminaires supplied by the contractor shall be photometrically tested.
W. The contractors shall produce upon request, the photometric data for any luminaire specified or
supplied.
X. All luminaires shall be provided with a lamp compatible with the control gear used.
Y. Luminaires shall not be suspended by their flexible cord. A separate means of suspension shall be
provided.
Z. All flexible cords shall be anchored at both ends such that the cord is free from strain.
AA. Any plastics used in the luminaire shall be light and UV stable and shall be suitable for their
application.
BB. All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated and electrostatically spray-painted using
acrylic polyester or epoxy powders.
CC. Non-compatible materials shall not be used in contact with each other.
DD. Louvers shall be restrained to prevent them from failing out of the body of the luminaires under
normal conditions and when re-lamping. Metal louvers shall be earthed to the body of the luminaire
or the earth terminal.
EE. Diffusers shall be restrained to prevent them from falling out of the body of the luminaires under
normal conditions and when re-lamping.
FF. Luminaires fitted with high frequency or electronic control gear shall be disconnected before the
circuit is tested for insulation resistance.
GG. All luminaires designed for external use shall be constructed to minimum classification of IP 54 and
be class 1 unless otherwise stated.
Page 396 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
HH. A minimum life time of L80B50 50,000 hrs can be accepted at designated ambient temperature of
50 ºC in accordance to IES TM-21-11 for Outdoor LED lighting luminaires.
II. All luminaires shall be manufactured to IEC 60598-1 and 60598-2.
JJ. All LED lighting luminaires shall be provided with LED chip compatible with the control gear used.
KK. All Outdoor LED lighting luminaires shall work at 50 ºC ambient temperature and 90 ºC relative
humidity and storage temperature of 80 ºC.
LL. The manufacturer/Supplier shall verify number of switching cycles before failure at least 15,000
times for all LED luminaires.
MM. The contractor should stick to the specified lighting fixture manufacturer for each type of lighting
fixture, if the contractor is intended to use any other manufacturer he is fully responsible to re-
calculate the Lux level in all areas and to be submitted to the consultant for approval before
submitting his offer.
NN. Lighting fixtures used for temporary lighting service shall not be used in the final handing over to
the owner.
2.2 LED LUMINAIRES
2.2-1 General:
L. The manufacturer/supplier shall provide photo-biological test reports from accredited laboratories
to prove that the fixture is classed as “Exempt” or “Low Risk” in accordance to IEC/EN 62471.
M. The LEDs shall only be from MacAdam Ellipse Steps ''1-6 Bins'' for Outdoor LED lighting luminaires.
N. IESNA LM-79 Test report shall be submitted for each type of luminaire used with the selected driver
current, it will not be permitted to use any driver current except the current rated with the test
reports.
O. The Whole luminaire minimum efficacy shall be ≥ 100 lm/cctW at designated ambient 50 ºC for
Outdoor LED lighting luminaires in accordance to LM-82 Test Report.
P. Thermal Management Test report must be provided, preferred In Situ Temperature Management
Test Report (ISTMT) under UL 1958 or equivalent.
Q. IES LM-80 lumen maintenance test to be carried out for 10,000 hrs confirming Tsp used in (coming
from Thermal Management Test report at elevated ambient temperature 50ºC) for Outdoor LED
lighting luminaires.
R. TM-21 (reported life time) shall be used to extrapolate the LM-80 lumen maintenance data to reach
60,000 hrs confirming Tsp (coming from Thermal Management Test report at elevated ambient
temperature 50ºC for Outdoor LED lighting luminaires).
Page 397 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
S. All LED luminaires shall be supplied complete with LED driver/controller as per the manufacturer
recommendations.
T. All cables shall be secured within the luminaire body to prevent loose lengths from touching hot
surfaces or becoming trapped beneath cover plates. Cable clips or cleats shall be captive and if
secured by adhesive, shall not loosen with age.
U. Wiring within the fixture shall be 125ºC, 500V and to be as per manufacturer recommendations.
V. LED modules shall be of 4000ºk color temperatures and the CRI shall be greater than 70 for Outdoor
LED lighting luminaires unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2.2-2 LED Drivers Technical Requirements
M. Drivers shall be RoHS Compliant.

N. Drivers shall have a total individual Luminaire Harmonic Distortion (THD) of ≤20% in accordance
with ANSI C82.77 (2002). However, the Contractor shall measure the harmonic at the supply point
(L.V side of the distribution substation) after the installation of all the LED luminaires and adopt
harmonic compensation methods to limit the total harmonics distortion in the supply voltage to
maximum 5% as per IEEE 519 regulations.
O. The Driver and driver output current shall be fully tested and compatible with the exact LED
chips/engine of the luminaire.
P. Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L: ≥0.95.
Q. Driver shall be capable to operate at nominal supply phase voltage with accepted tolerance of +/-
10%.
R. LED driver shall be provided with constant light output function in order to maintain the light output
of the LED by increasing the LED driving current over the lifetime.
S. Control gear shall comply with IEC 61347-1, IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC 62384 and shall meet the limits
of main harmonic content as defined in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with radio interference
suppression limits defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of IEC 61547.
T. Power supplies can be UL Class 1 or II output or similar European CE or International equivalent.
U. Drivers shall be “IP 66” for Outdoor LED lighting luminaires.
V. Surge protection of 10 KV.
W. All drivers shall have protection features (short circuit, overload & thermal protection).
X. Driver/Fixture shall have some means of built-in overheat thermal protection in the form of
automatic dimming or stepping/holding down of the driver where temperature exceeds operational
limits.
Page 398 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2.3 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
A. GENERAL
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the design and installation of all lighting
complies with the current CIBSE lighting code and with this specification.
All layouts shall be developed in conjunction with the Employer's Authorized Representative.
B. EXTERNAL LIGHTING
The Contractor shall install supplies to positions of luminaires shown on the lighting drawing.
Wherever possible outlets shall be waterproof type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
D. Examine conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed. Notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
E. The tests to be carried out in accordance to IET 17th. Edition, BS 7671, all other relevant international
standards.
F. Upon installation at site the central battery system should be subjected to testing as performed in
the factory to ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be
energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures as indicated, in accordance with lighting fixture manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to insure that installation complies with requirements and fulfils intended function.
Page 399 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
B. Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other works.
C. Install each fixture properly and safely. Furnish and erect hangers, rods, mounting brackets,
supports, bases, cables, canopies, channels, frames, and other equipment required.
D. Furnish lighting fixtures complete with appurtenances required for the proper, safe and
distortion-free installation in the various surfaces in which they appear.
E. Obtain each lighting fixture packaged with complete instructions and illustrations showing how to
install. Install lighting fixtures in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
F. Install lighting fixtures plumb and at a height from the floor as specified. In cases where conditions
make this impractical, refer to the consultant for a decision. Use ball aligners, hang straights and
canopies on pendant fixtures.
G. Do not install fixtures and/or parts such as finishing plates and trims for recessed fixtures until all
plastering and painting that may mark fixtures finish has been completed.
H. Lighting fixture locations in mechanical and technical rooms is approximate. Coordinate mounting
height and location of lighting fixtures to clear equipment and to illuminate equipment adequately.
I. Support all lighting fixtures independently.
J. Whenever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a surface mounted outlet box, utilize a
finishing ring to conceal the outlet box.
K. Make splices in internal wiring with approved insulated "wire nut" type mechanical connectors,
suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to which they are subjected.
L. Use wire suitable for temperature, current, and voltage conditions to which it is subjected where
utilized for connections to or between individual lamp sockets and lamp auxiliaries (i.e., wires which
do not constitute "through circuit" wiring).
M. Replace blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed.
N. Install all lighting units set true and free of light leaks, warps, dents, and other irregularities.
O. Install all lighting units free of dust and dirt.
P. Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. In general, the approved
coordinated reflected ceiling workshop plans shall indicate the proper locations of lighting fixtures.
Page 400 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
Q. Rigidly align continuous rows of lighting fixtures for true in-line appearance.
R. Do not install recessed fluorescent fixtures weighing more than 18 kilograms directly on a concealed
or exposed ceiling spline of a lightweight acoustical ceiling system. Support such fixtures from the
building structure.
S. Do not mount surface or pendant type fluorescent fixtures regardless of their weight directly on the
concealed or exposed ceiling spline of a lightweight, acoustical ceiling system. Support such fixtures
from the building structure.
T. Install reflector cones, baffles, aperture plates, light controlling element for air handling fixtures,
visible trim, and decorative elements after completion of ceiling tiles, painting and general cleanup.
Carefully handle to avoid scratching or fingerprinting and provide completely clean to the Employer
at the time of acceptance.
A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and after building circuitry has been energized;
apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When
possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
B. Certify that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
Page 401 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
SECTION 269999
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
Division 260000:
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.
1. Riyadh (K.S.A)
2. Bahra (K.S.A)
3. Alfanar (K.S.A)
4. Saudi Cables (K.S.A)
Or approved equal
Cable Terminations (For M.T. Cables)
1. Raychem (U.S.A)
2. Elastimold (U.S.A)
3. REPL (U.k)
Or approved equal.
Fire Stopping Material
1. Roxtec (Sweden)
2. STI (U.S.A)
3. HILTI (U.S.A)
4. 3M (U.S.A)
Or approved equal.
Fire Resistant Cables
1. Bahra (K.S.A)
2. Prysmian (Italy)
3. Riyadh (K.S.A)
4. Alfanar (K.S.A)
Or approved equal.
Fire Stopping Material

Page 402 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
1. Roxtec (Sweden)
2. STI (U.S.A)
3. HILTI (U.S.A)
4. 3M (U.S.A)
Or approved equal.
260513 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES.
1. Bahra (K.S.A)
2. Saudi Cables (K.S.A)
3. Riyadh (K.S.A)
4. Alfanar (K.S.A)
Or approved equal.
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
1. Furse (U.K)
2. Erico (Germany)
3. Wallis (U.K)
Or approved equal.
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELETRICAL SYSTEMS.
Metal Conduits & Accessories
1. Allied (U.S.A)
2. Wheatland (U.S.A)
3. Saudi Steel Pipe (K.S.A)
4. Tabalsa (K.S.A)
5. ITCC (K.S.A)
6. SFSP (K.S.A)
Or approved equal.
P.V.C Conduits & Accessories.
1. Ega tube (Saudi)
Page 403 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. Decoduct (Dubai)
3. Mk (U.K)
4. BC
Or approved equal.
Steel Back Boxes
1. Thomas & betts (U.S.A)
2. Steel city (U.S.A)
3. O.Z / Gendey (U.S.A)
Or approved equal
CABLE TRUNKING
1. Legrand (France)
2. OBO (EU)
3. Electrolink (K.S.A)
4. ISP
Or approved equal
Page 404 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
1. Electrolink
2. Hissam Kabbani (K.S.A)
3. Bahra (K.S.A)
4. Legrand (France)
5. OBO (EU)
Or approved equal.
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
1. Gatic Neenah. (for covers) (U.k)
2. Deco Duct (Dubai)
3. Saudi Pipe System (K.S.A)
4. Delta Project System (U.S.A/K.S. A)
5. Ega tube (K.S.A)
Or approved equal
260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
1. MASON (U.S.A)
2. Kinetics (U.S.A)
Or approved equal.
261200 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS.
1. ABB (Germany)
2. Schneider (France)
3. Legrand (France)
4. Siemens (Germany)
Or approved equal from SAUDIA market
261300 GAS INSULATED METAL ENCLOSED MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
5. ABB (Germany)
Page 405 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
6. Schneider electric (France)
7. SIEMENS (Germany)
8. GE (USA)
Or approved equal.
262413 SWITCHBOARDS.
10. ABB (Germany)
11. GE (USA/EU)
13. Legrand (France)
Or approved equal
262416 PANELBOARDS.
14. Schneider electrical (France)
1. ABB (Germany)
2. Legrand (France)
3. GE (USA/EU)
Or approved equal
262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES.
1. General Electric (U.S.A)
2. Eaton (U.S.A)
3. Siemens (Vietnam)
4. Legrand Zucchini (France)
6. ABB (Germany)
Or approved equal.
Page 406 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
262713 ELECTRICTY METERING.
1. Schneider electrical (France)
2. ABB (Germany)
3. Legrand (France)
4. GE (USA/EU)
Or approved equal.
262726 WIRING DEVICES.
Switches & Sockets:
1. Bticino (living type) (Italy)
2. Legrand (mosaic) (France)
3. M.K. (U.K)
4. Jung (ls type) (Germany)
Or approved equal.
Floor Boxes:
1. Legrand (France)
2. Ackermann (Germany)
3. 3RD BRAND
Or approved equal.
Aluminum Cable Trunking:
1. MK (Axim Technical) (U.K)
2. Legrand (France)
3. 3RD BRAND
Or approved equal.
Single Phase Disconnect Switches:
1. MK (logic plus type) (U.K)
Page 407 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
2. Legrand (U.K)
3. Eaton (U.K)
4. GE (USA/EU)
5. Square D (U.S.A)
Or approved equal.
Passive Movement Detector (PD):
1. Legrand (France)
2. Leviton (U.S.A)
3. MK (U.K)
Or approved equal.
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. General electric (U.S.A)
2. Eaton (U.S.A)
3. Siemens (U.S.A)
4. Katko (Finland)
5. Socomec (France)
6. Square D (U.S.A)
7. GE (USA/EU)
9. ABB (Germany)
Or approved equal.
263213 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS.
1. Caterpillar (U.K)
2. Cummins/onan (U.K)
3. SDMO (France)
4. Mitsubishi (Japan/UK/Singapore)
5. MTU (Germany)
Page 408 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
6. FG Wilson (U.K)
7. Generac (U.S.A)
Or approved equal
Page 409 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY.
U.P.S
2. Vertiv/Chloride/Libert (Italy/Slovakia)
3. MGE (France)
4. APC (U.S.A)
5. General electric (Switzerland)
6. Socomec (France)
7. Pillar (Germany)
8. Legrand (France)
Or approved equal.
Batteries
1. Hoppecke. (Germany)
2. Yuasa (U.K)
3. C & D. (U.S.A)
4. Exide (India)
Or approved equal.
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS.
2. ABB (Germany)
3. GE (USA/EU)
5. Legrand (France)
Or approved equal
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES.
1. ASCO (U.S.A)
2. Zenith (U.S.A)
Page 410 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
3. KOHLER (U.S.A)
Or approved equal
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES.
1. Erico (Germany)
2. Furse (U.K)
3. Wallis (U.K)
Or approved equal
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Same as Switchboards manufacturers.
264600 PROJECT SPECIALITY ITEMS
1. BENDER
2. PG LIFELINK
Or approved equal
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING.
1. Philips (Holland)
2. Bega (Germany)
3. Thorn (U.K)
4. Tri-Lux (Germany)
5. Zumtobel (Austria)
6. ERCO (Germany)
7. RZB (Germany)
8. Eaton (U.K)
9. Simes (Italy)
Or approved equal.
Emergency lighting central battery
1. Eaton (U.K)
2. OVA (Italy)
3. ABB (Germany)
Page 411 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832
4. Gessler (Germany)
Or approved equal.
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.

1. Philips (Holland)
2. Bega (Germany)
3. Thorn (U.K)
4. Tri-Lux (Germany)
5. Zumtobel (Austria)
6. ERCO (Germany)
7. RZB (Germany)
8. Eaton (U.K)
9. Simes (Italy)
Or approved equal.
Page 412 of 412
CR: 1010565823
License N: 5100000547
Phone: 920027979 -
966540388832

Final Elec Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final Elec Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final Elec Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BUSINES PARK - P0015-821

KNOWLEDGE ECONOMIC CITY - KEC

ELECTRICAL WORKS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section No. Description

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

C. Vibration and seismic controls for electrical systems, Section 260548.

A. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization

SASO 14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic (uPVC)

SASO 51 Switches for domestic purposes

SASO 52 Methods of test for switches for domestic purposes

SASO 55 PVC insulated cables with circular copper conductors

SASO 139 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting purposes

SASO 147 Starters for fluorescent lamps

SASO 255 Plastic conduits and fittings for electrical installations

SASO 417 Electric luminaries for road and street lighting

SSO 508 Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.

SASO 608 Methods of test for air-cooled electric motors

SASO 609 Air-cooled electric motors

SASO 691 Ballasts for high pressure mercury vapor lamps

SASO 774 Methods of testing fiberglass reinforced polyester meter boxes

SASO 775 Fiberglass reinforced polyester meter boxes

SASO 979 Fire-resisting characteristics of electric cables

SASO 1131 High pressure mercury vapor lamps

SASO 1132 Methods of testing high pressure mercury vapor lamps.

SASO 1350 High pressure sodium vapor lamps.

SASO 1612 Circuit -Breakers for equipment

B. IEC - International Electro Technical Commission

IEC 56 High Voltage Alternating Circuit Breakers

IEC 228 Conductors of Insulated Cables

ASTM B 3 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM D 256 Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials

D. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

37.13a Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breaker Used in Enclosures

E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc

UL 1 Safety Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 20 Safety Standard for General Use Snap Switches

UL 50 Safety Standard for Cabinets and Boxes

UL 67 Safety Standard for Panel boards

UL 83 Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Wires

UL 93 Safety Standard for Enclosed Switches

UL 198 Safety Standard for Fuses

UL 498 Safety Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 508 Safety Standard for Industrial Control Equipment

UL 514 Safety Standard for Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings

UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduits

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.4 PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

1.6 CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS

1.7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

2.1 GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

SEC - Saudi Electricity Company.

"Agreement" Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings:

"Agreed" or - Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing

a. When given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of construction submitted

2.3 DEFINITIONS OF TECHNICAL WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS

2.5 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS